Home

Manual de Utilização

1. TCP IP Parameters Initial Time out x 100 ms He 12 j on Ficenein Used range QB4096 QB 12287 J NX3010 NX3010 Persistent Area Project Parameters Q Start Address E Generate error on tasks watchdog consistency 12288 EA Consist retain and persistent area in Q as Memory Card 3192 2 Memory Card Used range QB12288 QB20479 E Messages Current user nobody Figure 4 15 CPU Configuration Besides that for the communication between the CPU and the MasterTool IEC XE to be possible the Ethernet NET l interface must be configured Double clicking on the CPU NET 1 icon in the devices tree a new tab will appear for the configuration of the communication network where the module is connected 43 4 Quick Start La Bill of Materials E Configuration and Consumption 4 Diagnostic Explorer a Diagnostics al Library Manager E MainPrg PRG 2 POU PRG 28 Task Configuration E Configuration e MainTask a Configuration Bus J NX3010 Nx3010 Y comi a coma w NX30x project MasterTool IEC XE Lola Fie Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help EA ee en Devices I X StartPage i Configuration Bus fj NET 1 xQ y Se M0 y 5 5 Device NX3010 Ethernet Port Parameters a E PLC Logic Ethernet Port Parameters e ee IP Address 192 168 15 1 g Subnetwork Mask 255 255 2
2. ccccccsssssssssseseeeecccceeceeeeeeaaasseessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesssnseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeqaaas J2 User Files Memory aiii in AAA 77 gt USER AND ACCESS RIGHT MANAGEMEN GT sacos 81 User Managemen A e EOE ENNE EENE EEE NE EEN NE oS 81 Access Richt Man COME A A AA A AA A 81 Users ANG Col OU Sic rallada dada llas 82 SES A aise ctoaina natin tue amiaaaca haccnata deena nator atnceammescnsapecipalndsane 85 SO O tods 87 M Onni A O enna een II O O O A narettren een irre 87 s MENU COMEMA NDS erica Ai aoaaa aaea aaia o iaaea esasa 88 A A E E E E E E 88 NOP O a E T wiouseitenasstie eseetnegnttean aieamuaaestscsc soutien 88 joys Wl es 80 2 6 Bemennees eaten ee A NOT 90 CIOE PIO a diia 91 SIVE 0 E A a a a iaieaad Glee cacn aden 91 E A O A A TCO SO 92 Projestarclive Extract Arne dais 92 Project Archive Save Send ATchiVe nirereto ita 94 SONICS A sinc sere esti Sarees icine te a aai a 96 Soto DOW il OAd aa xces ascites ias 97 A O E ET 97 O 97 A A A 97 A Neen ee er eer renee cer ae Mine ear eaten Teas EA E EA eee E arene A VARN EA E T 98 Edit y ES 11 svscerssincess ccssscaseeseadeuscduccswacsiiessacecacoesesuatanscadsassscssdesbassasnssasuadatecsdsasnsasudesbadesasvsatiuadecccsasassdaseisssecdccestins 98 Undo Rd E ie een nl Maen nr net odee en nee a Mets eee verte een roe 98 TID Octal esse O E O 99 AA A A A A A aod eextahamteaade nc 100 A Mee ee re eee nzE een T ie ne nren me Trt tren TESTE tny Me RTT ene Tar re Sener rere rrr
3. Figure 7 26 Properties Dialog Category Access Control To edit the right for a certain action and group select the respective field in the table perform a mouse click or use lt spacebar gt to open the selection list and from there choose the desired right For a description on possible actions rights and the symbols please see the help page on the Permissions dialog Group View Modify Remove lt Add remove chile 92 eveyone ea Grant a Figure 7 27 Selection List of Rights for action Modify for group Everyone 119 7 Menu Commands Boot Application Properties Application Device PLC Logic B Common Information Boot application Build Dynamic memory setting gt oe Figure 7 28 Properties Boot Application Category It depends on the device whether these settings are available e Implicit boot application on download If activated at a download of the project automatically a boot application will be created e Implicit boot application on Online Change If activated at an online change automatically a boot application will be created e Remind boot application on project close If activated when going to close the project you will be asked whether the boot application should be updated created Link to File Global variables lists can be defined with the help of an
4. id W NX30x project MasterTool IEC XE o O mesa File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Heel a o g A A Devices a X E Start Page Configuration Bus POU a Mow 1 PROGRAM POU 2 E J Device NX3010 3 2 vaR PLCLogic 3 iVar_1 INT e Application 4 iVar_2 INT La Bill of Materials a Tuar A E F Configuration and Consumption A A a A 7 END VAR Kg Diagnostic Explorer a gt de Diagnostc i Library Manager E MainPrg PRG E POU PRG 28 Task Configuration e amp Configuration 4 m MainTask 1 iVar_1 iVar 1 iVar_2 2 A Ef Configuration Bus 2 iVar_2 iVar_2 1 J nx3010 Nx3010 A comi 4 iVar_3 0 TO 10000 BY 1 DO b diid 5 iVar_4 iVar 4 iVar 1 6 END FOR Y NET1 4 Th r 4 mW p E Messages Current user nobody INS Ln6 Col8 Ch8 Figure 4 10 POU Editing Creating Tasks For a POU to be executed 1t must be connected to a task This scaling mechanism called Task is very useful for real time systems which are defined by the periodic execution or under request of an event change of state of any Boolean variable The tasks control the program execution in different rates according to the application features The need to execute programs in different rates has the goal to reach the demand for process under control answer time and optimize the CPU processing capacity The controllers that use tasks are called multitask It
5. Figure 4 20 Selecting the Protocol MODBUS Ethernet The first step to configure the MODBUS Ethernet in client mode 1s to include the instance in the desired NET in this case NET 1 as the CPU NX3010 has only one Ethernet interface Click on the NET with the mouse right button and select Add Device as shown on Figure 4 21 47 4 Quick Start 3 MON ff Device Nx3010 S E PLCLogic Application 3 Bill of Materials 1 Configuration and Consumption 4 Diagnostic Explorer ae ad Diagnoste i Library Manager E MainPrg PRG E POU PRG 3 Task Configuration E Configuration gE MainTask i Configuration Bus f Nx3010 Nx3010 OO b Y COM 1 A COM2 a heri aaa Cut Copy Paste Delete Properties Add Object D Add Folder A Edit Object Edit Object With a TT l Figure 4 21 Adding an Instance After that the available protocols for the user will appear on the screen Set the mode of the protocol configuration and select MODBUS Symbol Client or MODBUS Client for the correspondent configuration Then click Add as shown on Figure 4 22 48 4 Quick Start HH Add Device Name MODBUS_ Client Action Append device Insertdevice Plug device Update device Devices Vendor Mame Vendor Version Mopsus 5 H MODBUS Ethernet H MODBUS Client 8 MODBUS Client 1 0 0 2 MODBUS Server A Display all versions fo
6. Figure 8 18 Device Dialog Log A log entry line contains the following information 249 8 Editors e Severity There are four categories warnings errors exceptions information The display of the entries of each category can be switched on or off by using the corresponding button from the bar above the listing Each button always contains the current number of loggings in the respective category 523 warning s 524 error s E 0 exception s 0 information s e Time Stamp Date and Time MM DD YY h mm AM PM ss ms Example 2 15 2012 7 05 AM 20 0 e Description description of the event for example Import function failed of Component lt CmpFileTransfer gt e Component ID and name of the component e Selection list of component names Here you can choose a particular component in order to get only displayed log entries concerning this component The default setting is lt All components gt e Logger The selection list provides the available loggings The default setting is lt Default Logger gt which is defined by the runtime system and currently is identical with PlcLog for runtime system in Nexto Series CPUs Currently the user manually can update the list by using button NOTE While the update button 1s pressed the programmer and the CPU will be connected even 1f the Logout command is executed In this case to provide the communication and or sending pr
7. La Diagnost Paste a Diagnost Delete i Library m Properties MainPrg pE Task Conll tz DUT Main Add Device Global Variable List i T oono ma ii Persistent Variables comi LN ore PID Control COM2 Edit Object With POL 4 NETI O8 Login POU for implicit checks Simulation Leas a TA Figure 8 76 Steps to inserting the PID Control object in an application When you add a PID Control object 1s inserted a Program type POU into the project This program contains a function block of PID type as well as all logical and necessary parameters for 1ts use Within the object can be configured as variables that are used as inputs and outputs as well as the sampling time used in the control Graphical Environment The graphical environment of the PID Control object is formed by a screen composed of two tabs e Settings amp Chart This is the main tab where are configured the main parameters and where is located the trend chart e Advanced Settings in this tab are contained minor PID loop settings The Figure 8 77 displays the graphical environment of the PID Control object with its main tab open First of all can be observed the trend chart the bar graphs the possibility to perform settings of some parameters of PID controller among others These an
8. No Details Figure 4 30 Variable Changes At the first time an application is sent to the CPU the message shown on Figure 4 31 will appear on the MasterTool IEC XE screen 53 4 Quick Start Application Application does not exist on device Do you want to create it and proceed with download Figure 4 31 First Application Sending Run Mode Right after the project has been sent to the CPU the application will not be immediately executed only if an online online change transmission were made For that to happen the command Start must be selected This function allows the user to control the execution of the application sent to the CPU Besides it allows initial values to be pre configured in order to turn possible the CPU updating on the first cycle To select such functionality the option Start from the Debug menu must be clicked as shown on Figure 4 32 Se NX3Qvo project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help MENA amp ico Stop Shift F8 New Breakpoint Toggle Breakpoint of EM PLE Logic 0 Hh Bill of Materials step Over F10 Step Into FS Shift F 10 step Out Diagnostic Explore a gt Run to Cursor Diagnostic a set next Statement MainPrg PRG a a Task Configuration bee ge Configuration MainTask S F i Configuration Bus S A f Nx3010 Nx3020 3 comi
9. At last the AND box will be re inserted ahead of jump count and thus will get number 4 This again effects a reducing of the numbers each for label count before then having 4 output ivar3 and RETURN by 1 Therefore the following new order of execution will arise 173 7 Menu Commands Ob pe mf lt RETURN 1El Figure 7 89 Sequence Afterwards Also a new element always will be inserted in the sequential processing list ahead of its topological successor Set Execution Order This command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu It serves to redefine the element number of the currently selected element in order to change the position of this element within the execution order The command opens the dialog Set Execution Order The current element number is displayed in field Current Execution Order and you can enter the desired new one in New Execution Order The possible values are displayed in brackets Set Execution Order Current Execution Order New Execution Order 0 0 Figure 7 90 Set Execution Order Connect Selected Pins Symbol r This command is only enabled when exactly one output pin and one or several input pins are selected When executed a connection between the output pin and the input pin s is established Reset Pins Symbol If unused input or output pins have been removed from a box in the CFC Editor for example because they are not used or if the interface of the
10. Current user nobody El Messages Figure 5 5 User Files Access Then it is just to select the desired file in the left column and press gt gt button placed at the screen center The transfer time varies according to the file size it may take a few seconds The user does not need to be in Run Mode or connected to the CPU for transferring as 1t has the capacity to connect itself automatically when the user starts the transference 78 5 User Interface Ww MemoryCard project MasterTool IEC XE as als Devices snod U PLC Logic Application ES Bill of Materials El Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostics il Library Manager E MainPrg PRG Task Configuration 2 Configuration 2 MainTask a Configuration Bus Nx3010 NX3010 Y comi Y com2 Y NET1 4 m El Messages de v X MemoryCard mia Fe B Configuration and Consumption File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help amp Start Page Configuration Bus J Nx3010 f Diagnostic Explorer Log _ Users and Groups Access Rights Information NET 1 Device 4 x Host Location J D temp a X lt Name Modified Runtime Location a InternalMemory Name Size ee Aue igi janpolg Modified Figure 5 6 Transferring Files Current user nobody In case it i
11. MasterTool IEC XE User Manual MT8500 Rev C 10 2014 Doc Code MU299609 General Supply Conditions No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Altus Sistemas de Automac o S A who reserves the right to carry out alterations without prior advice According to current legislation in Brazil the Consumer Defense Code we are giving the following information to clients who use our products regarding personal safety and premises The industrial automation equipment manufactured by Altus is strong and reliable due to the stringent quality control it is subjected to However any electronic industrial control equipment programmable controllers numerical commands etc can damage machines or processes controlled by them when there are defective components and or when a programming or installation error occurs This can even put human lives at risk The user should consider the possible consequences of the defects and should provide additional external installations for safety reasons This concern is higher when in initial commissioning and testing The equipment manufactured by Altus does not directly expose the environment to hazards since they do not issue any kind of pollutant during their use However concerning the disposal of equipment it is important to point out that built in electronics may contain materials which are harmful to nature when improperly discarded The
12. The devices are listed with Name Vendor and Version By activating the checkbox Display all versions for experts only all available versions of the particular devices will be displayed as well The devices might be grouped that is the table entries category names indented in the column name like for example Miscellaneous in the dialog image shown above To open or close the groups use the preceding plus and minus signs By default initially all available devices will be displayed If you want to restrict the display on a certain vendor correspondingly modify the current selection lt All vendors gt in the Vendor list above the table For the currently selected device additional information as provided by the device description file might be displayed below the table device name vendor groups might be defined for categorization purposes version order number and a short description A device specific image might be added also Depending on your action type chosen you have to confirm your selection by clicking on Add device It is possible to further devices without reopening this dialog Thereby you may select the appropriate node by a click in the device tree Having finished you may quit the dialog by pressing Close This command is also available in the context menu of certain devices in the device tree Add Folder Symbol This command will be available in the Project menu and also in the context menu if you a
13. Location C Temp Date of the original file Tuesday July 24 2012 1 53 27 PM Date of the auto save file Tuesday July 24 2012 3 58 04 PM Open auto save file Open original file Figure 7 119 Auto Save Backup Dialog On Open auto save file option the file lt projectname gt autosave will be opened and marked as modified On Open original file option the last version of the project saved by the user will be opened On Allow editing of read only file option of the Load and Save dialog warn when attempt to save You can edit a project which is restricted to read only access but nevertheless an alert warning will be generated when you are going to save the file In Display items in most recently used list is defined how many of the recently opened projects should be displayed in the Recent Projects list File menu On At startup option is defined what should happen when MasterTool IEC XE gets started Load last loaded project The project which was edited last will automatically be opened Show Open Project dialog box Corresponds to command Open Project Show New Project dialog box Corresponds to command New Project Show empty environment The programming system will be started without opening or creating a project e Show Start Page The Start Page view will be displayed Corresponds to command Start Page News page is URL of the page which is displayed in the News area of the Start
14. The Find dialog will be opened where you define which string should be searched according to certain rules where it should be searched and whether it the found locations should be displayed one after the other or all on a whole In addition the user can switch to the Replace dialog 100 7 Menu Commands Find Find what war gt Find Next A Match case Pl Search up Find All Pl Match whole word T Use regular expressions Search ntire project Figure 7 11 Find Dialog Find what Insert here the string to be searched The selection list available via button 5 will be filled with strings which have been already searched since the last start of MasterTool IEC XE Activate the desired search options e Match case The search is case sensitive referring to the search string e Match whole word Only strings which match the whole search string will be found e Search up The specified search area will be passed upwards Deactivate the option to search downwards again e Use regular expressions Regular Expressions RegExp the pattern matching standard for string parsing and replacement is supported concerning the most commonly used expressions Use the _ button to get assistance for entering the desired combination of those expressions in order to define which strings and characters should be found The available expressions are sorted in the following submenus Special characters Repetitions
15. To switch back to the LD view use command View as ladder logic ATTENTION A proper conversion presumes syntactically correct code Otherwise parts of the implementation CFC Commands The commands of this category are available for programming in the CFC editor Available commands Edit Working Sheet Negate EN ENO Set Reset None Set Reset S Set Set Reset R Reset Execution Order Send to front Execution Order Send to back Execution Order Move up Execution Order Move down Set Execution Order Order by Data Flow Order by Topology 167 7 Menu Commands e Edit Parameters e Connect Selected Pins e Reset Pins e Remove Unused Pins Edit Working Sheet This command opens the Edit Working Sheet dialog for modifying the size of the working area of the current CFC The size of the working sheet is defined by the height and width of a rectangular area having its origin X 0 Y 0 in the upper left corner of the editor window and including all existing CFC elements Height and width are specified in number of grid units whereby the size of a grid unit is not changeable by the user Height Y increasing positive values from top to down width X increasing positive values from left to right The maximum size is 2048 grid units in width and height Edit Working Sheet Working sheet dimensions Use the following dimensions Width 34 grid units Height 7 grid units Adapt the dimension
16. W Override runtime buffer size Cancel Figure 8 38 Trace Advanced Configuration e Refresh rate ms Time interval in milliseconds in which the update of the trace window in online mode will be done The value must be between 150ms and 10000ms Default 500ms If you use the the data is transferred in time defined delivery system for the programming system If don t then the data are transmitted every 200 ms for the programming system e Trace editor buffer size samples Enter here the size of the buffer of Trace editor write This buffer must be greater or equal than twice the size of the runtime buffer e Measure in every x th cycle Define the number of cycles which should be left out before the variable should be read again By Buffer Size Measure in every x th cycle Task interval the minimum guarded time span can be estimated e Recommended runtime buffer size Samples Here is shown the recommended size of runtime buffering for each monitoring signal This value is calculated based on task cycle time the update time and the value of every n th cycle e Override runtime buffer size If this option is selected instead of the recommended value for the runtime buffer size the value entered here will be used The value must be at least 10 and no larger than the size of the trace editor buffer The following settings are done for the X axis and the Y axis of the trace graph and they are visible when the trace diagram
17. e Move the working sheet origin relatively If this option is activated the working sheet can be shifted vertically and or horizontally by the offset values given in the following o X offset By default is O Entering a positive value shifts the chart to the right thus possibly increasing the width of the working sheet Entering a negative value shifts the chart to the left thus only possible if there is space between the leftmost element and the left window border o Y offset By default is O Entering a positive value shifts the chart downwards thus possibly increasing the height of the working sheet Entering a negative value shifts the chart upwards thus only possible if there is space between the uppermost element and the upper window border If you enter invalid sheet size values an error message dialog will pop up also listing the given restrictions Symbol A This command is used to negate inputs outputs jumps or RETURN commands The symbol for the negation is a small circle on the connection To assign a negation select the respective input or output pins of the element and perform the command See CFC Editor Cursor Positions for the possible cursor positions for selection IEC 61131 Programming Manual A negation can be deleted by negating again Symbol jEN This command is used to give a selected block Cursor position 3 an additional Boolean enable input EN and a Boolean output ENO Enable Out Figure 7 82
18. gt T 43m34900m T 43m36 900m Figure 8 43 Trace Window in Online Mode Example in Single Channel Mode Control the Trace Display By default the commands of the Trace menu are available for controlling the currently viewed trace graph Start Stop Trace Reset and for modifying the currently displayed section of the trace curves mouse scrolling mouse zooming etc The value range of the trace graphs depends on the specific settings for the trace However you can manipulate it manually by the scroll and zoom functions available in the Trace menu This can be done with shortcuts too For vertical scrolling of the current view of the trace along the y axis use the Up arrow key to move up and the Down arrow key to move down For horizontal scrolling along the x Axis use the Left or right arrow key while pressing the lt ALT gt key If the Multi Channel option is enabled every graph has 1ts own diagram and a selected graph can be scrolled as the only one alone with the shortcuts above To scroll all the graphs simultaneously use the Arrow keys with an additional pressed lt CTRL gt key to move the y axis All the trace shortcuts listed in Shortcuts for trace Notice in this context also the zoom functionality of a Mouse Scrolling When the cursor is placed on the trace window the respective value of the x axis is being showed in the status line Watch List Editor Watch View Watch List Editor A watch view can be opened via t
19. in from MainPrg will add 2 on this input and will write the result to an output out Out will be read by MainPrg Notice that the following descriptions refer on the default configuration of the user interface provided with the currently installed version of the programming system Start MasterTool IEC XE Create a project Declare variables in MainPrg Enter Programming Code in the Body of MainPrg Create a Programming POU ST function block FB1 Define the Resources for Running and Controlling the Program Set the Active Application Configure a Communication Channel to Nexto Compile and Load Application on Nexto Starting the Application Monitoring the Application Debug an application Breakpoint settings and program scan Declare Variables in MainPrg The POU MainPrg which by default is already available in the Devices window is automatically opened in a ST language editor window in the center part of the MasterTool IEC XE user interface Basically a POU always can be opened in its editor view by a double click on the entry in the devices POUs tree The ST editor consists of a declaration part upper and a body lower part separated by a movable screen divider The declaration part shows line numbers at the left border the POUs type and name PROGRAM MainPrg and the embracing keywords VAR and END_ VAR for the variables declaration The body is empty only line number is disp
20. 200 7 Menu Commands Repository Location Location OD Vib rep Name LEI Figure 7 113 Dialog Edit Repository Locations Add or Edit a Repository Deleting an existing repository When you select an item in the repository list and use the delete button the user must point at which item he wants to delete He can also delete the entire folder containing system library files Installation and Uninstallation of Libraries Only a library installed on the local system Library Repository can be included in a project The information in the project should include the title version and optionally the name of the library company To install a library select the repository in which it must be added and then press the Install button The Select Library dialog will open the standard dialog to search for files Select the library you want and then close the dialog The library will be added to the list of libraries currently installed on the Library Repository dialog If the user chooses a library that cannot be installed due to mandatory information title and version he will get an error message To uninstall a library select it in the list of installed libraries in corresponding dialog and use the Uninstall button Further information about specific libraries The Details button for the currently selected library provides detailed information title version company file size date of creation date of modifica
21. 8 Editors Observing the Figure 8 88 note that the possible settings on this tab are divided into two groups Input Output Settings and Control Settings and two tabs Project Settings and Autosetup Restrictions It is important to notice that all changes made in the Advanced Settings tab should be made with the PLC in Offline mode After parameters changing it is necessary to load the project into the PLC If the PLC is in Online mode all fields will be disabled not allowing editing Group Input Output Settings This group is used to configure the operation of the input and output of the PID PV and MV respectively The Figure 8 89 shows the group Input Output Settings Variable Minimum Maximum Unit SP Raw 0 00 30000 00 SP Engineering 0 00 100 00 PY Raw PY VARIABLE MAME 0 00 30000 00 PY Engineering 0 00 100 00 MW Raw MY VARTABLE NAME 0 00 S0000 00 Figure 8 89 Group Input Output Settings In the Variable fields are configured the variables that are used as input PV and output MV of PID The PID Control object only accepts variables of REAL type The SP is the only variable field that can be left blank In this case it is assumed that an internal variable should be used for this field These variables must be declared global variables in other objects of the application as field networks configuration or GVL Objects The use of external variables in this field allows for example cascading control strategies with the PID Control
22. In case of a boolean variable the handling 1s even easier You can toggle boolean preparation values by use of the lt ENTER gt or lt SPACE gt key according to the following order If the value is TRUE the preparation steps are FALSE gt TRUE gt gt no entry If the value is FALSE the preparation steps are TRUE gt FALSE gt no entry Do the same for the desired further expressions variables in further lines See an example in the next picture which shows the watch view in offline mode Notice that in case of a structured variable like here the function block instance the particular instance components automatically get added when you enter the instance name see in the example Device Application MainPrg fbinst They can be displayed hidden in a fold via a mouse action on the plus minus sign Watch 1 4 X Expression Type Value Prepared value Comment Device Application MainPrg ivar INT lt Not loggedin gt Device Application MainPrg fbinst FB1 4 in INT lt Not logged in gt FS out INT lt Not logged in gt aux INT lt Not logged in gt Figure 8 44 Watch View in Offline Mode In online mode the view can be used for monitoring Watch List in Online Mode Monitoring A watch list Watch lt n gt in online mode shows the current value of a variable in the Value column For a description on how to set up such a watch list and how to handle folds in case of structured variables see Create Watchlist 2
23. This command allows you to export all devices instantiated in the project or a particular device to an external file in CSV format The export of all devices occurs via Export to CSV in the Project menu To export a particular device you must access the context menu of this device and choose the option Export to CSV By choosing the Export to CSV option the Save As dialog box appears It is possible to define the name of the export file and the location where it will be saved Devices sons of a device selected for export are also exported After you click Save the export starts The code below shows the contents of a file generated by the export command 142 7 Menu Commands ModbusClient Parent Connector Protocol TaskCycle MODBUS Symbol Client NX3030 NET 1 Tcp 100 ModbusClientDevice Parent SlaveAddress IP IcpPort MaximumSimmltaneousRequest CommnicationTimeOut Mode InactiveTime MODBUS Device MODBUS Symbol Client 1 192 168 19 135 502 1 3000 ClosebyTime 10 ModbusClientDeviceMapping VariableName DataType StartAddress Quality AbsoluteAddress MODBUS Device GVL var_int HoldingRegisterWrite 1 GVL var quality 40000 ModbusClientDeviceRequest Function Polling ReadDatasStart ReadDatasize WriteDatastart WriteDatasize Diagnostic Disable MODBUS Device FC16 50071717171 GVL var_ diagnostic GVL var disable Figure 7 53 Exported Device Example In the export file lin
24. When adding a library in the Library Manager there is no possibility to add placeholder references When editing the properties of library reference only the namespace can be adapted In the Library Manager list itself the version column is not displayed When adding a library in the Library Manager only the newest version per particular library is displayed the version information itself is omitted Hide system libraries If activated system libraries gray libraries will not be displayed in the Library manager Exception if such a library could not be loaded it will 206 On Off On Off 7 Menu Commands be displayed so that the user can remove the reference manually Enable repository If activated the menu command Off On dialog Tools Library Repository will be available Otherwise the command Tools Install Library will appear instead providing access to the Select Library dialog Another possibility is to install new libraries using the package mechanism Table 7 3 Available Features Professional Category Load and Save This sub dialog of the Options dialog allows settings concerning the behavior of MasterTool IEC XE at loading and saving a project ai CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor ff FBD LD and IL editor Create backup files Features Automatically save every 10 minutes al International Settings cae Allow editing of read only file w
25. Written IEC Variable writing variables limited according to Q the used CPU Variables initial 1 Any address of Q Mask IEC Variable address for the limited according to writing mask Q the used CPU Table 8 12 MODBUS Master for Direct Representation Relation MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping General Parameters settings Send Delay ms 0 Minimum Interframe chars 4 5 Figure 8 51 MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Screen AiE Possibilities Send Delay ms lle Oa 0 a 65535 3 5 a 100 0 Minimum Interframe Minimum silence time chars between different frames Table 8 13 Timing Configurations on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Adding a Device To add a device into the configuration of the MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping use the MODBUS RTU Master context menu General Parameters The configuration of the slave devices seen on Figure 8 52 follow the parameters below Configuration Bus Mappings Requests General Parameters i MODBUS_Device x settings Slave Address hi Communication Time out ms 3000 gt fl Maximum Number of Retries 2 Figure 8 52 Device General Parameters on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping 283 8 Editors Configuration Description Default Possibilities Slave Address MODBUS slave address 0 to 255 Communication Defines the application Time out ms level time out eee cunda P Defin he numbers of Maximum Number e es the
26. ADD box with EN ENO In this example ADD will only be executed if the boolean variable condition is TRUE VarOut will be set to TRUE after the execution of ADD Notice that if afterwards condition changes to FALSE ADD will not be executed any longer and also VarOut will be set to FALSE The example in Figure 7 83 shows how the ENO value can be used for further blocks 169 Set Reset None Reset 7 Menu Commands E PLC_PRG aj efeprog PROGRAM cfcprog l E 3 4 Figure 7 83 Use of EN ENO The numbers in the right corner of the boxes indicate the order in which the commands are executed For this example initialize x with 1 As long as x is less than 10 0 it will be increased by one 1 As soon as x 10 the output of LT Q will deliver the value FALSE and SUB 6 and ADD 4 will be executed x will be set back to the value 1 and y will get increased by 1 LT 0 will be executed again as long as x 1s less than 10 Thus y is counting how often x passes though the value range to 10 Symbol This command per default part of the submenu Set Reset of the CFC menu removes a Set or Reset from an output element Select the input pin of the respective output and perform the command The S or R symbol at the output element will disappear See CFC Editor Cursor Positions for the possible cursor position for selection IEC 61131 Programming Manual Symbol This command by default part of the
27. Conmen auld acces conta tao MainPrg Full name MainPrg Device PLC Logic Applicati Object type POU Open with Default ST POU editor Description Figure 7 24 Properties Dialog Common Category Concerning the compilation build the following options can be activate e Exclude from build The object will not be noticed during the next Generate Code command e External implementation Late link in the runtime system No code is created for this object during a compilation of the project The object will be linked when running the project on a target if it is available there for example via a library e Enable system call Background In contrast to MasterTool IEC XE previous versions now the ADR Operator can be used with function names program names function block names and method names thus replacing the INSTANCE_OF operator See in this context Function pointers IEC 61131 Programming Manual HOWEVER there is no possibility to call a function pointer within MasterTool IEC XE In order to enable a system call runtime system you must activate the current option for the function object e Link Always The object is marked for the compiler so that it is always included into the compile information As a result objects will always be compiled and downloaded to the PLC This option goes relevant when the object is located below an application or is referenced using libraries
28. Cross Reference List start Page Full Screen Ctrl Shift F 12 Properties Figure 4 27 Including the Messages on the Screen Login After the application has been compiled and the errors found corrected the project must be sent to the CPU For that to be possible the operation Login in the MasterTool IEC XE software must be executed This operation may take a few seconds depending on the size of the generated file To execute the Login go to Online menu and click on the option Login as shown on Figure 4 28 he ALC po project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help fae Ais S See 5 aR Logout Ctrl F8 a Create boot application Device Nx3010 Elf PLC Logic 3 0 Application Download E Bill of Ma Online Change Logoff current online user haria Ea Co nfi q ur fa Diagnost Source download to connected device m Diagnost e Cluster Basic Configuration Reset warm Reset cold Reset origin Simulation Figure 4 28 Sending the Project to the CPU 52 4 Quick Start After the command execution some user interface messages may appear which are presented due to differences between an old project and the new project been sent or simply because there was a variation in some variable Figure 4 29 shows the message the MasterTool IEC XE presents in case the new project which is being sent is different from the project already existent inside the
29. ExternInterruptTask00 Change POU E ExternInterruptTask01 Move Up FreeTask e MainTask Move Down 2 TimelnterruptTask00 E TimelnterruptTask01 y Configuration Bus Nx3010 NX3010 Y comi 2 com2 Y NET1 E Messages Current user nobody Figure 8 27 Configuration Dialog for a Task NOTE The task name can be modified by editing the respective entry in the devices tree Depending on the chosen Project Profile the editing of the task name may generate error in the Project building 257 8 Editors The dialog has the following fields e Priority 0 31 a number between O and 31 0 is the highest priority 31 is the lowest e Type The selection list offers the following task types o Cyclic The task will be processed cyclic according to the time definition given in the field Interval o Freewheeling The task will be processed as soon as the program is started and at the end of one run will be automatically restarted in a continuous loop There is no cycle time defined o Status The task will be started if the variable defined in the Event field is true o Event The task will be started as soon as the variable defined in the Event field gets a rising edge o External The task will be started as soon as the system event which is defined in the Event field occurs It depends on the target which events will be supported and offered in the selection list not to be mixed up wi
30. External File Provides commands to manage the objects and folders of the project Available command Add Object Add Device Add Folder Edit Object Edit Object with Set Active Application Project Information Project Settings Project Update Export to CSV 123 7 Menu Commands 7 Menu Commands Import from CSV Document Compare User Management Add Object Symbol t This command opens a submenu providing the objects available for getting inserted at the currently selected position in the POUSs or Devices tree w Project project Master Tool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help fe El Sle POUS Add Device Global Variable List Project Add Folder Persistent Variables 7 mema Edit Object PID Control Project It ds Edit Object With POU Project 5 Set Active Application POU for implicit checks Devies E Project Information Tan Project Settings Device I Project Update PLCI el E Document cree E AA Compare f User Management a Figure 7 32 Add Object Submenu Select the desired object type and in the appearing dialog define a Name Please notice the given recommendations on the naming in order to get the name as unique as possible Depending on the object type also further configuration settings might be available For further information
31. Figure 8 4 I O Module Map Bill of Materials Once configured the bus modules MasterTool IEC XE allows you to view a list of the modules needed to the hardware configuration as shown in Figure 8 5 This list can also be used for purchase orders 236 8 Editors JE Start Pace VA Configuration Pus A Bill of Materials x MG030_Simple e J Device NX3030 pi Product Description A S PLCLogic CN Vdc 16 DI Module 1 Application NX1005 24 Vdc 8 DO Transistor 8 DI Mixed Module 1 Bill of Materials NX2001 24Vdc 16 DO Transistor Module 1 Configuration and Consumption NX2020 16 DO Relay Module z Diagnostic Explorer NX3030 High speed CPU 2 Ethernet Ports 2 Serial Channels Memory Card Interface Remote Rack Expansion and Redundancy Support 1 Diagnosis NX5000 Ethernet Module E fi Library Manager E MainPrg PRG EEVUE E Task Configuration EE z 2 MainTask 4Ch Analog Output Module A J Configuration Bus 30 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Module E fj 13030 Nx3030 16 Slot Backplane Rack 1 J Nxs000 Nx5000 PP EP 1 Y NETI J Nx5001 NX5001 Y comi Y com2 Y NETI Y NET2 Figure 8 5 Bill of Materials This list 1s available on the device tree for any project created from the MasterTool Standard Project The list shows the different types of devices that are present in the configuration with its description and quantities This list
32. MODBUS Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Send Delay ms p Minimum Interframe chars 2 3 Cancel MODBUS Master for Direct Representation Advanced Settings Configuration Description Default Possibilities Send Delay ms Delay for the answer Any address of Q transmission area limited according to CPU used Minimum Interframe Minimum silence time 3 5 3 5 to 100 0 chars between different frames Table 8 10 Timings Setting on MODBUS Master for Direct Representation Adding a Device W MODBUS Device Settings Device Settings Instance Name MODBUS Device Slave Address 1 Communication Time out ms 1000 Maximum Number of Reties 2 ah Mapping Disabling 4096 Used range 0X4096 0 404099 7 OK Cancel Figure 8 49 Adding a Device on MODBUS Master for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities Instance Name ingiancename MODBUS Device Identifier as IEC ae 3 MODBUS slave Communication a 1000 CO to 65535 Time out ms e Defines the numbers O to 9 Maximum Number of retries before of Retries reporting a communication error 281 Mapping Disabling 8 Editors Initial address used Any address of Q to disable the area limited by the MODBUS relations used CPU configured in Devices Mapping field Y QX X Table 8 11 MODBUS Device Configurations on MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation Adding a MODBUS Relation
33. Menu Commands Project Settings Page Setup rity Enable project file encryption Source Download Password 88 Users and Groups If this option is activated a password is used to encrypt the content of the currently Visualization Profile opened project file The user must enter this password whenever this project is loaded even if itis loaded as library reference 1 If you forget the encryption password your project file will be lost It is not possible to restore the file contents in this case Current password New password Confirm new password Figure 7 44 Project Settings Dialog Category Security Password This dialog allows the use of a project password Having activated the option Enable project file encryption the password has to be entered in the edit fields New Password and Confirm password in order to detect type errors If the checkbox is still activated while saving the project this password will be required for a reload of the project even 1f 1t will be loaded as a library reference The Encryption Password dialog will open in this case Encryption Password The This projectflibrary file has been E encrypted Please enter the password in a order to open it Figure 7 45 Encryption Password The project settings dialog may be reused for modifying the password Therefore in edit field Current password you have to enter the actual password first before you are allowed to change it by en
34. P gina Inicial i Configuration Bus Diagnostics Disables RegDiagnostics xQ SQ Teste 1 VAR GLOBAL fz 2 J Device Nx3010 2 MODBUS Device DISABLE 0001 BOOL T3 S E PLcLogic 3 MODBUS_Device_DISABLE_0002 BOOL SS 3 0 Application 4 MODBUS_Device_DISABLE 0003 BOOL Lo AA 5 MODBUS Device DISABLE 0004 BOOL E 2 Configuration and Consumption E Si acc sl a 3 rr i 7 MODBUS_Device_DISABLE_0006 BOOL g piagas Epiat a MODBUS Device 1 DISABLE 0001 BOOL Diagnosis 3 MODBUS_Device_1_DISABLE_0002 BOOL a Disables 10 MODBUS_Device_1_DISABLE_0003 BOOL ReqDiagnostic 11 MODBUS Device_1 DISABLE 0004 BOOL MD Library Manager 12 MODBUS Device_1 DISABLE 0005 BOOL 13 MODBUS Device _1 DISABLE 0006 BOOL E MainPra PRG Task Configuration 2 MainTask g Configuration Bus S J Nx3010 NX3010 f Nx5001 NX5001 Y Poso63 PO5063 Po1000_16D1_24 Vdc_Opto_Coupled_ PO1000 16D1 comi a a MODBUS_Symbol_RTU_Master MODBUS Symbol RTU Mi J MODBUS_Device MODBUS Device amp com2 a MODBUS_Symbol_RTU_Slave MODBUS Symbol RTU Save S S NET1 J MoDBUS_Client MODBUS Client J MODBUS_Server MODBUS Server a a MODBUS_Symbol_Client MODBUS Symbol Client moDBUS_Device_1 MODBUS Device ES MODBUS_Symbol_Server MODBUS Symbol Server 14 END VAR m ur r SE Dispositivos a POUs Ha m gt El Mensagens 4 Usu rio Atual
35. Propertes Max number of tasks 16 Max number of cydic tasks 16 Max number of freewheeling tasks 16 Max number of event tasks 16 Max number of external event tasks 16 Max number of status tasks 16 Figure 8 26 Task Configuration Properties Dialog Information on the current task configuration as provided by the target will be displayed for example the maximum allowed numbers of tasks per task type Configuration Dialog When inserting a task Add Object command in the Task Configuration in the Devices view the Task Editor dialog for setting the task properties will be opened Ye ProjectTasks project MasterTool IEC XE o meal File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help SLAE a RT 1S Y Devices E Ep StartPage Configuration Bus 2 MainTask xQ 3 E ProjectTasks Configuration Device NX3010 a gt a er Priority 0 31 13 L Application mm 3 Bill of Materials Type Es E Configuration and Consumption Cydic v Interval e g t 200ms 100 i Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostics Watchdog Z fi Library Manager 2s 3 CyclicPrg01 PRG e O ExternInterruptPrg00 PRG Time e g t 200ms 1000 E BxterninterruptPra01 PRG Ar TimelnterruptPrg01 PRG Sensitivity 1 E CydicPrg00 PRG E FreePrg PRG MainPrg PRG POUs 2 TimeInterruptPrg00 PRG Add POU POU Comment Pe ba a TERR MainPrg CydicTask00 E CyclicTask01 Open POU
36. Symbol EF This command is available only for implementation in FBD Its execution will remove all unassigned entries or exits of the FB box focused that is all entries or exits whose assignments are empty or marked by However the minimum number of necessary in or outputs of the box will be maintained 165 7 Menu Commands Removed unused parameter Figure 7 80 Remove Unused Parameters in FBs View as function block diagram FBD Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt 1 gt This command is available if you currently are working in the Ladder Diagram LD or Instruction List IL view of the POU It can be used in offline and online mode The LD networks respectively the instruction list will be converted appropriately to FBD networks Notice anyway that there are some special elements which cannot get converted and thus will only be available in the appropriate editor view Further on some constructs might not be converted un ambiguously To switch back to the LD view use command View as ladder logic To switch back to the IL view use command View as instruction list ATTENTION A proper conversion presumes syntactically correct code Otherwise parts of the implementation View as ladder logic LD Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt 2 gt This command is available if you currently are working in the Function Block Diagram FBD or Instruction List IL view of the POU It can be used in offline and
37. The current hardware structure can be read and displayed in a dialog allowing the user to direct take over the desired modules to the projects device tree in the project Application An application is a set of objects which are needed for running a particular instance of the PLC program on a certain hardware device PLC controller For this purpose independent objects managed in the POUs view are instantiated and assigned to a device in the Devices view This meets the mind of object orientated programming However also purely application specific POUs can be used An application is represented by an application object 42 in the devices tree insertable below a Plc Logic programmable device node Below an application entry the objects defining the applications resource set are to be inserted The standard application Application is created with new projects from de MasterTool Standard Project and is added to the device tree below the Device and PLC Logic items An essential part of each application 1s the Task Configuration controlling the run of a program POU instances or application specific POUs Additionally it might have assigned resource objects like Global Variables Lists Libraries etc which in contrast to those managed in the POUs window only can be used by the particular application and its childs When going to log in with an application on a target device PLC or simulation target
38. a Diagnostic a cv Library Manager POU SFC FB1 MainPrg POU Tack Canfisiirshean 4 wut fons fr a al 4 Title page 4 Table of contents Preview Figure 7 54 Document Project The project objects in POUs windows and devices are presented in a tree and the user can select which object s must be documented in printed form The contents of objects displayed in gray are not printable but it will be considered in the documentation to the extent that the name of the object is inserted in the structure and content of the tree For sorting and searching in the object tree a toolbar is available above the tree If Title page option is selected the documentation will be increased to more than one page to cover If Table of contents option is selected the documentation will be increased by a content page showing all objects and the corresponding page numbers in the documentation The header levels are defined in the Page Setup window 144 7 Menu Commands Compare Symbol y By use of the command Compare you may compare the actual project with another one reference project The reference project and the compare options are specified in the Project Compare dialog which will be opened when the command is performed Project Compare Compare the currently open project with Projecton disk C TemplTest project Compare Options Ignore Whitespace Semantically relevant whites
39. might be configured in the object Properties dialog Notice that any changes made in this dialog will be applied immediately Permissions Actions Permissions Commands af Grant Deny Clear 3 Object types 3 Project objects de Group A F add or remove children Device Device Configuration Device Configuration Nx3010 Device Configuration Nx3010 lt Empty gt Device Configuration Nx3010 COM 1 Device Configuration NX3010 COM 2 Device Configuration NX3010 NET 1 Device Configuration NxX3010 NX8000 a Key to the symbols For this group Device Ple Logic permission for the selected actions is Device Plc Logic Application Device Plc Logic Application Bill of Materials sP explicitely granted explictely denied not spedfied but granted by default Mot specified but denied by default Device Plc Logic Application Configuration and Consumption Device Plc Logic Application Diagnostic Explorer Mawes Miel asis Arrliratian Minan arhe Please note Members of the group Owner are granted all permissions Figure 7 61 Permissions 149 7 Menu Commands The Actions window displays all possible rights that is all actions which might be performed on any object of the current project The tree is structured in the following way e Top level see the names of some categories which have been set up just for the purpose of optical structuring the rights management They are grouping concerning the execut
40. operators 152 7 Menu Commands PROGRAM ILlnsertissigrmert YAR ivar INT bResult BOOL EHD VAR ai 4 GT 12 ST bResult Figure 7 65 Assignment in IL Insert Box Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt B gt This command is used to insert a box element into a network for the purpose of calling an operator a program a function block a function or an interface In the IL editor the corresponding instructions will be inserted As soon as you choose the command the nput Assistant dialog will open providing the appropriate categories of POUs Select one and confirm with OK to insert the box at the currently selected position in a network resp to create the corresponding IL instructions Alternatively you can choose command Insert Empty Box so that you can enter the desired box type directly A very comfortable way to add a box is to drag it directly from the Toolbox or from another position within the editor FBD or LD Editor Specific Characteristics Boxes of type program or function block always are inserted in line that is the processing line will be connected to the uppermost input and output of the inserted POU progl inl outl ine oute Figure 7 66 Insert Function Block 153 7 Menu Commands The text within the box shows the box type for example F_TRIG and is editable By replacing this text by the type name of another valid module the user can replace the box by another one
41. si This is step 51 Write dl tF2s t 45 actl entry_atl exit_atl 7 Menu Commands SFC editor options Layout View Property visibility Value With name 0 Step Common Comment Symbol Specific Times Minimal active Maximal active Actions hL A O SFC aditor X y y iad a Eli at ET a E i pan Figure 7 125 Property Visibility Example each step element for which time properties are set T la 403mg Figure 7 126 Step Time Displayed in Online Mode 213 7 Menu Commands Text Editor This sub dialog of the Options dialog allows settings concerning the editing in a text editor Editing Definition of undo tabulator indenting folding etc in the editing area of the text editor fi CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor EF FBD LD and IL editor Editing Text area Margin Monitoring Features tad International Settings Number of undas 100 Load and Save Folding indent El SFC Word wrap None E SFC editor Es SmartCoding syntax Highlighting Tab width 45 V Keep tabs E Text editor Indent width he 0 Wrap at the window boundary AutoIndent Smart with code completion Figure 7 127 Options Dialog Category Text Editor Editing See in the following the description of the dialog e Number of undos Define how many editing steps should be saved so that they can be made undone by the Undo fun
42. 5 Application Download E3 Bill of Ma Online Change Configura Source download to connected device d Diagnosi i is Cluster Basic Configuration ad Diagnost wks om N Library mi Reset warm a MainPrg Reset cold ig Task Con Reset origin E Main Simulation l Configuration Bu Figure 4 36 Simulation Mode In Simulation Mode the application runs in a virtual device on the computer where it is installed the MasterTool IEC XE For this reason some features displayed are related to computer hardware and not Nexto Series CPUs architecture The main feature in this sense is related to the format of the data 57 4 Quick Start in the memory areas of direct representation The Simulation Mode works with the little endian format where the first memory address is the least significant of data On the other hand the Nexto Series CPUs work with the big endian format where the first memory address is the most significant data In this case the same data as written for example in QD0 will be written differently in simulation and in Nexto series CPUs If the data written is 16 1234ABDC the distribution of the data in memory of PLC shall be as follows QWO 16 1234 QW2 16 ABCD QBO 16 12 QB1 16 34 QB2 16 AB QB3 16 CD For the same data written in QDO in simulation mode the distribution of data in memory will be as follows QWO 16 ABCD QW2 16 1234 QBO 16 CD QB1 16 AB QB2 16 34 QB
43. AF FBD LD and IL editor Features a International Settings gt Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Text editor Textual only Tabular only Switchable between textual and tabular Default C Always textual Ci Always tabular Ci Remember recent setting per object Remember recent setting globally Figure 7 121 Declaration Editor Options 7 Menu Commands Define which views of the declaration part should be available when an object is opened for editing Editor SFC Textual Only If this setting is activated the declaration editors will be displayed in a textual view Tabular Only If this setting is activated the declaration editors will be displayed in a tabular view Switchable between textual and tabular If this setting is activated two buttons will be available in the declaration editor window for switching between the textual and the tabular view of the declaration part In this case choose also one of the following settings which defines in which of the both formats by Default the declaration editor at first will appear when an object is opened for editing Always textual Always tabular Remember recent setting per object when reopening an object the declaration editor will be opened in the same format as it had for this object during last editing or Remember recent setting globally when opening any object the declaration editor format recent
44. An existing box also can be replaced by inserting another one at the same position Notice that if already inputs have been defined for the previously used box these will be kept except the new box has a lower maximum number of inputs In this case the last inputs will be deleted accordingly If provided with the respective module and if option Show box icon 1s activated an icon will be displayed within the box Within parallel connections in a LD network no insert positions will be offered when dragging a box element from the ToolBox Reason A POU call box needs a direct connection to the power rail In the LD editor boxes for the call of certain operators automatically are inserted with EN and ENO resp only EN in and outputs EN and ENO connections get those which have a non boolean output for example ADD SEL BOOL_TO_INT only an EN input get those which have a boolean output for example EQ GE GT At a box with an ENO output it is not possible to insert a further box at the other outputs of this box VAR_IN_OUT parameters of an inserted POU box are marked with a bidirectional arrow lr pow with varinouet PROGRAM pou with varinout Figure 7 67 Display of VAR_IN_OUT Parameters Function block boxes have an editable field above the box where you have to enter the name of the instance variable If a box representing the instance of a function block instance gets replaced by inserting another function block type the i
45. CPU The available options are the following e Login with online change execute the login and send the new project without stopping the current CPU application see Run Mode updating the changes when a new cycle is executed e Login with download execute the login and send the new project with the CPU stopped see Stop Mode When the application is initiated the update will have been done already e Login without any change executes the login without sending the new project Masterlool IEC XE y Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series es CPUs Manual After this choose an option to login Login with online change 3 Login with download Login without any change Cancel Details Figure 4 29 CPU Project Updating Figure 4 30 shows a message the MasterTool IEC XE shows when only changes in the application variables were done turning impossible the new project sending and updating on a CPU new cycle which is in run mode see Run Mode Mode Therefore the MasterTool IEC XE requests whether the login must be executed as download and the CPU stopped see Stop Mode Mode or the Operation must be canceled The button Details presents the changes made in the application MasterTool IEC XE fa No online change possible due to severe changes Do you want to perform a download Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series CPUs Manual
46. EME a E 47 Finding the Network uti did e dd ridad 49 II a A cen cece Seder ca csusascaveerarcosvocescoceauenes vena vavtesesceceecescecuduasesseuaskcasseuuscecsecovencaduescees 51 A A E E 52 Ran Ls CAPA q aeaea aeae aa a aa eaaa ea Eae aaa a aaa eaaa eaae aaa aeaea 54 SOP MOIE orriren O 55 Lop OU AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA ASAS 56 EY AAA e aee raar E ea a Oo e EEEE 57 Project Upload insener E EE EN 58 Create and Run Projects iS 60 Declare Varta les MAP oie 60 Enter Procraimmiuns Gode in the Body Of Main Pro aessa aa a ia 61 Create a Programming POU ST function block FB1 oooooooonnnnccncnonnnononononononononononcnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnos 62 Define the Resources for Running and Controlling the Program on NextO ooooooooonncccnccnnonnnnnnnononononannos 63 Run and Watch the Application on NextO ooooonccccccccncncncnnnonnonnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 63 Debian Appicad nacida 66 TCI EET ETE Ed 66 Context Sensitive He Maen a a 66 Unmstallatio n Update Repair Italiana 67 de USER INTEREA CE 0 E dc 68 Summary User Interface Components lt A Ai 68 Windows Views Editor WINdOW Sissi 69 Customizing User Interface usina iii 70 Airne me Menu Bars and Tool BiS ur NE pastaauea stage talaauanandecieius 70 POON Gace Gers chest el Gah ade allot bean eheree aad aiea A ty gemsiulahar sat 70 User Interlace in Online Mode cia 70 Standard Menus and Commands sisenes a E E ERS 72 Standard Menus and Commands
47. ENTER gt key For each not yet declared variable found in the implementation line the Auto Declare dialog will open where you now can carry out the declaration settings 61 4 Quick Start Auto Declare Name erg Object Initialization MainPrg Application Flags CONSTANT RETAIN PERSISTENT Figure 4 40 Auto Declare Dialog The variables name and scope as well as the current POU Object will be filled in automatically Enter the desired type and initialization value according to the declaration described above and add a comment Additionally you could insert a direct representation variable address in the Address field Confirm the dialog with OK This will enter the declaration of erg in the declaration part of the POU with the comments Figure 4 41 Start Page Configuration Bus MainPrg MainPrg ivar INT fbinst FB1 f result erg INT l Gi hh P y oF qa Figure 4 41 erg Variable Declaration Create a Programming POU ST function block FB1 We supply another function block FB 1 which will add 2 on the input given by variable in out in 2 Choose command Add object from the Project menu Select POU in the left part of the Add Object dialog Enter the name FB1 for the POU and activate option Function Block in the Type section Choose Structured Text ST for the Implementation language Press button Open to confirm the object settin
48. Enabled option 221 7 Menu Commands varo verylongidentifier Figure 7 139 Disabled option e Networks with linebreaks FBD and LD Tabs When enabled a line of network connections will be broken in a way that the elements are visible as much as possible on the current width of the window This can cause the networks to be enlarged in height If the editor window is too small the network will not be broken e Default network content FBD LD and IL Tabs defines what content is displayed in the editor when inserting a new network empty assigned or empty box e After inserting selection FBD LD and IL Tabs this option defines which element is selected after a new network is entered Network or Element Syntax Highlighting This sub dialog of the Options dialog allows the definition of colors and font style for the particular text items for example operands pragmas comments etc in an editor window gi CFC Editor Declaration editor A FBD LD and IL editor Features ab International Settings Ga Load and Save E SFC 2 SFC editor EE SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting Display items Boolean literal DATE literal DATE_AND_TIME literal TIME literal TIME_OF_DAY literal Double byte string literal Single byte string literal Integer literal Real literal Comment Sample BaBbDCcXxYy2z Item foreground MN Olive Item background White Item font style La mia Lu L
49. Expert profile p pp TE MainTask MainPrg 13 Cyclic t00ms CyclicTask00 CyclicPrg00 13 Gyelie _ 200ms CyclicTask01 CyclicPrgo 13 Gyelie s500ms ExterninterruptTask00_ ExterninterruptPrg00 02 External IOEWTO TimelnterruptTask00__ TimelnterruptTask00 01 Cycle 20ms f ExterninterruptTask01_ ExterninterruptPrgdt 11 External IOEWI1 TimelnterruptTask01 _ TimelnterruptPrgot 09 Cycle 30ms f FreeTask FreePrg 3i Continuous Table 3 5 Tasks on Custom Profile General Table Project Profiles Total of tasks Quantity 01 03 01 32 01 32 01 32 01 0 0 i Time Interrupt Timelnterrupt Task00 Task Task00 Task lt nn gt Cyl 0 moon Extern Interrupt _ Task Type o 00 01 ExterninterruptTask00 ExterninterruptT Externinterrup lt n gt ask00 tTask lt nn gt 0 02 or 08 12 00 01 00 01 00 31 00 31 CyclicTask lt nn gt CyclicTask lt n n 00 31 00 31 00 31 Freewheeling Freewhee ling Main Task Name MainTask MainTask Continuous 13 por 1 gt 00 01 Type Quantity 20 3 Concepts and Basic Components _ _ _ 42 00 on Event Task erty Quantity E 31 Table 3 6 General Table Profile x Task NOTE The suggested names for the POUs associated to the tasks are not consisted in any profile They can be replaced since they are also
50. It defines the next instruction statement to be executed For this purpose place the cursor in the desired statement and perform the command 193 7 Menu Commands Show Next Statement Symbol gt This command can be used in online mode to get back to the current execution position This might be useful if for any reason have left the window where you are currently debugging and have put the cursor somewhere else in the programming system The window showing the respective POU will be put again in foreground and the cursor will be placed again at the current position of execution Write Values Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F7 gt ATTENTION Extraordinary changes of variable values in an application currently running on a controller can cause unwanted behavior of the controlled system Evaluate possible dangers before Writing or Forcing of variables and make appropriate security precautions Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered To write a value by this command means to set a variable on the PLC to a defined value at the beginning of the next execution cycle The command effects all variables of the currently active application which are prepared for writing To prepare variables for writing the desired value must be defined in online mode in one of the following places which are used for monitoring e Ina watch view defin
51. Just to give additional information Old password This field is only editable when the dialog is used for modifying an existing user account Before you can modify the password of an existing user you must enter the currently valid password Password Password for the new user The entry is masked by characters Confirm password The entry made in field Password must be repeated here and you will get an error message if the two entries do not match In addition here the entry is masked by characters Active If this option is activated the user account is valid If the account is not valid the user cannot logon An account might be deactivated automatically if repeatedly a logon has been tried with incorrect authentication entries Memberships In this list all currently existing user groups are listed beside group Everyone to which the new user belongs automatically By selecting the respective entries you can define to which groups the new user should belong To set up the new user close the dialog with OK If there are incorrect entries no login name password mismatch user already existing you will get an appropriate error message To modify an existing user account Use button Edit to open the Edit User dialog The entry fields are the same as in the Add User dialog The password fields however for safety reasons will show 137 Groups 7 Menu Commands 32 characters After having modified the desired en
52. Manual for details on the particular element properties Product Library Symbol This command opens the Product Library view where the user can choose and insert devices in the project for further information see Adding Modules 112 Toolbox 7 Menu Commands Symbol A This command opens the toolbox for the currently used editor in a wndow Typically toolboxes are available with graphic language editors or the visualization editor and provide graphic programming elements which can be inserted into the editor via drag amp drop Watch List View The Watchlist View provides provides a submenu for opening the available watch lists Watch Symbol This command opens a submenu with commands Watch 1 Watch 2 Watch 3 Watch 4and Watch all Forces These are used to open the respective watch list in a view window Watch all Forces is a special watch view for the currently forced values For further information see Debug Menu Breakpoints Symbol This command opens the Breakpoints dialog which provides an overview on all breakpoints currently set in the project The current breakpoint parameters are displayed and can be modified In addition breakpoints can be added removed enabled or disabled The breakpoint parameters basically are those which have been set when creating a breakpoint by the Toggle Breakpoint command default condition parameters are assigned or via the New Breakpoint possibility to define certain con
53. None which means that there 1s no Set or Reset activity assigned or R Reset Execution Order Send to Front Symbol 4 This command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu effects that all selected elements will be moved to the front of the execution order Thereby the order within the group of selected as well as of the unselected elements is maintained In addition the order within the not selected elements will not be changed Send to Back Move Up Symbol 3 This command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu effects that all selected elements will be moved to the end of the execution order Thereby the order within the group of selected as well as of the unselected elements is maintained In addition the order within the not selected elements will not be changed Symbol i The Move Up command effects that all selected elements with the exception of the element which 1s at the beginning of the execution order are moved one place forwards in the internal processing list The command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu 171 7 Menu Commands Move Down Symbol 4 The Move Down command effects that all selected elements with the exception of the element which is at the beginning of the execution order are moved one place backwards in the internal processing list The command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu Order by Data Flow This comma
54. Nx3010 z E ay Logic Ethernet Port Parameters a ARa IP Address 192 168 15 1 A Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption d Diagnostic Explorer Gateway Address 192 168 15 253 a Diagnostic il Library Manager MainPrg PRG E Task Configuration gt MainTask Ei Configuration Bus E NX3010 NX3010 COM1 com A NET1 4 x Jeq Janpo ld Ethernet Port Parameters Subnetwork Mask 255 255 255 0 E Messages Current user nobody Figure 8 75 Ethernet Interface PID Control Editor This object allows inserting a PID controller for easy editing in an application of Master Tool IEC XE The following will be presented all the features found in the PID Control object Among them may be mentioned as examples graphical display of the process setting the parameters of the controller automatic tuning procedure setting of variables used by the controller etc Insert PID Control Object in the Application A PID Control object can be added to the application by Add Object command on context menu of the Application object Figure 8 76 303 8 Editors Wwe PIDControlProject project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help BHn o dE Mo la O la Start Page Configuration Bus gt PIDControlajed Device NX3010 S E PLE Logic C2 Application Ed Bill of Ma Configuri 9 COPY
55. To execute the MasterTool IEC XE development software installation it is necessary to have the distribution CD ROM or download the installation file from the site http www altus com br Then close all programs that might have been executed in your PC and double click the installation file The following installation screen will appear Select Setup Language EJ gt Select the language to use during the installation English Figure 9 1 Installation Screen Select the installation language and press OK to continue with the process This action will trigger the MasterTool IEC XE installation Then the following screens will appear 5 Setup MasterTool IEC XE co meza Welcome to the MasterTool IEC XE Setup Wizard This will install MasterTool IEC XE 1 40 on your computer It is recommended that you dose all other applications before continuing rc Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Do O a le E MactarTnnoi FC YE Figure 9 2 Initial Screen The license contract screen will appear It must be read carefully In case of agreement with the license terms click the option that accepts 1t and press Next to continue 317 9 Installation i Setup MasterTool IEC XE Please read the following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation License A
56. View 1s activated the 1tems will be displayed in a structure tree supplemented with icons otherwise they will be arranged flat but each showing the POU belonging to for example GVLI1 gvar1 NOTE If there are objects with the same name available in the global area POUS tree as well as below an application device tree only one entry will be offered in the Input Assistant window because the usage of the object is determined by the usual call priorities first the application assigned object then the global one If option Show Documentation is activated the dialog will be extended by the Documentation field If the selected element is a variable and an address is assigned to this variable and a comment has been added at its declaration those will be displayed here If option Insert with arguments 1s activated items which include arguments like for example functions will be inserted with those arguments For example If function block FB1 which contains an input variable fb1_in and an output variable fb1_out is inserted with arguments the following will be written to the editor fb1 fb1l_in fb1_out gt 107 7 Menu Commands With the option Insert with context prefix enabled the item will be inserted with the prefixed namespace Currently this option is available only for global variables Input Assistant Categories Items Variables Module Calls Function Blocks de Mame Type Application App
57. a EN PLC Logic al pa AZ 19 NextoStandard 1 0 0 4 WAA NextoStandard 1 0 0 4 T Application AAA FAA EN o Bill of Materials Se ee rn a Placeholders z P E Configuration and Consumption Add Library el Diagnostic Explorer E s Diagnostic i Library Placeholder Library Manager gt i ce S Company al companies Library repository Z MainPrg PRG e B POU PRG ee Miscellaneous Task Configuration PES Ap e Configuration 3 Common MainTask 8 NextoSOE 1 0 0 1 a Configuration Bus nx3010 Nx3010 Standard 3 4 4 1 Y comi 19 Standard64 3 4 4 0 Y com2 8 Util 3 4 1 2 YA NETI oz Control Diagnostics ES Network Os Group by category Display all versions for experts only Details Find Library Repository 4 Ww p Current user nobody Figure 4 18 Inclusion of a Library in the Project After the desired library must be selected for project inclusion when the button OK must be pressed Inserting a Protocol Instance The Nexto Series CPUs offer protocols as the MODBUS The desired protocol instance must be added and configured in the communication interface Two cases of MODBUS protocol insertion are described below one in the serial interface and the other in the Ethernet interface MODBUS RTU The first step for the MODBUS RTU configuring in slave mode is to include the instance in the desired COM COM 1 in this cas
58. a variable declared in a Variable Value Name of the symbolic variable program or GVL Coil Input Status Data Type MODBUS data type yP yP Holding Register Input Register Data Start MODBUS data size 110655386 Range of addresses of the Table 8 36 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping Configuration PROFIBUS Editor When we add the PROFIBUS Master NX5001 to bus the same appears in the device tree below the CPU and enable several settings that must be made to the correct operation of the network The parameters of the PROFIBUS protocol screens configuration are described in the manual MU214601 NOTE Online changes cannot be applied when network or PROFIBUS modules parameters have changed or modules are added or removed from the configuration CPU Editor The CPU related parameters are configured as the screen below The screen is in the device tree 300 8 Editors General Parameters Diagnostics Area CPU Parameters 2060 Start Address Start User Application after a Watchdog Reset Hot Swap Mode Enabled without startup consistency Used range 0B21520 0B22039 Retain rea TCP IP Parameters 060 Start Address Initial Time out x100 ms 4096 6 ACK Delay 10 ms 19 Used range 50684096 QB 12287 Persistent Area Project Parameters 260 Start Address E Consist retain and persistent area in 0 Memory Card Size 8192 Used range QB12288 OB20479 Figure 8 73 CPU Edi
59. achieve detailed information on discrepancies of units marked in bold red by a double click on their name After that the survey will be superposed by a detailed view Figure 7 57 Press in the lt BACKSPACE gt key to return to the survey Start Page El Configuration Bus Project Compare Differences X MainPrg Current Project MainPrg Test project C Temp 1 PROGRAM MainPrg PROGRAM MainPrg A 2 VAR VAR 3 ivar INT a INT fbinst FB1 5 fbinst2 FB1 6 result 7 erg INT a IBT y PR gt res INT J 10 END VAR END VAR a wi p 4 mm p 1 ivar ivar 1 counter a a a 1 a 2 fbinst in 10 out gt erg call the function bloc T mi k 3 with the input parame 4 output is write in e 7 POU B ese a ois O 10 a res a i d 11 y 7 4 1144 p 4 1141 p Compare options Ignore whitespace OFF Ignore comments OFF Ignore properties OFF Compare statistics 0 addition s 2deletion s 13 change s Figure 7 57 Example of Detailed Comparison Result User Management The User Management category provides commands for configuration of access rights on the project objects logging on or off to from the project via a defined user account in order to get the access rights which are associated to this account The configuration of user accounts and groups is done in the Project Settings subdialog User Management For an overview see User and Access Right Management Available commands e Log
60. area 3 contains Input highest used address 32768 larges NETI Memory area 4 contains Output highest used address 32768 large Memory area5 contains Memory highest used address 16384 larg Memory area 6 contains Code highest used address 4194304 larg Devices view Compile complete 0 errors 2 warnings Precompile _ Qk User and status information Current user nobody INS Ln4 Col60 Ch36 Figure 5 1 Example of the MasterTool IEC XE User Interface mM The standard components e Menu Bar Provides menus which contain all currently available commands e Tool Bar Contains tool buttons for all currently available tools provided by a toolbox plug in e POUs view For organizing the programming units POUs DUTs etc of a project in a tree structure open from View menu 68 5 User Interface Devices view For organizing the device resource objects of a project in a tree structure open from View menu Editor view Used for creating the particular object in the respective editor In case of language editors for example ST Editor CFC Editor usually the window combines the language editor in the lower part and the declaration editor in the upper part In case of other editors it also can provide dialogs for example Task Editor Device Editor CPU Editor The POU s or Resource object s name always is displayed in the title bar of the window The objects can be opened in the ed
61. arrangement of windows which can be modified by the user anytime via shifting docking undocking views resizing or closing windows The user interface provides menus and toolbars editor and object organization and watch and message windows and an information and status line Ye Project project MasterTool IEC XE o a Fie Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Menu bar _ gt ey gt Tool bar feel Glo x dh 4 46 4 3 ce POUs I X Start Page Configuration Bus E MainPrg Q Projed x 1 PROGRAM MainPrg 2 El project Information 2 VAR 4 a es Project Settings 3 ivar INT ad fbinst FB1 a 5 result 6 erg INT 7 END_VAR 4 1144 r 1 ivar ivar 1 counter a Devices 7 A Xx 2 fbinst in 10 out gt erg call the function block of FB1 type 3 Project _ 3 with the input parameter in gt 4 f output is write in erg J Device NX3010 e s l 3 H PLCLogic Application 3 Bill of Materials E Configuration and Consumption Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostc il Library Manager 7 E FB1 FB E MainPrg PRG Messages See P Task Configuration Build ig E MainTask Description Project Object Position S Y Configuration Bus Memory area 1 contains Retain Data highest used address 32768 Nx3010 NX3010 z Memory area 2 contains Persistent Data highest used address 164 comi i com2 Memory
62. b Size of global data 320971 bytes Total allocated memory size for code and data 975872 bytes Memory area 0 contains Data highest used address 3145728 largest contiguous memory gap 2841980 90 Memory area 1 contains Retain Data highest used address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap 32768 100 Memory area 2 contains Persistent Data highest used address 16428 largest contiguous memory gap 16428 100 Memory area 3 contains Input highest used address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap 0 0 Memory area 4contains Output highest used address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap 0 0 Memory area 5 contains Memory highest used address 16384 largest contiguous memory gap 0 0 W Memory area 6 contains Code highest used address 4194304 largest contiguous memory gap 3522180 83 Build complete 0 errors 2 warnings ready for download Precompile OK Figure 7 20 Messages Window Messages might describe errors amp warnings or just information 4 Further on messages are categorized after the concerned component or functionality For example messages on syntactical checks of the project are generated in categories Precompile messages on the compilation of the project in category Build for example compile errors code size There also might be messages on the import of a project on the Library Manager etc Y ou can select the desired message c
63. be linked will receive the text This must be selected and replaced by the name of the desired constant or variable If there is already a branch to the right of an inserted box this branch will be assigned to the first output of the box Otherwise the outputs remain unassigned IL Editor Specific Characteristics In IL also a box can be inserted at any desired line If the Input Assistant is used with option Insert with arguments the chosen POU will be displayed in form of a CAL instruction and the respective input and output parameters of the chosen box element 1 CAL TONins ti IN 222 PT 222 ET gt 222 Figure 7 68 Box Inserted in IL Box element TON has been inserted instance PONInst has been defined locally Input parameters IN PT Output parameter ET Insert Empty Box Symbol EF Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt B gt This command is used to insert an empty box element into a network In contrast to Insert Box command when inserting an empty box not automatically the Input Assistant will open but the instance field above the box Then decide which type of box you need e Ifthe box should represent a function block then enter the desired instance variable name and close the input with lt ENTER gt You might use the Input Assistant Lal for entering the name of an already existing instance After inserting an already declared instance variable the function block i
64. browse the project for the line or POU which contains the definition of the corresponding POU or variable and will open the respective POU in an editor window Examples The following POU contains a function block definition fbinst a program call prog y and a function block call fbinst out VAR froinste rh Ivar iNT END VAR prog y Var prog Vay resl fbinst out If you put the cursor on prog y the command will open program prog y in its editor window If you put the cursor on fbinst the command will set the focus up to the declaration window to the line fbinst fb1 If you put the cursor on out the command will open function block fb1 in its editor window Browse Cross References Symbol This command should be used in text editors After selecting a definition and use this command the Cross Reference List window is opened and all the references related to the definition are displayed Insert File as Text This command can be used to insert the content of a text file to the currently opened text editor The standard dialog for browsing for a file Insert File will be opened where you can search for the desired file which must be in text format The file contents will be inserted at the current cursor position Advanced Depending on the currently active editor usually text editors these commands are available in Edit menu Available command
65. can also be printed Available commands e Show Backplane Connector Cover Add the Backplane Connector Cover device to the list of materials The quantity is variable according to the empty spaces in the backplane In projects with NX3030 CPU with redundancy there is an additional field e Show Redundant Configuration If the option is selected it adds accessories and devices to the list of material which are required for redundancy Configuration and Consumption Once configured the bus modules MasterTool IEC XE allows the user to view the backplane complete configuration as shown in Figure NAGO30_ Simple S Device NX3030 S E PLC Logic Application i Product Description Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption 16 Slot Backplane Rack Diagnostic Explorer 30 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Module Diagnostic High speed CPU 2 Ethernet Ports 2 Serial Channels Memory Card Interface Remote Rack Expansion and Redundancy il Library Manager rind DI Module 2 MainPrg PRG S i Task Configuration 24 Vdc 8 DO Transistor 8 DI Mixed Module e lidia 24 Vdc 16 DO Transistor Module a y Configuration Bus 16 DO Relay Module J NX3030 Nx3030 8 Ch Analog Input Module nx5000 NX5000 Y NETI J Nxs001 NX5001 Y comi Y com2 E NET1 Total 3120 mA NET2 4 Ch Analog Output Module Ethernet Module Figure 8 6 Configuration and Consumption 237 8 Editors The con
66. code size the size of global data the needed memory space on the controller and in case of online change also on the concerned POUS Logout Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F8 gt This command effects a log out of the application It disconnects the programming system from the target device PLC or simulation target and thus changes into the offline mode If the command 1s called from the Online menu the currently active application will be concerned If the command is called from the context menu when an application object is selected in the device tree then the selected application will be affected no matter whether it is set active Create boot application This command is available in online or offline mode for creating a boot project also named boot application The boot application serves the purpose to provide an application on the PLC which will be loaded automatically when the PLC gets started Use in Online Mode The boot application automatically will be stored as lt application name gt app on the PLC Use in Offline Mode The standard dialog for saving a file will be opened Select a folder where you want to store the current application as boot application file Automatically the file filter 1s Boot application files and extension app will be applied to the defined file name Therefore you might store the boot project in any folder in order to transfer it to a PLC later After confirming with Sa
67. commands are affecting the x axis of all diagrams simultaneously 263 8 Editors 8 Trace 6 MinMaxColor 1h x Te A cee eae OS EE c ine ee ee A eee eee MinMaxColor B00 Pe J ma 960 MainPrg s1 OUT 0 i mea ae ae mmm 40 MainPrg 52 0UT o A NA E Rac aCanes ae A ma 52 MainPrg 53 COLI 290 Y Sigg ennnsnaneeenennnsenenegete Ln ma 52 MainPrg 54 COU o a Pa MainPrg 53 GUT e PRO RUC m MainPrg 54 OUT 220 CU MainPrg 53 0UT O MainPrg 54 0UT 1170 A eer ee E C3 MainPrg 55 0UT 910 A Je C5 MainPrg B OUT B60 ARTE CARACAS RIA MainPra 57 OUT ica An AA AU c MainPrg 58 0UT 2110 Jr d CO MainPrg 59 OUT 370 O ES J c MainPrg 510 0UT 620 poef poe MainPrg D IN fae D a Seat ae C MainPrg B ENABLE 14390 OO MainPrg 53 AMPLITUD O MainPrg iSpecialSinus 105 ES peSHSdeeseeosee CO MainPrg enum 92 A a a 76 SC ca MESO ST OS 60 DS 44 Petit ai 28 e A e PQ 12 O aaa ES 4 O o Jenna 90 SaaS NS O aan al SECC NOAA O ae AO ini A A SI H Pa een eee RRE ee aida T 500ms THs Figure 8 30 Multi Channel Shortcuts for Trace NOTE The graphs of the Trace diagram are changed in greater distances while pressing the lt CTRL gt key additionally to the following keys The trace editor and the commands in the trace menu provides following function keys in default mode Keyboard
68. display Traces A trace in this context is a sampling of the values of variables that is the online progression of the values read from the PLC over a certain time Additionally a trigger can be set If that had be done only the triggered values are recorded and displayed For this purpose the values are sampled in a MasterTool IEC XE buffer and can be visualized in the Trace Editor window in the form of a graph in a coordinate system of defined appearance Variables triggered simultaneously can be recorded in one Trace object There the variables can be displayed in a variable specific coordinate system and possibly in multi channel mode Traces of variables with different trigger have to be recorded in their own trace object You can create any number of trace objects 265 8 Editors ff Device Nx3010 3 S El PLC Logic 0 Application EA Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption d Diagnostics Explorer a Diagnoste i Library Manager E CydicPrg00 PRG E CydicPrg01 PRG ExterninterruptPrg00 PRG MainPrg PRG TimeInterruptPrq00 PRG Task Configuration aj BlankTrace g MyTrace aj VisuTrace Figure 8 31 Project with Traces _ Trace l bx Add variable MinMaxColor ma 960 MainPro s1 OUT ma 40 MainPrg 52 QUT ma 52 MainPrg 53 COUN ma 52 MainPrg 54 COLIN O MainPrg 53 007 CO MainPrg 54 OUT CO MainPrg 53 0UT CO MainPrg 54 OUT Co MainPrg 55 007 O MainPrg B OUT CO MainPr
69. e Dai Z erg 0 fbinst ic a o IF bvarFALlse THEN 4 ivari 4 23 5 ELSE 6 ivarl 45 45 z lam Tol Figure 7 106 Step Into Step Out Symbol Default Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F10 gt This command can be used when stepping through a program in online mode for example for debugging purposes If the application program does not contain any calls Step Out will effect a jump back to the start of the application If however you previously have stepped into a called POU Step Out will effect a jump back just to the calling instruction Therefore in case of nested calls Step Out will lead you back through the hierarchy of callers step by step This for examples allows to go back and to step in to another called POU Run to Cursor Symbol This command can be used in order to execute the program up to a temporarily definable position This corresponds to setting a breakpoint at the desired next stop position and stepping there Place the cursor at the desired next break position and perform the command The instructions between the current break position and the cursor position will be executed NOTE One way to perform one determined task at once is adding a breakpoint inside the beginning of the POU associated with the task Then you can use the Run or Run To Cursor to get a complete cycle execution Set Next Statement Symbol z This command can be used when stepping through a program in online mode
70. editor Editing Textarea Margin Monitoring 6 Features a International Settings Gar Load and Save J Matching brackets MN Blade El SFC End of line markers MA Teal E SFC editor En SmartCoding S syntax Highlighting Caret color MN Black E Text editor Selection color E Lightsteel Folded line foreground E Teal Folded line background CTLightGray Highlight current line __JLightYello Wrap guide E Steel Blue Font click onto the sample to edit Figure 7 130 Options Dialog Category Text Editor Text Area You can activate the following options in order to have some visual assistance during editing Highlight current line The line where the cursor is placed is highlighted with the color defined in the selection list Matching brackets If the cursor is placed before or after a bracket or in a code line the corresponding closing resp opening bracket will be indicated by a rectangle which is colored as defined in the color selection field Also if the cursor is placed in the first or last line of a bracket scope the corresponding line at the end and start of this scope will be indicated also by a rectangle of this color A bracket scope contains all lines between corresponding keywords for example IF and END_IF see also tab Margin End of line markers The end of each editor line will be marked by a small dash of the defined color which is placed behind the last positi
71. external file in text format Such a file can be generated by using the export functionality provided in the Properties dialog of the respective variables list If option Export before compile is activated automatically at each project compilation a file with extension gvl will be created and be stored at the path specified in the Filename field If option mport before compile is activated an existing list export file can be read at each project compilation This allows to import a GVL created from another project for example in order to set up network variables communication 120 7 Menu Commands Properties Diagnostics Device PLC Logic Application Link To File Network properties Access control Filename Import before compile Export before compile Figure 7 29 Properties Dialog Category Network Settings SFC Settings This dialog allows settings for the current SFC object concerning compilation and flag handling The items handled in the tabs Flags and Build correspond to those handled in the SFC options dialog where the default settings for SFC objects are defined See the related item for a description of the particular settings 121 7 Menu Commands Properties POU_SFC Device PLC Logic Application Variable Description SFCInit SFCReset SFCError SFCEnableLimit SFCErrorstep SFCErrarPOU SFCQuitError SFCPause SFC Trans SFCCurrentStep SFCTip All steps and actions are reset The init
72. in this monitoring If this situation occur the user will be prompted with a message The table for each watch Expression shows the Type and current Value as well as 1f currently set a Prepared value for forcing or writing In case of a boolean variable the handling 1s even easier You can toggle boolean preparation values by use of the lt ENTER gt or lt SPACE gt key according to the following order If the value is TRUE the preparation steps are FALSE gt TRUE gt nothing If the value is FALSE the preparation steps are TRUE gt FALSE gt nothing If a watch expression variable is an instance for example of a function block a plus resp minus sign 1s preceded Usually via a mouse click on this sign the particular elements of the instanced object can be additionally displayed and hidden see fbinst and fbinst2 Figure 8 12 Icons indicate whether the variable is an input output or normal one As long as the default setting Replace Constants Compile options dialog is active constants are indicated by an a symbol preceding the value in the Value column When pointing with the cursor on a variable in the implementation part a tooltip will show the declaration and comment of the variable See Figure 8 12 241 8 Editors BB Start Page Y Configuration Bus lz MainPrg Device Application MainPrg Expression ivar Type Prepared value Comment INT fbinst FB1 4 in INT S out IN
73. input data will be copied to a save area the same problems have to be regarded for the outputs For example modules of the SysSem library could be used to solve the synchronization problems Also when accessing other global objects global variables modules consistency problems might occur as soon as the size of the objects exceeds the data width of the processor structures or arrays 25 3 Concepts and Basic Components forming a logical unit In addition the modules of the SysSem library might be used to solve the problems Code Generation and Online Change Code Generation and Compile Information Machine code will not be generated until the application project gets downloaded to the target device PLC or simulation target At each download the compile information containing the code and a reference ID of the loaded application will be stored in the project directory in a file lt project name gt lt device name gt lt application D gt compileinfo The compile info will be deleted when the Clean and Clean all commands are performed Online Change If the application project currently running on the controller has been changed in the programming system since it has been downloaded last just the modified objects of the project will be loaded to the controller while the program keeps running there ATENTION Online Change modifies the running application program and does not affect a restart process Make su
74. is a collective editor for the languages FBD Function Block Diagram LD Ladder Diagram and IL Instruction List Note For inserting elements in the FBD and LD editor view regard also the possibility to drag them directly from the toolbox or from another position within the editor Insert Network Symbol 1 Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt I gt This command is used to insert a network in the FBD LD or IL editor If the cursor currently is placed within an existing network the new network will be inserted immediately above that network If the cursor currently is placed in the editor window but not in a network the new network will be added at the end of the current network list The network numbering will be updated automatically Notice that in contrast to the previous version the network element is also used in the IL editor NOTE The display of the elements in a LD FBD IL network is defined in the FBD LD and IL Editor Insert Network Below Symbol E Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt T gt This command is used to insert a network in the FBD LD or IL editor If the cursor currently is placed within an existing network the new network will be inserted immediately below that network If the cursor currently is placed in the editor window but not in a network the new network will be added at the end of the current network list The network numbering will be updated automatically Notice that in contrast to t
75. is displayed in single channel view 272 8 Editors Edit Appearance Pur IS Xaxis Y axis Display mode Auto Fixed length Fixed Minimum Maximum Length W Grid Font on o Backcolor White Backcolor on Selection JBeige Use as default Figure 8 39 Edit Appearance Dialog e Auto X axis Y axis If this option is activated the time span for tracing that is the time span displayed on the x axis of the trace window will automatically be scaled according to the buffer size currently defined for the record in the runtime system e Fixed Length X axis tab If this option is selected the range displayed on the time axis has a fixed length This length must be set in the length field The scale is also adjusted for the length and the graph scrolling is done automatically for the visible range so will always be displayed in the chart the last generated data e Fixed X axis and Y axis tabs By selecting this option the range displayed on the axis is defined by the minimum and maximum fields e Minimum X axis and Y axis tabs Sets the minimum value displayed on the selected axis e Maximum X axis and Y axis tabs This value defines the maximum value displayed on the selected axis e Length X axis tab Sets the length of the range displayed on the time axis e Grid X and Y axis If this option is activated a grid will be display
76. it automatically goes to Run Mode without the need for a MasterTool IEC XE command Stop Mode For CPU execution interruption without losing the connection with the MasterTool IEC XE software the user must select the Stop option available at the menu Debug as shown on Figure 4 34 55 4 Quick Start File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help 2a Ml g Es ol 5 a i EM New Breakpoint Lea S G T Topje Brealpaint F9 Step Over F10 Step Into FS oor Step Out Shift F 10 de Eon El Date pos Diagnostic ip a set next Statement Ean 8 MainPrg PRG Show next Statement a E Task Configuratio Write values Cirl4F7 beens ge Configuration a s aes Force values F7 5 H Configuration Bus Unforce i ee 3 44 f Nx3010 Nx3010 Add All Forces To Watchlist 37 COM1 Display Mode Fa kh nM Figure 4 34 Stopping the Application In case the CPU 1s initialized without the stored application it automatically goes to Stop Mode as it happens when a software exception occurs Logout In case the user option is to finalize the communication with the CPU the command Logout must be used placed in the Online menu as shown on Figure 4 35 Create boot application Logoff current online user Download Online Change Source download to connected device Cluster Basic Configuration Reset warm Reset cold Reset oridi Simulation Figure 4 35 Interrupting the Communication with the CPU 56
77. it will be checked which applications currently are on the PLC and whether the application parameters on the PLC are matching those in the project configuration Appropriate messages will indicate mismatches See the description of the Login command for further details Task Configuration The Task Configuration Es defines one or several tasks for controlling the processing of an application program It is an essential resource object for an application and it is inserted automatically when you create a new project from MasterTool Standard Project A task can call an application specific program POU which is only available in the device tree below the application as well as a program which is managed in the POUs window In the latter case the project globally available program will be instantiated by the application A task configuration can be edited in the task editor the available options being target specific In online mode the task editor provides a monitoring view giving information on cycles cycle times and task status Important Notes for Multitasking Systems On some systems real preemptive multitasking is realized In this case the following must be regarded All tasks share one process map Reason An own process map for each task would charge the performance Therefore the process map always can only be consistent to one task Hence the user when creating a project explicitly must take care that in case of conflicts the
78. its current version available on Altus website User Manual This command opens the default web browser with the User Manual on its current version available on Altus website Altus Home Page This command opens the Altus website About This command opens a box showing the version information on the currently used MasterTool IEC XE Programming System the operational system Net used components and the license data Bus Editor Menu Contains commands used for bus editor customization it is displayed in the menu bar shape and context menu and is available when the editor is active Available commands Zoom out Zoom in Rulers Ports Grid 229 7 Menu Commands Zoom out Decreases the zoom level in the editor bus screen Zoom in Increases the zoom level in the editor bus screen Rulers Adds rulers on the left side and at the top of the editor bus window Ports Displays in the graphical editor the connection ports related to modules racks and cables They serve as guidance to the user of the possible connection points on the graphic objects Grid Adds a grid as a background in bus editor Declaration The Declaration category provides commands for working in the tabular declaration editor Tabular Declaration Editor Declaration It provides commands for working in the tabular declaration editor The commands are available in the context menu and in the toolbar of the editor Available commands
79. location Altering the original files will have no further effects on the installed devices In order for these changes to take effect the devices will have to be reinstalled It is considered good practice to change the internal version number of a device description after it has been changed ATTENTION The internal device repository must never be altered manually Always use the Device Repository dialog to reinstall add or remove devices e Uninstall This command will remove that is uninstall the currently selected device It will be removed from the device repository and not be available for use in the programming system any longer The current list of installed devices will be offered when you are going to add a device object via Add Device or Add Object Install Device Options Symbol ii Install device is accessed through the Tools menu and open the device installation dialog To perform the installation just select the file and click the Open button NOTE The Device Install dialog is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Standard or the option Enable Repository dialog is disabled For further information about features see Features The Options dialog contains sub dialogs for configuring the behavior and display of the MasterTool IEC XE programming interface The current settings confirmed with OK will be saved on the local system overwriting the defaults which are provided w
80. memory occupation of I and Q in each of the CPU models 12 2 Technical Description Languages MasterTool IEC XE software is available in Portuguese and English After the installation the interface assumes the language of Computer Operating System The language can be changed after installation without the need for resettlement Compatibility with Other Product Earlier to 1 29 versions of MasterTool IEC XE are not compatible with all revisions of products of Nexto Series modules With any of the products related below either in its software version or product revision an updating to 1 29 or higher version is required Table 2 2 Compatibility with Products Version 1 29 Earlier to 1 40 versions of MasterTool IEC XE do not allow the configuration of the MODBUS for Symbolic Mappings communication drivers The same behavior is valid for the LibLogs Library use In order to a project with these drivers or libraries may be charged in the CPU the products related below either in its software version or product revision need to be updated In case it is not necessary the use of MODBUS for Symbolic Mappings communication drivers or LibLogs Library there is no restriction for this version Table 2 3 Compatibility with Products Version 1 40 Minimum Requirements The following products are presented as minimum requirements for installation and use of MasterTool IEC XE for any of its distributions versio
81. menu bar File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Figure 5 4 Standard Menu Bar Standard Menus and Commands File Menu Commands for actions on the project file open close save print page setup source download upload Symbol Command Shortcut New Project lt Ctrl gt lt N gt Close Project NAAA ESS are Projects O ET Projecte ae ET SsaverSenaarctive Ta e Source download OOOO S o o e O EE PM Page sewe Y O Pempe O o o o E ee EN oa OOOO e Table 5 1 File Menu Edit Menu Commands available for working in editors language editors declaration editor Symbol Command Shortcut lt Ciri gt lt X gt lt Ctrl gt lt Ins gt ETT EE Finde Replace SS 72 5 User Interface Find Next lt F3 gt Find Next Selected lt Ctrl gt lt F3 gt Find Previous Selected lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt lt F3 gt Browse Go to Definition lt Ins gt lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt U lt Ctri gt lt U gt Next Bookmark lt F12 gt Previous Bookmark lt Shift gt F12 Clean Bookmarks Input Assistant F2 Autodeclare lt Shift gt F2 Next Message F4 lt Shift gt F4 Go to Source Position se F F n E A zm Ez Table 5 2 Edit Menu View Menu Commands for activating the particular standard views that is getting them displayed in a window in the user interface Element Properties for SFC eleme
82. ningu m INS Lini Coli Cani Figure 10 4 Disables Object The RegDiagnostics object is used to declare request diagnostic variables These variables can be declared directly by the user in any POU or GVL but can also be generated automatically using the Generate Diagnostic Variables button available on the screen of the drivers request configuration If the object does not exist in the project yet it will be created after the button 1s pressed After that if necessary the variables declared in this object may be edited File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help a S Ea CEES ITS le Devices Y 4 X f StartPage if Configuration Bus fi Diagnostics Disables ReqDiagnostics xQ Untitledi64 mella 1 A gt Device Nx3010 2 MODBUS_Device_REQDG_0001 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS_RTU_MAPPING 1 A a S E PLC Logic 3 MODBUS Device REQDG 0002 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS _RTU MAPPING 1 cs 5 0 Application 4 MODBUS Device REQDG 0003 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS_RTU_MAPPING 1 3 E Bill of Material 5 MODBUS_Device_REQDG_0004 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG_MODBUS_RTU_MAPPING_1 gt a n 6 MODBUS Device REQDG 0005 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS_RTU MAPPING 1 8 i 7 MODBUS_Device_REQDG_0006 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG_MODBUS_RTU_MAPPING_1 EH Diagnostic Explorer 8 MODBUS_Device_1_REQDG_0001 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRU
83. o in 175 Buld Men ias 182 Genere Code arar its dista 182 A A ROA 182 clen A ld 182 Opine Ment st dedico 183 A 183 PT A A A A A 185 Tee DOC PICA cda 185 ISO SOF current On US aaa 185 Down date da o a do e ia 185 SAS II A 186 Source download to connected device tt AS 186 Conteutation of Basto Css aa 187 RESCATA twa un treaueuu namtenceduaeacnatee ananiuaouteas 187 Reset Cold ic bl 187 NG O O CRT eT MENT enn ye oenE Ten ge Very ner nen eae 187 SO o o ey TEL OT REN ina 187 DEDUCIDO add EEE III UI O EAS E A 188 A A A 189 O A RRA 189 Breakpoms ia 189 ING Wis Pe ADO e 189 ORs le Brea kpO Meco side 192 PEON E PEPE E o II PORE CR ie OT 192 PAI e E 192 SU OU n N 193 Run to CUE io 193 SEL Next tati ta Dl dan eal lll oae 193 Show Next State menta cia if 194 PP O E 194 SN A O Trea eeew aT aneE RerniMntE ereCEn A 194 Untorcs Vales alse ae acne ie eats a mata ee eae ute nate caine eat 197 Add All Borces to the Watchlists A 198 Summary IIS DIA Modena iia 198 Tools IEA AAA IN 198 Bis o EN 198 A A O A S 202 Device REPOSO ico 203 SA DS AA II A A A AO IA 204 DE a decent tava dena patta austere asim dae 204 Window Menus id 225 Ns O 226 PREVIOUS POMO Ennio latacea nese 226 AA O A A ce et aera eee IN 226 As A E UnEe Cent eee ees ne et Menw Wee ree Unte Ce me ma Tee ne a wens 226 Reset WindOW ay OU a su auuauatanacces ian cuamanelenoaieaes 226 New Horizontal Tab SOU dio 226 New Vertical Tab TOU Deena a acid 22 A A A eV OR erate ee er ae 221
84. object The Minimum and Maximum fields define the operating range of the variables SP PV and MV The Minimum SP and Maximum SP fields do not allow editing These fields assume the values of the fields PV Engineering Minimum and PV Engineering Maximum respectively The correct adjustment of this information is of great importance for the proper functioning of the PID loop It is important to note that these values are also used to validate data entry fields of Online Settings group of Setting amp Chart tab according to the parameter setting View Options Group Control Settings This group allows you to configure some parameters related to the operating mode of the PID controller e Sample Time ms set the time interval that the PID is running may vary from ms to 1 000 000 ms e Control this input parameter selects the right direction of action MV to provide a negative feedback If a wrong selection is made the resulting feedback is positive and the PID will not be able to control the process Direct control should be selected when MV should increase in response to an increase in PV Reverse control should be selected when MV is expected to decrease in response to an increase in PV e Enable These fields enable individually the four actions proportional integrative derivative and derivative in PV that make up the block PID 313 8 Editors Control Settings Sample Time ms Control 100 S Reverse s 4 Enable
85. of Q Diagnostic Area initial address QB area limited according to CPU used Diagnosis variable size TCP Port TCP port O to 01065535 Mapping Disabling Initial address used to Any address of Q disable the MODBUS area limited relations configured according to CPU in the server used Mappings field QX X Table 8 30 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Configuration 296 8 Editors Advanced Configurations W MODBUS Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Task Cycle ms BO Connection Inactivity Time out s 10 Figure 8 68 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Advanced Configurations Screen Configuration Description Default Possibilities Task Cycle ms Time for the instance 100 1 to 1000 execution within the cycle without considering its own execution time Communication Timeout TCP IP 10 10 to 65535 Simeon erent ee Table 8 31 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Advanced Configurations Adding a MODBUS Relation Wer MODBUS Server_Mapping_000 Coil Mapping Settings Data Start Address Data Size 8 Used range 1 8 IEC Variable 4105 Used range Q4x4105 0 204105 Read only Filters cancel Figure 8 69 Adding a MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Relation Configuration Description Default Possibilities Coil 1 bit Holding Register 16 bits Input Status 1 bit Data Type
86. on this please see the respective the particular object type and the corresponding editor This command is also available in the context menu of the POUSs tree and Device tree To rename an object in the POUs tree click on the entry to open an edit frame or use the Properties dialog Add Device This command is used to add a device object representing a hardware module indented below the currently selected object in the device tree The command opens the Add Device dialog Depending on the currently selected position in the devices tree the user will get a list of devices available for insertion As a precondition the devices basing on a device description file must be installed on your system which can be done by the Device Repository dialog In the Name field at top of the dialog define a name with which the device should be entered in the devices tree This name must be a valid and unique IEC identifier 124 7 Menu Commands By activating the corresponding item you may select which of the actions listed shall be executed Append device Insert device Plug device or Update device Your choice will effect the list of proposals in the sector Device as well as the labeling of the button placed at left of the button Close for closing the dialog Currently only de Add Device option 1s valid The scrollable table in the Add Device dialog provides a list of devices which can be inserted at the current position of the devices tree
87. online mode Notice anyway that there are some special elements which cannot get converted and thus will only be available in the appropriate editor view Further on some constructs might not be converted un ambiguously FBD elements which cannot be displayed as LD elements for example XOR will be displayed as FBD boxes within a LD network To switch back to the LD view use command View as ladder logic To switch back to the IL view use command View as instruction list 166 7 Menu Commands ATTENTION A proper conversion presumes syntactically correct code Otherwise parts of the implementation View as instruction list IL Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt 3 gt This command is available if you currently are working in the Function Block Diagram FBD or Ladder LD view of the POU It can be used in offline and online mode The FBD and LD networks will be converted to an instruction list NOTE There are some elements which cannot get converted and thus the respective network will remain in the original editor view In case of syntax errors also no conversion is possible a corresponding error message will be generated Some constructs might not be convertible unambiguously and thus will be normalized after a conversion from IL to FBD LD and back This concerns negations and explicit implicit assignment of function block in and outputs To switch back to the FBD view use command View as function block diagram
88. or IP address My Device _ ak Node Address IP Address using UDP IP Address using TCP Example for a node address 0104 02F4 Example for an IP address 192 168 101 15 dialog will the device to the list Enter either a device name ne automatically try to identify thi Figure 8 15 Add Device Dialog 245 8 Editors You can specify the device to be added by its name example MyDevice node address example 0104 02F4 or IP address example 192 168 101 15 Depending on whether you specify a name or an address you have to set the appropriate Assignment mode that is how the system should process to add the desired device In most cases your specification will be unambiguous so that the automatic mode will work The other two modes are only needed when you have to precise the type of your entry because it is not evidently a name or an address Example You want to add a device with hex node address AFFE AFFE also could be a target name so to make the specification clear set option Node Address e Automatic The dialog will automatically search the correct mechanism to find and add the device to the list e Node Address If this option is selected a unique node address example 02F4 must be specified The network then will be checked for the availability of a device with that address and will add it to the list e IP Address using UDP If this option is selected a unique IP address
89. project download Customer specific entries Log entries of I O drivers Log entries of the data server Start Page Configuration Bus Device X Communication Settings Di E Offine Logging E 0 exception s 0 information s lt All components gt Logger lt Default logger gt Time Stamp Description Component 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 32 0 Test Lag CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 32 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 31 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log cM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Log CM 7 26 2012 2 51 PM 30 0 Test Loa CM o o o o be o o o o 0 be 0 o be pl o 0
90. reer N 100 DOS citan wesausaecennenrasnanes 104 MEC Ele AS TENE ida 105 IN A E 105 DOOM o Ae ROR A e 106 APUESTA ai aia lora 107 O Dl a tea A A A t gee see suamenascknaaeuine eaetl Seats caususeamanaueasennetescasesasate 108 INNS SSS VI Midas 110 VIEW MENU ia A A aa daas 110 Detalla o a e 111 E O a cab nadonea ade 111 Element ero pere ad A A iba 112 A N 112 fe A renin rearete eimai neary ee renee avir rie rer ren A ny tees eo ete TTPO reer Seerr tener Aes 113 Wa MAS a os ear ne eer tree ena T Ont mee NERC Hen cee odios 113 o A E 113 A A A A A 113 Summary Cae A seica A E E a a 114 CTOS RETTENE NIE Wii d iria aie 115 ETE cease tees tera eee cient sa cere E T AA EEEE AEE EAE A EEA 116 EE E SS E is E A A E E E EE aa acts A T A E ate ETT 116 Proper Sron seit Sih sek ire eas seed ete e aa cee aces a eed tlie 116 Project Men 123 A A serie a ems eenn rare 124 NR O O O 124 Add On ii als 125 Edt Obi 126 EXC 0 ew heat me tee serie ne eI aT eR PENT RE 126 A A 126 PrO tE e Baro YoU E een Ars nee Ns PO N tn ne nev On RIN Pert O AA 131 A react mere E AAT Meee Onten ey emt Nr Neat ier neen re renee 140 EXPUSO 142 MPA SY a ia 143 RR O 144 COMPAS nan ia ia fs 145 User Mana ment rate se mene enatcae notice 147 Menus from the Editors of Programming Languages sssscccssssssssccccccccccccssssssssssssssscscsscsccssssscsses 150 EBD EDIL Editor Command Sri ii 151 CFC COMMI Ss a dd mel Ree rare 167 SEC Command a ee ne o
91. s All steps and actions are reset The init s Gets TRUE if a time check failed Enable time check on steps Contains the name of the step that cause Contains the name of the POU that cause Execution is stopped SFCErroris reset Executionis stopped SFCError is reset Gets TRUE if a transition switches throi Contains the name of the active step lt E 8 E El El El El El EE I Switches the next transition on a rising e d d LI LI d m d d LI d d I Figure 7 30 Properties Dialog Category SFC Settings Flags The Set Defaults button will exactly apply those defaults which are currently defined in the SFC Options dialog to the current object External File This tab of the Properties dialog for external files added to the project lets you view and modify the properties that were set in the dialog box Add External File For further information see External File 122 Project Menu Properties memory 0 What do you want to do with the external file Remember the link Remember the link and embed into project 5 Embed into project When the external file changes then reload the file automatically 8 prompt whether to reload the file 5 de nothing Linked file Name memory jpg Location D Size 169 06 KB 173 113 bytes Changed Friday May 18 2012 11 16 15 AM displ ay file properties Update the embedded file Figure 7 31 Properties Dialog
92. submenu Set Reset of the CFCmenu assigns a Reset to a boolean output element which means that the output will be reset by a TRUE of the input and keep this value even if the input becomes FALSE again Select the input pin of the respective output and perform the command See CFC Editor Cursor Positions for the possible cursor position for selection IEC 61131 Programming Manual The reset output will be indicated by a R Vain a EN Figure 7 84 Reset 170 Set 7 Menu Commands In this example VarOut will be set to FALSE if VarIn delivers TRUE VarOut retains this value even when VarIn springs back to FALSE Alternative settings concerning the Set Reset properties of an output are None which means that there is no Set or Reset activity assigned or S Set Symbol This command by default part of the submenu Set Reset of the CFC menu assigns a Set to a boolean output element which means that the output gets set by a TRUE of the input and keeps this value even if the input becomes FALSE again Select the input pin of the respective output and perform the command See CFC Editor Cursor Positions for the possible cursor position for selection IEC 61131 Programming Manual In this example VarOut will be set to TRUE if VarIn delivers TRUE VarOut retains this value even when VarIn changes back to FALSE Va A Vardut Figure 7 85 Set Alternative settings concerning the Set Reset properties of an output are
93. the communication settings There is no device application on target Do you want to create it and proceed with download Confirm with Yes to start the compilation and download of the application The compile messages will be displayed in the Messages window If the project has been created correctly no compilation errors are to be expected so that the application can now be started Starting the Application on Nexto Perform command Start Debug menu In consequence the program starts running A green RUN will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the user interface Monitoring the Application There are three possibilities for watching the variables of the application program e Watch lists e Writing and force values e Online views of the POUs Open an Instance Window of the Program The instance view of a POU provides all watch expressions of that instance in a table view in the declaration part and if activated as inline monitoring also in the implementation part In order to open the online view perform a double click on POU MainPrg in the Devices window or select this entry and choose command Edit Object context menu In the lower part of the view the user can see the code lines as entered in offline mode supplemented by the little inline monitoring windows behind each variable showing the actual value In the upper part a table shows the watch expressions of the POU that 1s the current valu
94. the Project profile and the standard language for POUs programs In this case the Single profile and ST language will be used Click on Next to proceed or Cancel to cancel MasterTool Standard Project Choose the project profile configuration and the wizard will create the following objects within the project Choose the project profile Single Choose the default language for all programs Structured Text ST ha Figure 4 4 Profile Selection 33 4 Quick Start The next screen defines the POU language created by the selected profile As the profile is Single there is only one POU MainPrg and the ST language remains Click on Previous to return to the last screen Finish to end or Cancel to cancel MasterTool Standard Project ad Choose the language and the wizard will create the following objects within the project Common Task Programs Preempt Free Tasks Program associated with Main Task MainPrg in Structured Text ST Figure 4 5 Programming Language When the Finish button is pressed the MasterTool IEC XE will start the project development environment creation This procedure may take a few seconds Adding Modules By default the CPU and the hardware modules selected at the moment of project creation are already inserted in the system configuration The user must include the other modules if necessary then In case the tab Product Library is not available on the MasterTool IEC XE screen i
95. the computer where there is a gateway to redirect packets transmitted by MasterTool IEC XE it is always recommended to use the IP address of the destination avoiding this unnecessary traffic to other equipment not involved in communication Files This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor which can be opened for the device currently selected in the devices tree via command Edit Object or by a double click on the device entry in the Devices window The dialog serves to transfer files between the host and the controller This means you can choose any file from a directory of the local network to get it copied to the files directory of the currently connected runtime system or the other way round There is also the possibility to transfer files between the controller and a memory card which should be inserted on the selected CPU Start Page Configuration Bus Device Communication Settings Files Log Users and Groups Access Rights Host Location D Temp la gt x Runtime Location 4 MemoryCard ae ees Modified Name Siz Modified t imagejpg 428 57 KB 438 852 bytes 1 5 2012 5 06 PM A NextoMemCard Lj Backup _ Test project 2 77 MB 2 908 240 bytes 7 26 2012 2 29 PM image jpg 428 57 KB 438 852 bytes 7 26 2012 2 31 PM 1 report doo 871 91 KB 892 834 bytes 7 26 2012 2 31 PM Figure 8 17 Device dialog Files In the left part of the dialog the f
96. the following task types Cyclic the task is executed in cycles or it is called every time interval configured in the field at its side E g t 20ms Event the task is executed when the variable is from the BOOL type configured in the field at its side receives a rise going edge in other words the variable value goes from FALSE to TRUE External the task is executed when the external interruption occurs It is configured in the field at its side Freewheeling the task is always executed according to its priority in other words tasks with higher priority are executed first Status the task is executed when the BOOL variable configured in the field at its side is true In addition to the fields mentioned above the nterval must be configured obligatory for cyclic type the period of time after which the task is called to run maximum minimum time for 40 4 Quick Start MainTask is 750 ms and 5 ms respectively It is recommended to use a task cycle time interval of at least two times its execution time The CPU watchdog is configured to avoid the user tasks stopping The Time field sets the maximum time allowed for the execution of the task If the task takes a longer time than watchdog to be executed the application will to STOP and takes exception by watchdog The Sensitivity field indicates how many times the watchdog will have to be reached in order to confirm the exception If the run time of the task reaches th
97. the gateway as the active path to the controller This means that all actions concerning communication will exactly refer to this channel The command will also be executed on a double click on the channel entry The currently active path will be displayed bold in the list and active will be appended i NX3010_MasterTool 0382 active If a device has been set as the active path but was not reachable during the last scan network it will be drawn in italics e Add gateway This command opens the Gateway dialog where you can define a gateway to be added to the current configuration Enter a symbolic Name the Driver type and driver specific parameters e g IP Address and Port for that gateway To enter the parameter values perform a double click on the respective column field to open an edit frame After having closed the dialog by OK the new gateway entry will be added in the configuration tree in the Communication Settings dialog 244 8 Editors 02 Gateway Name Gateway 1 Driver settings Param Value IP A localhost Port 1217 Figure 8 14 Gateway Dialog ATTENTION The proper configuration of the gateway requires detailed knowledge In case of doubt leave unchanged the default configuration settings e Add device This command opens a dialog titled Add device where you can manually define a device to be added to the currently selected gateway entry Add device Device Enter name node address
98. value according to the type of Trigger Edge the tracing will be terminated after having additionally sampled that percentage of values which is defined in the Position field Pos trigger field This means that as soon as the trigger gets TRUE or reaches a certain value the trace logging will be continued for a defined number of cycles By button Gid the Input Assistant can be used to get an appropriate trigger variable Notice the possibility of controlling additionally the start of the tracing by the Record Condition e Trigger Edge See Table 8 7 Edge Description S No trigger effect at all Default Positive Trigger event on rising edge of the boolean trigger variable or as soon as the value defined by Level for an analogue trigger variable is reached by an ascending run Negative Trigger event on falling edge of the boolean trigger variable or as soon as the value defined by Level for an analogue trigger variable is reached by a descending run Cae Trigger event on the conditions described for positive and negative see above Table 8 7 Trigger Edge e Post Trigger samples sets the number of records per trace signal They are registered after the trigger Default value is 50 the range is from O through 232 1 e Trigger Level If an analogue variable is used as trigger variable define here the value of this variable at which the trigger event will be caused Enter a value directly or a variable
99. which are kept in this list is defined in the Load and Save options Tools menu F w MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Hel ae la mic i Ja A A E New Project Ctri N dE gt Open Project Ctl 0 a ox Close Project E3 Save Project ctrl 5 save Project As Project Archive d Source upload Source download Print Page Setup Recent projects 1 C WempWhntited115 project Exit Alt F4 2 C Temp Test project 3 C Temp Unttled 114 project C Temp Project project Figure 7 10 Recent Projects List 97 7 Menu Commands Exit Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt F4 gt This command will terminate the programming system If currently a project 1s opened which has been modified since the last saving a dialog will open asking you whether the project should be saved Edit Menu This menu provides commands for device and objects editing in its respective editors Available commands Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete Select All Find amp Replace Browse Insert File As Text Advanced Bookmarks Input Assistant Auto Declare Next Message Previous Message Go to Source Position Undo Redo Provides the following commands for restoring previous steps during editing an object in a project Available commands e Undo e Redo Undo Symbol gt Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt Z gt This command undoes the action w
100. which by default are not editable in this dialog see file properties in the Windows Explorer 127 7 Menu Commands Summary Project Information rie _ Summary Properties Statistics L Company Title Version E Released Library Categories Default namespace Author Descripton The fields in bold letters are used to identify a library Automatically generate POUs for property access cancel Figure 7 36 Project Information Dialog Summary Here you can optionally add some information on the project file like a Title a Version the Default Namespace the Author the Company name and any Description text This information will automatically be displayed as available keys in the Properties tab of the Project Information dialog NOTE If a project is intended to be used as a library in other projects you must enter a Title a Version number and the Company name here Any library provided with these project information can be installed on the system and get included in a project The company name besides the category serves for sorting in the Library Repository dialog Optionally also a Default namespace the author s name and a short description can be specified in order to get saved as library project info If no default namespace 1s defined here automatically the name of the library project will be valid as namespace Assig
101. will show a protocol of the running actions code generation initialization etc and information on the memory areas code size global data size and size of allocated memory Online Change ATTENTION Online Change modifies the running application program and does not effect a restart process Make sure that the new application code nevertheless will effect the desired behavior of the system Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered NOTES When an online change is done the application specific initializations homing etc will not be executed because the machine keeps its state For this reason the new program code might not be able to work as desired Pointer variables keep their values form the last cycle If there is a pointer on a variable which has changed its size due to an online change the value will not be correct any longer Make sure that pointer variables get re assigned in each cycle This command is used to perform an online change on the currently active application Online change means that only the modified parts of an already running project will be re loaded to the PLC This is not possible after a Clean all or Clean application and code generation operation The clean process removes the compile information which is automatically stored at each which is the basis on an online change During download the messa
102. 3 16 12 In view of these differences and to facilitate application development using the capabilities of MasterTool IEC XE and Nexto Series CPUs is recommended the use of symbolic variables In this case the differences between the simulation and the behavior with the Nexto Series CPUs are not checked Therefore the best practice is to avoid the use of direct representation variables whenever possible to avoid rework when developing a logic that will be tested in simulation and then loaded into a CPU It is also important to stress due to differences between the architectures of the devices that the same code generated by using the simulation device can have sizes in the areas of data and code other than those generated for a Nexto series CPU Project Upload Nexto Series CPUs allow the project storing in the product memory which can be uploaded and reused through the MasterTool IEC XE software To store a project in the product memory the CPU must be connected Login and the project sending option must be selected together with the applicative To upload the project previously stored the options shown on Figure 4 37 must be selected 58 4 Quick Start W MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build E New Project Ctrl4n Ga OpenProject Ctl o0 Close Project Save Project Cirl4 s Save Project As Project Archive d Source download Print Page Setup Recent projects Exit Figure 4 37
103. 4 Quick Start Simulation Mode MasterTool IEC XE has an important simulation feature which allows the user to test his application without the equipment use turning possible a higher flexibility at the program development However some specific resources depending on the Nexto CPUs hardware are not possible to be simulated The resources unavailable in the simulation mode are the following RTC Watch Bus scan I O Modules Bus interrupt Serial Ports Ethernet Communication Communication protocol as Modbus PROFIBUS Interfaces PROFIBUS Slaves SD card operation Variables diagnosis Diagnostics Explorer Other functions that access the hardware of PLC For this reason the simulation mode should be used to test the application logic in that do not depend on hardware access functions These resources should be tested with the hardware to ensure the functioning of the application in this sense To change the MasterTool IEC XE to simulation mode you must select this option in the Online Menu as Figure 4 36 After that a warning is displayed in the bottom bar of MasterTool IEC XE that indicates that the tool is operating in Simulation Mode Wer NOD project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Onine Debug Tools Window Help ae qa E Ta j L i ar a iE O Login Alt F8 Logout Ctrl F8 Li i 3 Create boot application Device NX3010 ER ii Logoff current online user 2 l PLC Logic
104. 55 0 Gateway Address 192 168 15 253 Current user nobody Figure 4 16 Configuring the CPU Communication Port In case the CPU with the Ethernet configuration is not found in the network or the active CPU has a different Ethernet configuration from the project a message will appear on the screen during the Login requesting to the user the possibility of changing the previous ETHERNET configuration by the configured Yes option or canceling and quit sending the project No option MasterTool IEC XE Libraries There are several programming tool resources which are available through libraries Therefore these libraries must be inserted in the project so its utilization becomes possible The insertion procedure is rather simple the user must select the item Library Manager available in the left menu and select Add library as shown on Figure 4 18 can be interrupted after downloading application Do you wish continue Figure 4 17 Configuration Warning 44 4 Quick Start a 5 w NX30xx project MasterTool IEC XE 3 amp File Edit View Project Libraries Build Online Debug Tools Window Help ba l amp a Devices E StartPage if Configuration Bus fi Library Manager xQ v Mw y r y O Name Namespace Effective version Add library J Device NX3010 E a 18 IoStandard 3 4 2 0 System loStandard 3 4 2 0
105. 78 8 Editors Expression Type Prepared value Comment Device Application MainPrg ivar INT 95 895 Device Application MainPrg fbinst FB1 INT INT a 5 Figure 8 45 Watch View in Online Mode ATTENTION When the monitored values represent direct mappings addresses areas of I Q and M consistency is not performed it only exists for the device where monitoring is being made Since the projects can be made to any CPU models with different memory sizes the addresses outside the range will not return valid monitoring values and in some cases the value read can be 0 Write Values In column Prepared Value you can enter a desired value which will be written or forced to the respective expression on the controller by command Write Values or Force Values like usable in other monitoring views for example declaration editor Watch All Forces This is a special watch list view which in online mode gets automatically filled with all currently forced values of the active application Each Expression Type Value and Prepared value will be shown like in the online view of a Watch lt n gt list You can unforce values by one of the following commands available via the Unforce button e Unforce all selected Expressions without modifying the value e Unforce all selected Expressions and restore the variable to the value it had before forcing it Watch all Forces r 2 X rre Unforce all selected Expressions wit
106. A A 12 Master Lool TEC XE VCrSIOOS ii iia 12 A A II A a dadsensotavassvavseheseseadessuesasseseevs 13 Compatibility with Other Product anisori oia 13 Minimum Requitements cornada 13 Data tor TUCASA cia 14 a AAA A A 14 A O arene ert er 14 3 CONCEPTS AND BASIC COMPONEN Tsun A aia 15 DIVER OC UCU ON ic A A AAA 15 Basic Concorde 15 Advanced FUnCUOnaliies iii AAA EA A iaa 15 Object Orientation in Programming and Project Structure oooooooooooonoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 A O A O A 16 Operators and Special Varia les ut aa 16 New User Management and Access Rights Concept cocooooocooooococcccnnnnnnnnnnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 16 Feaci ETOR eam ee ne Rory se eC E AER ENON Nee ty Soe 16 LDN ERON alle illa iio 16 Additional FUNG MOR AICS lt a 16 A E 17 A A eee ete ater aes 17 A O en sate 18 NOP E PO O O E 18 A NRT eee er ERD er Peet a Pet PCM ee SE Ie TSP NRE ee 19 CO oi E 19 General AD EN E AE EE A R E E E A E E A EO aos 20 Proje O O E N OE 21 ar a E E R 21 FOUS VV UNG OW neata A A 21 Project Settings and Project Information ooccccccncnnnnnncnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 21 A A aunaecoaueasaten 22 Device Device Tee ini E E 22 Summary A A E 23 mstallimerof Devices on the Local Sta iie 24 Arranging and Configuring Objects in the Devices Tree Rules coocoooonnooooooonccccnncnnnnnnnnononononononons 24 ADDICION or
107. AAA A nT In Pe Tenet mw enter ine See ea eer ene wee 234 Bos LO MPP ccs O O II onc gaeseusess 235 BST OE Material iaa AAA 236 Summary Configuration and Consumption a A A IA 237 Programmimnmo Lanpuape Edi a 238 Declaration Edo SS A ia 238 Texti a bl Dorel i cli e jam Ed ds 238 Tabular Declaration Edito ad thas iad dd sacos 239 Declaration EGwor it Online Mode siii cused ya anctarielaciedsradiieaGabesasd hans T senate 241 Dec Edi er re NE EO eee ROE re error ias 242 COMMIT AMON S CUMING S e 242 PUES nn nace nate needa dias cad 248 LOS oeenn E icad 249 DUTE OE E ia 250 FEDE DAL Editor rO AE EEEO Ria 251 Global Variables List LANO aii 251 LiDrary Manager Editor isisisi AA AAA 251 Library Manase r Editor WI O Wii 252 ibr eS Mei e e S 254 Task Edil obena EOE ONNEEN N A 255 TASK CONMSUFA ION esen a Aaa tato risa sc 255 MAS IO U a ri ca eee sa miaete 255 Task Editor m Onine Mode 259 Task Contisuration Commands a a a a iS 261 Trace Edition 261 A o O IS 261 SMOLICUUS OPA TICS SN A O 264 Ii A O On PI A ela At 265 Add Y ADE aana tn a al 268 COME Sutra ico 269 A o a a ela da 275 Trace Editor tiv Online Modest a N 276 Watch LISCE da di 277 Water View Watch list Editada dada 211 CEN atico Soon 278 Waten last One Mode dd te au 278 MODBUS Edita cian 279 MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation PQ oooooonnnnnnnnccnnonononnnonononononnnnnnnnncnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnos 280 MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping ccccccccnnnnnnnnoni
108. AT declaration Example variable b of type INT and address IB0 gt declaration b AT IBO INT Comment If applicable enter a comment The comment text can be formatted with line breaks by using the key combination lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt It will appear in the declaration part of the object in the line above variable declaration Flags CONSTANT RETAIN PERSISTENT Activate the desired option to define whether you are dealing with a constant or a remanent variable The respective attribute will be added to the keyword VAR for example VAR CONSTANT initiating the declaration part for the variable The PERSISTENT option only will be available if a Persistent Variables list exists Autodeclaration of Arrays If you want to use the wizard for the declaration of ARRAY variables use the arrow button behind the Type field and select command Array Wizard The Array dialog will open 109 7 Menu Commands Array Ranks and base type specification Dimension 1 0 Dimension 2 1 Base Type Result ARRAY O 3 1 2 OF BYTE ox canes Figure 7 19 ARRAY At least the fields marked with an exclamation mark 9 must be filled Define the dimensions by entering the lower and upper limits and the base type of the variable whereby the arrow button can be used to get to the input assistant In the lower part of the dialog Result a preview of the currently configured array declaration will b
109. Address of initial address Q Diagnostic Area 290 8 Editors Adding a Device We MODBUS_Device_01 Settings Device Settings Instance Name Destination IP 0 0 0 TCP Post a2 Mapping Disabling 4100 Used range Q A4100 0 2044103 7 Advanced OK Cancel Figure 8 61 Adding a Device on MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities stance Name merca name MODBUS Device Identifier as IEC 61131 3 ee 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to Destination IP Server IP address 255 255 955 954 TCP Port TCP port O to 65535 Initial address used to Any address of Q disable the MODBUS area limited Mapping Disabling relations configured in according to CPU the Device Mappings used field QxX X Table 8 23 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Configuration Advanced Configurations pa Advanced Settings Advanced Settings Maximum Simultaneous Request Communication Time out ms 3000 Connection Time out Connection is never closed in normal situations Connection is closed at the end of each communication Connection is closed after an inactive time of s 10 oK Cancel Figure 8 62 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Advanced Configurations Screen 291 8 Editors Configuration Description Default Possibilities Maximum Number Amount of requests 1 1to8 of Simultaneous handled in a same Request
110. After inserting a device the button for adding a MODBUS relation will be enabled Click on Add button and a screen will pop up where the user can choose the relation data type Regardless of the data chosen the following screen will open where the appropriate settings should be done W MODBUS_Device_Mapping_000 Holding Register Function Read Read Holding Registers FC 3 1 r Polling ms 100 Mapping Diagnostics Area 22060 Read Settings hd Read Data Stat Address Read Data Size X E Used range 1 1 Read IEC Variable 4096 Used range 1W44096 51W44096 de Used range QGB 22060 0B 22067 Configuration Polling ms Mapping Diagnostic Area Read Data Start Address Read Data Size Read IEC Variable Figure 8 50 MODBUS Relation Description Default Possibilities Read MODBUS function Write type Read Write Mask Write Communication 100 O to 3600000 Period ms Initial address for the Any address of Q MODBUS relation limited according to diagnostics the used CPU Initial address for the 0 to 65535 MODBUS reading data Data number for the Depends on the function used MODBUS reading Initial address for the 1 Any address of Q reading variables limited according to Yl the used CPU 282 8 Editors Written Data Start o the Ooo 22 Address 9 data i Data number for the Depends on the Initial address for the 1 Any address of Q
111. Alternatives Groups and Others e Search Specify here in which objects should be searched for the given string For this purpose either choose one of the options offered in the selection list via the button sl or open the Search dialog via button J 101 7 Menu Commands Search Use this dialog to configure in which objects the find replace operation should take place Entre project Within the following objects Pl get accessor Al set accessor Action All open editors Active editor Selection only Figure 7 12 Search Dialog e Entire project All editable places within all project objects will be noticed e Within the following objects Only the editable places within those objects will be noticed which are defined by the following settings o Object types Put a check to all object types which should be searched for o Name filter Optionally set a filter on certain objects names by using placeholders Example Enter PROFIBUS to explicitly search for the specified search string in all objects including PROFIBUS in the object name o Scheme Optionally save the currently defined search configuration Make sure to have set the desired Object types and optionally a Name filter Then press button Save as and in dialog Save Scheme define a name for the current configuration All saved schemes will be available later in the selection list via button They can be removed from
112. Basic element of a system with very specific functionality It s normally connected to the system by connectors and may be easily replaced Any station of a network with communication skills using an established protocol Elements on which the instructions work Can represent constants variables or a set of variables Packet Internet Network Grouper is a command used by the ICMP protocol used to test connectivity between devices and was created for use in networks with protocol stack TCP IP Process Data Object is a message of CAN protocol that contains the operational data Acronym for programmable controller See Programmable Controller Program Organization Unit is a subdivision of the application program that can be written in any of the available languages Also known as PLC Equipment controlling a system under the command of an application program It is composed of a CPU a power supply and I O modules 328 Programming Language Protocol RAM Remote Bus Reset RUN Scan Cycle Serial Channel Set Slave Software STOP Sub network Timeout Tooltip Tree Upload Visualization Watchdog XML Zoom 11 Glossary A set of rules and conventions used for the elaboration of a program Procedural rules and conventional formats which upon control signals allow the establishment of a data transmission and error recovery between equipment Random access memory Is the memory where all addresses can be accesse
113. CTS T_DIAG_MODBUS_ETH_MAPPING_1 Diagnostic 3 MODBUS_Device_1_REQDG_0002 NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG_MODBUS_ETH_MAPPING_1 Disables 10 MODBUS Device 1 REQDG 0003 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS ETH MAPPING 1 ReaDiagnostics 11 MODBUS Device 1 REQDG 0004 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T DIAG MODBUS ETH MAPPING 1 Library Manager 12 MODBUS Device 1 REQDG 0005 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCIS T DIAG MODBUS ETH MAPPING 1 E MainPra PRG 13 MODBUS Device 1 REQDG 0006 NXMODBUS DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG MODBUS ETH MAPPING 1 Task Configuration 14 END VAN 2 MainTask ES Configuration Bus S Nx3010 Nx3010 nx5001 NX5001 poso63 PO5063 PO1000_16DI_24 Vdc_Opto_Coupled PO 2 comi a MODBUS _Symbol_RTU_Master MODBUS Symb J MODBUS_Device MODBUS Device com 2 J MoDBUS_Symbol_RTU_Slave MODBUS Symbo NET 1 J moDBUS_Symbol_Client MODBUS Symbol Cie J moDBUS_Device_1 MODBUS Device J MODBUS_Client MODBUS Client J MODBUS_Server MODBUS Server a MODBUS _Symbol_Server MODBUS Symbol Se 2 Devices P Pous m m gt E Messages Current user nobody Figure 10 5 ReqDiagnostics Object 327 INS Lni4 Col8 Ch8 11 Active CPU Algorithm Application Program Backup Bit Breakpoint Byte CPU Bus Communication network Context Menu Cycled Default Diagnostics Download Frame Gateway Hardware Hyperlink IEC 61131 Inte
114. Dk aee e E S A E S A E E E thet 221 AE n en a aa a tick conn demeseaths 221 NOEP DE roe e o ne el ed e whee Gal a tee uae 221 AS A ATE EA N 221 AVLO A E A A A E RRA 227 A a O A S 221 Heel VICI iS A A a 228 A E A NT 228 SP O ec ct a cet te NE RI tae ace ish tht ce cht tees cic Dede SO 228 A PO 228 Contact potasa ici 229 Update SOI Wale LC a ela de 229 ns A eee teres ene nent 229 ARUS H OME A A A E 229 ADON one tas eee Nera el eae o dat le o cel de 229 AAA e nn ese adevedeudessessSsseseteeuce eestadstadassesee 229 EI A o O ee RRP eee ee Pe een een 230 LOOM iee EEE le enh te eased edt clea a sha actin E eld neta whee E teats 230 A E EEEE N EE AI E ELTE EA E E AI AN EE E E A A AE EN EEE E S 230 PO E Gace Nance SUS eee Pace tas a Meee aes 230 o A E TOE ACR CRT RE en er I 230 Declaration a an ia 230 Tabular Declaration Editor Declara ici 230 Edt Declaration Herdi a a o bed aes eee 230 A O A EEEE A TEEN AA EE EEA EAR TEE T T 230 Move DON Moaea E a tee 230 Move U aa Sa a alias 230 A B Ea T E TEE EIERN EEA EEE AROE EES EE EE ASO EE EE A E AEO P E E 231 EDITORS oonan aa a sees coud iia 232 General Regards on Editors ccccccsssescssossssccccosescosssesevsesssesoossssascccvevesscssccusesesssosesssscoscossocssscceseesscssoossesscoosees 232 A Tr neers tee tee ese eee rr er Ere E Ee eer ene errr 232 A E E AEA E EA E EA EA E AIEE TAE 233 Remove DEVi C aie ssc eats naran elite ode 233 Distal VO Module Editor iu 233 POC SS DAA a e e o a bea 233 is
115. Edit Declaration Header Insert Move Down Move Up Edit Declaration Header This command opens the editor for the declaration header For detailed information please see the description of the Tabular Declaration Editor Insert This command adds a new line for a variable declaration For detailed information please see the description of the Tabular Declaration Editor Move Down This command moves the currently selected declaration line one down For detailed information please see the description of the Tabular Declaration Editor Move Up This command moves the currently selected declaration line one up For detailed information please see the description of the Tabular Declaration Editor 230 Trace 7 Menu Commands Provides commands for working with the Trace editor These commands are available in the Trace menu when the editor is active Download Trace Start Stop Trace Reset Trigger Cursor Mouse scrolling Mouse zooming Reset View Compress Stretch Multi Channel Load Trace Save Trace For further information see Trace Editor 231 8 Editors 8 Editors General Regards on Editors This chapter discusses the different types of editors available for configuration objects devices network settings and other types of configurations Each type of editor has its peculiarities However some features are general and apply to all editors Whenever there are numeric fields being set in editors thes
116. English will be used Specific culture If this option is activated the language currently selected from the list will be used CFC Editor This sub dialog of the Options dialog provides settings concerning the editing in a CFC Continuous Function Chart editor The settings will immediately be applied to the currently opened editor views as soon as they have been confirmed and the dialog closed with OK Enable AutoConnect If this option is activated the following is true When you drop CFC elements somewhere on the canvas unconnected pins that are touching each other will be connected automatically This might be useful for quick editing however take care not to create connections accidentally when moving elements around a crestas 9 Declaration editor EF FED LD and IL editor A Fah When you drop elements somewhere on the canvas unconnected pins that are touching oo each other are automatically connected if this feature is activated This can be helpful for ad International Settings quick editing but be careful that you are not making connections accidentally by moving Gat Load and Save elements around E sFC E SFC editor En SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Text editor Figure 7 120 Enable AutoConnect Declaration Editor This sub dialog of the Options dialog contains some default settings on the appearance of the declaration editor 209 i CFC Editor 2 Declaration editor
117. G Sensitivity s E CyclicPrg00 PRG lz FreePrg PRG Z MainPrg PRG POUs E TimelInterruptPrg00 PRG Add POU POU Comment Task Configuration 2 gt Remove POU MainPrg amp CyclicTask00 2 cydicTask01 Open POU E ExternInterruptTask00 Change POU E ExternInterruptTask01 Move Up SE FreeTask amp MainTask Move Down TimelnterruptTask00 E TimeInterruptTask01 y Configuration Bus Nx3010 NX3010 Y comi a com2 Y NETI Current user nobody Figure 8 25 Task Editor Dialog for Configuration of a Task The task configuration and a particular task can be configured in the following dialogs of the Task Editor which will be opened in a tabbed window on a double click on the respective entry in the devices tree e Properties Dialog for information on basic task configuration settings e Configuration Dialog for doing the configuration of a particular task optionally extended by a Parameter dialog for specific task parameters e Events System events dialog for linking POU calls to system events It depends on the currently used device target which options are available in the configuration dialogs Properties Dialog When the top entry in the task configuration tree is selected the Properties dialog will be opened in the task editor window Figure 8 26 shows the Properties window of a CPU NX3010 256 8 Editors Start Page Configuration Bus PE Task Configuration
118. L Counter reached 0 a Trioge WORD Current Counter Value Figure 8 23 Commented Library Modules Specific Items of the Editor Window The following commands which are provided in the window when one or several libraries are selected correspond to those of the Libraries menu which by default is available in the menu bar as long as the Library Manager editor is active e Add library for including a library into the current project Precondition the library must be installed on the system e Properties for settings on the namespace and with notice that the library will later be available as a referenced library in another project for settings on version handling visibility and accessing e Remove library the library currently selected in the libraries list will be removed from the project e Library Repository for defining library locations and for installing or uninstalling libraries The user will be notified if trying to insert a library which is already available in the project Libraries Menu When the Library Manager is active the menu bar by default provides the Libraries menu containing the commands for the library manager dialog 254 8 Editors Task Editor Task Configuration The Task Configuration defines one or several tasks for controlling the processing of an application program Thus it is an essential resource object for an application and must be available in the Devices window It is a
119. LC Logic Application Online mode Device Application Device Application Function block instance MainPrg fbinst MainPrg fbinst2 Implementation Offline mode Figure 5 3 Select Online State Dialog In the Device Application field see the Device and Application to which the respective object is associated To open the online view of the object activate option Online mode and press OK To see the offline view activate option Offline mode If the object is a function block in the Function block instance field there will be a list of all instances used in the current application In this case the user can e Select one of the instances and enable online or offline modes or e Select the Implementation option which regardless of the selected instance open the basic view of the implementation of the function block The implementation has no effect for objects not instantiated For further information on the online views of the particular editors refer to the respective editor descriptions The status bar will provide information on the current status of the application 71 5 User Interface Standard Menus and Commands See in the following an overview on structure of the main menus and commands The special commands for a certain editor usually are available in a corresponding menu which will be available when the editor is opened example when you edit an object in the SFC editor the SFC menu is added to the
120. Logic Application Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption 4 Diagnostic Explorer Diagnostic il Library Manager B MainPrg PRG HB Task Configuration 2 Configuration 2 MainTask Configuration Bus J 3010 NX3010 Y comi Y com2 Y NETI A18 1Q1 yonpod O 0 Total allocated memory size for code and data 860484 bytes Memory area 0 contains Data highest used address 3145728 largest contiguous memory gap 28 Memory area 1 contains Retain Data highest used address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap Memory area 2 contains Persistent Data highest used address 16428 largest contiguous memory Memory area 3 contains Input highestused address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap 0 0 Memory area 4 contains Output highest used address 32768 largest contiguous memory gap 0 Memory area 5 contains Memory highest used address 16384 largest contiguous memory gap 0 Memory area 6 contains Code highest used address 4194304 largest contiguous memory gap 35 Build complete 0 errors 1 warnings ready for download Current user nobody Figure 4 26 Building Messages In case the errors and messages are not visible on the screen the option Messages from the menu View must be selected as shown on Figure 4 27 51 4 Quick Start Element properties Product Library ToolBox Watch Breakpoints Call Stack
121. MODBUS data type 297 8 Editors Input Register 16 bits Data Start Address MODBUS data initial 1 to 65536 address 1 to 65536 Holding Register and Input MODBUS data Register quantity i 8 to 65536 Coil and Input Status IEC Variable Variables initial Any address area address Q Q limited according to the CPU used Table 8 32 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Relation Configuration Data Size Filters w Filters Filters Write Filter IF Write Filter Mask Read Filter IP Read Fitter Mask Figure 8 70 Filters Configuration Description Default Possibilites Write Filter IP Specifies a IP interval 0 0 0 1 to with writing access to 255 255 255 254 the declared variables in the MODBUS relation Specifies a subnet 0 0 0 0 0 1 to mask and the 255 255 255 254 parameter Write Filter IP Read Filter IP Specifies a IP interval 0 0 0 0 0 1 to with reading access 255 255 255 254 to the declared Write Filter Mask variables in the MODBUS relation Read Filter Mask Specifies a subnet 0 0 0 0 0 1 to mask and the 255 255 255 254 parameter Read Filter IP 8 Editors MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping By adding a MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping device its configuration screen 1s showed General Parameters The general parameters found on the initial configuration screen of the MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping protocol Fig
122. MV should increase in response to an increase in PV when in Reverse control it indicates that MV should decrease in response to an increase in PV Just below the SP field allows the user to view the current reference value of PID controller as well as its fit when the controller is operating in automatic mode In the PV field 1s possible to show the value of the process variable of PID controller This field does not allow editing In the MV field you can show the value of the variable manipulated by PID controller This field does not allow editing 309 8 Editors When the PID controller is in automatic mode the ManualMV field does not allow editing However when the controller is in manual mode the value of the variable MV can be adjusted through this field The GP TI and TD fields allow editing of parameters proportional gain integrative time and derivative time of the PID controller In the DeadBand MaxVarMV and Bias fields are set respectively the dead band maximum variation allowed for the MV variable and the offset added to MV The Write button is responsible for sending to the PLC all parameters that have been modified realizing the change of PID controller parameters For further details about the write operation see Write Parameters Operation Manual and Automatic buttons change the mode of operation of the controller The Autoconfigure button opens the auto tuning procedure window For further details about t
123. MasterTool IEC XE oo File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help ERAS dela O So 2 Devices I x StartPage Configuration Bus 4 Diagnostic Explorer XQ D IL U v 5 ce E bz S F a Bill of Materials r FE aes System Overview B Configuration and Consumption e Diagnostic Explorer Updated on 25th July 2012 13 35 28 To refresh this page click on the icon Rack View v wo Diagnostic Vil Library Manager E MainPrg PRG 28 Task Configuration 2 MainTask gt J Configuration Bus J NX3010 NX3010 A J Nx5001 Nx5001 A posos3 PO5063 A J P01000_16D1_24_vdc_Opte comi J MODBUS_RTU_Master MODBU COM 2 iJ MODBUS_RTU_Slave MODBUS NET 1 iJ MODBUS_Client MODBUS Client J MODBUS_Server MODBUS Serv Diagnostics Status Diagnostic list gt gt Rack 0 O 0 OOK oro NX8000 El Messages RUN Program loaded Program unchanged Current user nobody Figure 10 1 Diagnostics Explorer e Click the right mouse button on the module and select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Explorer will be opened and will take you to the status page of the respective module Diagnostics The Diagnostics object located in the devices tree is the where the Diagnostics Global Variables of all currently used devices are shown Each used device has diagnostics variables and they are exhibited as shown in the following screen 324 10 Diagnostics Edit View P
124. POU SFCQuitError SFCPause SFCTrans SFCCurrentStep SFCTip CE CTA Mn ra All steps and actions are reset The init s Gets TRUE if a time check failed Enable time check on steps Contains the name of the step that caus Contains the name of the POU that cause E Text editor Execution is stopped SFCErroris reset Executionis stopped SFCError is reset Gets TRUE if a transition switches throi Contains the name of the active step Switches the next transition on arising e E N E N e N E N e K 81 81 8 81 8 8 El El Es TE TOE trancitinne ran anh ha emmwitrha F Figure 7 141 SFC Options Dialog Flags All possible flags that 1s implicitly created variables for watching and controlling the processing of a SFC are listed in this dialog A short description is added but you might see Implicit Variables SFC Flags for further details IEC 61131 Programming Manual By a mouse click in the corresponding checkbox you can activate the automatic declaration Declare and use Use of a flag These settings will be applied as defaults to new SFC objects If Declare is activated but Use is deactivated for a flag the declaration will be done but the flag will be without any effect during processing Notice that an automatically declared flag variable will only be visible in online mode in the declaration part of the SFC Editor A timeout has been detected in step s1 in SFC object PO
125. POU which is represented by the box has been changed this command can be used to restore and update the display of the pins It can also be used to display the parameters of type VAR_IN_OUT of a function block which are hidden per default 174 7 Menu Commands In the following example input fbin2 of a function block instance had been deleted because it is not used By selecting the fb1 box and using command restore pins all inputs and outputs of the function block as defined in its implementation can be displayed again 1 FUNCTION BLOCK fbl thinst E VAR THPUT fb 3 fbinl INT fbin haut 4 fbinz IHT fbin 5 EHD VAR 4 IR Entry fbin2 removed and restored by Reset Pins 7 fhoutl INT binst E EHD VAR ibi El E 10 Ffhirar THT Figure 7 91 Reset Pins Remove Unused Pins Symbol This command removes non connected pins from program function block or non local action calls in the current editor selection This will not be done for function method or operator calls as this would lead to invalid syntax SFC Commands Init Step The commands category SFC are available for programming in the SFC editor Init step Insert step transition Insert step transition after Parallel Alternative Insert branch Insert branch right Insert action association Insert action association after Insert jump Insert jump after Insert macro Insert macro after Zoom into macro Zoom out of macro This
126. Page Homepage is URL of the page which will be displayed on command Altus Home Page Help menu The Advanced Settings button for opening the same named dialog e Project Compression See the dialog for further information on the three possible compression levels Per default the least compression is set e Load behavior If this option is activated default and recommended the loading of libraries and compile information will be done in the background while you already can start working on the project International Settings This sub dialog of the Options dialog allows the following settings concerning the language used in the user interface and help system User Interface Language Same as Microsoft Windows If this option 1s activated the language used in the user interface will be that which is currently set by Microsoft Windows on your computer 208 7 Menu Commands Specific culture If this option 1s activated the language currently selected from the list will be used NOTE Changing the user interface language will not be effective until MasterTool IEC XE is restarted Some components may not be available in the selected language and will appear in their default culture which typically is English Online Help Language Same as user interface language This option is set by default The online help will be displayed in the language which is set for the user interface If no help is available in this language
127. Possible values 2 100 211 7 Menu Commands e Property width Property display width in grid units Possible values 2 100 View gi CFC Editor Declaration editor A FBD LD and IL editor Features ad International Settings Gar Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Text editor Property visibility Property Value With name th Step E Common Comment Symbol Specific Times Minimal active Maximal active Actions Online Show step time Figure 7 124 SFC Editor Options Dialog Category View Property Visibility Here you can define which of the element Properties step attributes should be displayed next to an element in the SFC editor view The Common and the Specific properties for each element type are shown in the table and you can each activate the checkbox in the Value field in order to get displayed the property value right to the element in each SFC object If you additionally activate the checkbox in the With Name field the value will be preceded by the name of the property 212 Properties of the elements Properties Property Common Name Comment Symbol Specific Initial step Times Minimal active Maximal active Actions Step active Step entry Step exit Online If option Show step time is activated in online mode the current step time will be displayed right to q Y Filter F Sortby sortorder
128. Project Upload Option After the desired CPU has to be selected and the OK button clicked as shown on Figure 4 38 To ensure that the project of the CPU is completely equal and can be loaded without problems from other stations see chapter Projects Download Login Method without Project Differences Select Device mE Select the network path to the controller F Nx3010_MasterTool 03 NX3010_MasterTool i Add device Target Type 16 1000 Figure 4 38 Select the CPU ATTENTION The memory size area to store a project in the Nexto CPUs is defined on each CPU model documentation 59 4 Quick Start ATTENTION The upload recovers the last project stored in the controller as described in the previous paragraphs In case only the download for execution of a specific applicative occurs it will not be possible to be recovered through Upload Create and Run Projects See in the following a description of how to create a simple project containing a PLC program further how to load this program via a Gateway Server to the PLC target device and to get it run and monitored The PLC runtime system used for this example project by default 1s provided with the MasterTool IEC XE setup The sample program will be written in Structured Text language ST and consist of a program MainPrg and a function block FB1 MainPrg will contain a counter variable ivar and call function block FB1 FB1 will get input
129. R_ GLOBAL Project GVL Device PLC Lo Line 1 3 END_VAR Project GVL Device PLC Lo Line 2 MainPra Project MainTask Device P PROGRAM MainPrg Project MainPrg Device PL Line 1 Decl PROGRAM MainPrg Project MainPra Device PL Line 1 Decl VAR Project MainPra Device PL Line 2 Decl O ivar INT Project MainPra Device PL Line 3 Decl END_VAR Project MainPra Device PL Line 8 Decl ivar ivar 1 counter Project MainPrg Device PL Line 1 Column 1 I _ e Replace Figure 7 14 Search Results for String a If you would like to replace the found string by another one press button Replace to get to the Replace dialog Symbol BN Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt H gt This command opens the Replace dialog which is an extended Find dialog Like in the Find dialog first set the options for searching for the string which should be replaced by another one Additionally enter the new string in the field at Replace and then use one of the following replace buttons Replace Press this button to perform a replacing of the first string which was found In this case you can step to the next found string by button Find Next Replace All Press this button 1f you want to replace all found strings at once 103 Find Next 7 Menu Commands Replace Replace with b Find All Match case IP Search up Replace Match whole word Use regular e
130. S call 55 51 3589 9500 To find the existent centers of Altus Technical Support in other locations see our website www altus com br or send an email to altusO altus com br If the equipment is already installed please have the following information when requesting assistance e Models of equipment used and the configuration of installed system e Serial number of CPU e Equipment review and executive software version listed on the label affixed to the product side O Information about the operation of CPU obtained through MasterTool IEC XE programmer and graphical display from CPU e Contents of the application program obtained through MasterTool IEC XE programmer 10 2 Technical Description e Version of the programmer used Warning Messages Used in this Manual In this manual warning messages will present the following formats and meanings DANGER Relates potential causes which if not noted generate damages to physical integrity and health property environment and production loss CAUTION Relates configuration details application and installation that shall be followed to avoid condition that could lead to system fail and its related consequences ATTENTION Indicate important details to configuration application or installation to obtain the maximum operation performance from the system x lt _ 2 Technical Description 2 Technical Description MasterTool IEC XE Ver
131. S data type yp yp Input Status 1 bit Input Register 16 Any address area Q limited according to the CPU MODBUS data initial Data Start Address address Any address area VQ limited according to the CPU quantity Variables initial IEC Variable address Q Table 8 18 MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation Relation Configuration MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping By adding a MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Mapping its configuration screen is showed General Parameters The configuration of the slave devices seen on the initial screen of the MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping protocol are described on Figure 8 57 F a General Parameters settings Slave Address 1 Advanced Figure 8 57 MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping Configuration Screen 287 8 Editors Configuration Possibilities Slave Address MODBUS Slave address 1 to 255 Table 8 19 MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping Configurations The MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping communication times found in the Advanced button on the configuration initial screen are divided in Cycle Task Send Delay and Minimum Interframe as showed on Figure 8 58 and Table 8 20 MODBUS Advanced Settings Settings Task Cycle ms po Send Delay ms 0 Minimum Interframe chars 3 5 OK Cancel Figure 8 58 MODUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping Advanced Configurations Screen Configuration Time for t
132. Show next Statement Write values Ctrl F7 Force values F7 Unforce values Add All Forces To Watchlist Display Mode AIt F7 Figure 4 32 Starting the Application Figure 4 33 shows the application in execution In case the POU tab is selected the created variables are listed on a monitoring window in which the values can be forced and visualized by the user In 54 4 Quick Start case the variables are forced through the lt F7 gt command on the keyboard the CPU will indicate this condition on the graphic display File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help EAS a a l StartPage i Configuration Bus 3 MainPrg Device Application MainPrg Expression iVar_1 Bill of Materials iVar_2 B Configuration and Consumption Var_3 La Diagnostic Explorer iVar_4 d Diagnostic i Library Manager E MainPrg PRG Task Configuration E Configuration 2 MainTask Configuration Bus S GJ NX3010 Nx3010 ivar 134 comi 2 iVar 241 iVar 241 1 G com2 G NET1 a FOR iVar 3 10001 0 TO 10000 BY 1 DO iVar 4 6128 iVar 4 6128 iVar_1 44 END_FOR RETURN iVar_1 34 iVar 2 41 2 Prepared value Comment yonpolg O Ki m ver a m ange L g enga Iu a El Messages Figure 4 33 Program Being Executed In case the CPU 1s initialized with an application already internally stored
133. T A aux INT fbinst2 FB1 erg bwar om Mm 4 Ca Ri PH op Ro Ww 0 INT 05 result BOOL ivar 858 ivar 8988 1 counter fbinst inf 10 10 outl 5 Ferg 16 fcall the function block of FB1 type fo with the input parameter in Z f output is write in erg fbinst2 in 20 20 out m5 Ferg 105 call the function block of FB1 type fo with the input parameter in Z f output is write in erg erg 105 fbinst2 out 15 aege E ena le Mm Figure 8 12 Declaration Editor in the Upper Part of a program object MainPrg Online View Device Editor The Device Editor provides dialogs for the configuration of a device which is managed in the Devices view window The editor can be opened via command Edit Object or by a double click on the device object entry in the Devices window The dialog can provide tabs containing the following sub dialogs e Communication Settings Configuration of the connection between programming system and a programmable device PLC e Files Configuration of a file transfer between host and PLC e Log Display of the PLC log file e Users and Groups User management concerning device access during runtime not to be mixed up with the project user management e Access Rights Configuration of the access rights on runtime objects and files for the particular user groups e Information General information on the device na
134. U by flag SFCError 223 Build MyPlc Application POU 7 Menu Commands Expression t2111 t222 SFCError ds SPCErrorPOu ds SFCErrorstep SFCOUItErrOr Type BOL BOL BOL STRING STRING BOL Value Prepared value T 2hs7u54s995ms This is step sl Symbol Write Minimal active t 23 Maximal active t 4s Figure 7 142 Example of Some SFC Error Flags in Online Mode of the Editor CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor A FBD LD and IL editor Features ad International Settings Load and Save SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Text editor Code generation Calculate active transitions only Figure 7 143 SFC Options Dialog Build e Calculate active transitions only If this option is activated by default code will be generated only for the currently active transitions 224 7 Menu Commands SmartCoding This sub dialog of the Options dialog allows some settings for making coding more pleasant This concerns the Smart Coding functions like for example AutoDeclaration or Input Assistant gi CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor AF FBD LD and IL editor Features all International Settings Ga Load and Save 4 List components after typing a dot Y Dedare unknown variables automatically AutoDedare E src List components immediately when typing 2 SFC editor E SmartCoding SS Syntax Highlighting J Convert keywords to u
135. U_SLAVE 1 NET1 DG_MODBUS Client diagnostics variable Bi MODBUS Client MODBUS Client J MODBUS_Server MODBUS Server Ayer yonpolg 72 aege 7 enga hye rPRPRPRR A wW N FO DO uA Nob wo Pb ph uo H 07 a N P H O w 0 DG_MODBUS Client AT QB22233 T_DIAG MODBUS ETH CLIENT_1 DG_MODBUS Server diagnostics variable DG_MODBUS Server AT QB22253 T_DIAG MODBUS ETH SERVER_1 END VAR MM A HM MH MH Mm RP 2 io 00 J on wow e W N El Messages Current user nobody Lni Coli Chi Figure 10 2 Diagnostics Variables When a device is removed its diagnostics variables are also automatically removed Two other objects are created in the devices tree for Symbolic Mapping communication drivers They are named Disables and RegDiagnostics In addition to that the diagnostic variables of these drivers are declared on the Diagnostics object and do not use the AT directive in its declaration because there is no relation between a symbolic variable and a direct representation variable for these devices This behavior can be observed on Figure 10 3 325 10 Diagnostics f Untitled164 project MasterTool IEC XE lt e File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help asas RDA db UGK TIS Devices a x i Start Page Configuration Bus Diagnostics Disables g ReqDiagnostics xQ 5 Untitled
136. Window Menu The frame provides commands for command category Window that can be used to handle the user interface windows Available commands e Next Editor e Previous Editor e Close Editor 225 7 Menu Commands Close All Editors Reset Window Layout New Horizontal Tab Group New Vertical Tab Group Float Dock Auto Hide Next Pane Previous Pane Window lt n gt Windows Next Editor Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F6 gt If several editor windows are currently opened this command can be used to change the focus from the current window to the nest one This is the window represented with the tab to the right of the currently active window Previous Editor Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt F6 gt If several editor windows are currently opened this command can be used to change the focus from the current window to the previous one This is the window represented with the tab to the left of the currently active window Close Editor Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F4 gt This command closes the currently active editor window not applicable to the Configuration Bus Close All Editors Symbol ma This command closes all currently opened editor windows not applicable to the Configuration Bus Reset Window Layout This command serves to reset all currently open views to their default docking positions A confirmation prompt will be displayed before the reset gets executed New H
137. ack the archive to the specified path e Extract If a file that ought s to be extracted is named in the same way as a file already existing in the target directory a warning message will be displayed and you will be asked whether you want to replace the local file or not You can make your decision become valid for every further name mismatch by activating the option Apply to all items and files e Cancel to abort the operation the archive will not get extracted Project Archive Save Send Archive This command is used to set up and create a project archive file and all files which are referenced by and used within the currently opened project are packed The archive file lt filename gt projectarchive can either be stored or sent as attachment of an email The latter is useful to give forward the set of all project relevant files as the archive can be unpacked easily by use of the command Extract Archive 94 7 Menu Commands Project Archive Indude the following information into the archive Boot projects Download informationfiles Library profile Options Referenced devices Referenced libraries APA Figure 7 8 Project Archive Dialog In this dialog box you can define which file categories should be added to the archive file Select or deselect a category by activating deactivating the corresponding checkbox Do this by a single mouse click in the checkbox or by a double click on the category name If a categor
138. active application to their initialization values The situation is that which occurs at the start of a program which has been downloaded just before to the PLC cold start A reset disables the breakpoints currently set in the application If the command Reset cold is called during the program run is hold on a breakpoint the user will be asked whether the cycle should be finished before performing the reset or if the reset shall terminate the task and perform the reset immediately Be aware that not all runtime systems are able to perform a reset without finishing the cycle before Reset Origin This command is available in online mode It resets all variables of the currently active application including the remanent ones to their initialization values and erases the application on the PLC A reset disables the breakpoints currently set in the application If the command Reset origin 1s called during the program run is hold on a breakpoint the user will be asked whether the cycle should be finished before performing the reset or if the reset shall terminate the task and perform the reset immediately Be aware that not all runtime systems are able to perform a reset without finishing the cycle before Simulation This command is available to switch on and off the simulation mode of the programming system In simulation mode the application can be run and debugged on a simulation target which is always available within the programming sy
139. ady to use To execute click on the MasterTool IEC XE shortcut created during the installation in Start Menu The first time the software is initialized a screen requesting registry information will appear After filling the fields correctly click on Confirm to use the MasterTool IEC XE w Master Tool IEC XE Y y Enter the product license Figure 9 12 Registry Information Screen In case a version of MasterTool IEC XE is already set on your computer the installer will ask about the uninstallation of this version before the new one gets installed If the installed version is lower than version 1 40 the uninstallation process is different and after its completion it will be necessary to reinstall it 323 10 Diagnostics 10 Diagnostics Diagnostics Page The Diagnostics page or Diagnostics Explorer refers to the diagnosis the inclusion via WEB within MasterTool IEC XE so that the access is faster and more objective The access to the characteristic occurs in two ways e Access the Diagnostics Explorer option in the device tree located in the devices Tree The diagnostics web page will be automatically loads when you open the screen If not type the correct IP in the field indicated on the following picture Remember that in order to the diagnostics page to be shown the user must have a defined CPU as active path For further information see Communication Settings W DiagnosticsProject project
140. alog provides information on the modified application in the programming system confronted to the previous version on the controller NOTE Child application which have been downloaded to the PLC once and deleted within the device tree during a subsequent logout from the device will provoke no online change at a repeated login to the device At least there will be a request if you want to delete them also from the device E g for child applications Trace Build Process Before Login Before Login and if the currently concerned application project has not been compiled since having got opened or since the last modification it will get compiled This means the project will be built corresponding to a build run in offline mode and additionally compilation code for the PLC will be generated If errors are detected during compilation you will get a message box informing you about that with the following text There are compile errors Do you want to login without download You might choose to correct the detected errors first or to login nevertheless in this case to that version of the application which is possibly already available on the controller The errors are listed in the Message window in category Build 184 7 Menu Commands Information on the Download Process When the project gets loaded to the PLC completely at Login or partially at Online Change then the message window will show information on the generated
141. alog via Show comment After carrying out the desired enlistment choose one of the following items of the main dialog e Save to create and store the archive file to a desired path that you select via the opening standard dialog Therein you may also change the default name lt projectname gt projectarchive of the archive file Confirm with Save to start the building process e Send To create a temporary archive file that will be attached to a simultaneously generated empty email The successful operation of this feature relies on a correct installation of an e mail client If the operation has been unsuccessful an error message will be displayed e Cancel To cancel the action no archive file is generated Source Upload This command is available in the File menu for opening a project from a PLC For this purpose a project archive file must be available there possibly generated by the Source download function The command opens the Select Device dialog where you have to choose the network path to the PLC like in the Communication Settings dialog Select the appropriate entry in the tree of available devices and press OK The Project Archive dialog opens where you can configure which contents of the archive should be extracted for upload and to which path they should be copied The usage of this dialog corresponds to that of the Project Archive Extract archive function After confirmation with OK the files will be copied If a file i
142. alue Mode 0 FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE T 30 Feriod Measurement Enable Mask Input 02 FALSE 250 Start Address of Module Diagnostics Area 22040 Comment Set special features configuration mode Enable or disable Input Filter feature Set Input Filter Time Constant ms Enable or disable Pulse Catch feature Set Pulse Catch Elongation Time ms Enable or disable Period Measurement feature avai Define startingaddress of Module Diagnostics Area Figure 8 3 Module Parameters 8 Editors The information about each parameters is described in the current module Technical Characteristics Bus I O Mapping The Figure 8 4 shows the map of all the module inputs outputs 235 Process Data ae Variable IEC Objects Variable Mapping Mapping Channel Digital Inputs Byte 0 Input 00 Input 01 Input 02 Input 03 Input 04 Input 05 Input 06 Input 07 Digital Inputs Bytei 0 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 15 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 Input 1 Type Address B0 2 Dx0 0 261x0 1 26 1x0 2 2 DX0 3 26 1x0 4 26 1x0 5 26 0K0 6 26 1x0 7 26161 26Dx1 0 26 1x1 1 26 1x1 2 26 1X1 3 26 1X1 4 26 1X1 5 w 1Xx1 6 261Xx1 7 8 Editors Description Input state Input state 7 Always update variables NextoSlave NX1001 Create new variable Map to existing variable
143. ame o Find what enter the search string may be a single character and activate the desired options o Match whole name The search will provide all object names which exactly match the sequence of characters of the search string o Match case The search will provide all object names which match the search string exactly concerning the use of upper and lower letters o Match prefix The search will provide all object names starting with the search string o Match Substring The search will provide all object names containing the search string The found objects will be displayed with Name and Path in the Result window e Sort by type Sort by name The objects get sorted by type or name and alphabetically e Sort ascending Sort descending The above defined sorting is arranged in ascending or descending order Symbol A Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt 0 gt In the POUs view window all programming units of the current project PLC program are organized and can be instantiated for the use in an specific application Symbol Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt 1 gt In the Devices view window all devices needed for the project are configured and the applications are defined appropriately Messages Symbol Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt 2 gt 111 7 Menu Commands This command opens the Messages window Messages v l X puid 0 ocrora zwana 10 messge Description Project Object Position
144. ame is valid as for command Insert Contact Parallel Above except that the new contact will be inserted below the selected position 160 7 Menu Commands Insert Negated Contact Parallel below Symbol 417 This command is used to insert a negated parallel contact Alternatively a combination of the commands Insert Contact Parallel Below and Negation can be used to insert a negated parallel contact Insert Contact Parallel above Symbol 4 Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt P gt This command inserts a parallel contact above the currently marked position in the network parallel connection The command is not available in the FBD and IL editor but will be converted appropriately when switching views Notice that also multiple elements might be selected in order to get the new contact inserted parallel to those The contact is preset with the text You can click on this text and change it to the desired variable or the desired constant The nput Assistant can be used for this purpose 299 Contact Parallel position was bb selected contact bb inserted in LD 297 a Visualization of Contact bb Parallel in FBD Figure 7 74 View of Inserted Parallel Contact Paste Contacts Paste below This command is only available in LD editor It pastes the elements or the section of the network which has been put to the clipboard before by a Copy or Cut command below the currently selected contact element in the netwo
145. ameters from one version to another the behavior will be different If this 1s not the case choose Yes for all the updated devices as shown on Figure 7 52 In case a new parameter is added or existent paremeters are modified it 1s not possible to keep the same configurations Then it is necessary to choose No and add the module to the default parameters of the project MasterTool IEC XE Do you want to keep the parameters defined in the current project for P the device Mx3010 If you choose Yes all parameters are kept as the original project However If there Is a change in the format of these device parameters it won t be applied See chapter compatibility between versions of the documentation to see if was no change format in the parameters of the NASOL0 If you choose No the parameters format of device NX3010 will be updated as amended However the parameters will be changed to the configurator default values Figure 7 52 Device Update Message Modify Project Profile Modifies the project profile currently used in the project and apply the rules defined for the new profile design It includes the following fields Current profile displays the profile currently set in the project Select profile displays all the options available for modifying the project profile e Modify performs the modification and apply the profile of the project selected by the user to the project Export to CSV
146. an interruption task from the type Extern which the execution is triggered by some external event as control signal variation on a serial port or a digital input variation on the NEXTO bus This task priority is fixed in 02 two and it is responsible exclusively for the execution of the ExternInterruptPrge00 program The task called TimeInterruptTask00 is an interruption task from the Cyclic type with priority fixed in 01 one and it is responsible for the execution exclusively of the TimeInterruptPrg00 program 18 3 Concepts and Basic Components In the Normal project model there are five tasks already completely defined as shown on Table 3 3 The developer needs to implement the program contents choosing any language from the IEC 61131 3 standard The intervals and task trigger events can be configured by the developer and the unnecessary task can be eliminated p mp MainTask MainPrg 13 Cyolic to0ms CyclicTask00 CyclicPrg00 13 cyclic 200ms f CyclicTask01 CyclicPrgO1 13 Cyclic 500ms Exterinterruptrask00 ExterninterrupiPrgoo oz extemal to Evro TimeinterruptTask00 Timelnterrupttaskoo 01 cyslic 20ms Table 3 3 Tasks on Normal Profile Expert The Expert project profile includes the same basic tasks MainTask and CyclicTask lt nn gt and interruption tasks ExternInterruptT ask00 and TimelnterruptTask00 with the same priorities 13 02 and 01 respectively but it is an expansion comparing w
147. ant instead For the possibility of entering addresses of line breaks for variable names and of comments per coil please see the description of the FBD LD and IL Editor 158 7 Menu Commands Insert Set Coil Symbol gt This command is used to insert a set coil Alternatively the combination of the commands Insert Coil and Extras Set Reset can be used to insert a set coil Insert Reset Coil Symbol gt This command is used to insert a reset coil Alternatively a combination of the commands Insert Coil Extras and Set Reset can be used to insert a reset coil Insert Contact Symbol 45 Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt K gt This command inserts a contact in a LD network It is not available in the FBD and IL editor but will be converted appropriately when switching views 7 235 bh tt Ins ert Contact in LD 999 222 Visualization of Contact hk inserted in FBD Figure 7 72 Insert Contact The new contact will be inserted in line left to the currently selected contact or box If the cursor position is within an existing parallel connection the new contact element also will be inserted within NOTE Alternatively a contact element can be inserted by dragging from the toolbox or from another position within the editor If however it should not be inserted within but before behind or between existing parallel connections this only will be possible by using the menu command For this purpose first
148. ap o None The line can be filled endlessly o Soft Soft The lines will be broken at the boundary of the window o Hard The lines will be broken after the number of characters defined by Wrap margin A value of 0 means that the lines are wrapped at the window boundary Tab width Tab width in number of characters Indent width Indent width used in case of AutoIndenting that is the number of spaces at the beginning of a line O O O Autoindent with the following options None No automatic indenting Editing always starts at the left margin of the editor s text area Smart Code lines following a keyword for example VAR or IF are automatically indented according to the Indent width defined above Smart with code completion When you enter a keyword like for example VAR or IF automatically the associated code lines following below are indented according to the Indent width defined above and additionally the terminating keyword is added for example END_VAR or END_IF 215 7 Menu Commands e Keep Tabs If activated A space which has been entered using the tab key according to the defined Tab width see above will not be resolved to single character spaces afterwards So if the tab width gets changed later the existing tab spaces will be corrected correspondingly Text Area Color and font definitions for the editing area of the text editor E CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor i FBO LD and IL
149. aph to the left gt shift the graph to the right O back to the normal position of the chart e run chart autofit operation By clicking with the right mouse button on the trend chart appears a context menu as shown in the Figure 8 81 Save Open Zoom Return Mouse Shift Clear Time Figure 8 81 The Context Menu of the trend chart The Save option is enabled only when there is some information present in the trend chart This option allows them to be stored in the file CSV the data drawn by graphic pens The Open option allows data previously saved on file CSV via the option Save from being read and drawn again in the trend chart This option is disabled when the process monitoring starts initialized by the Start button The Zoom Return option enables zooming in the chart This option is enabled when there is information drawn on the graph The Mouse Shift option allows from the mouse to perform shifts in trend chart This option is enabled when there is information drawn on the graph The Clear option allows the graph to be cleared erasing all the information contained in it This option is enabled when there is information drawn on the graph The Time option allows you to switch the data type of the x axis between run cycle and time in seconds Chart Configuration Window The Chart Configuration window is accessed by pressing the Config Chart button from group Chart located in the Settings amp Char
150. arn when attempt to save E SFC E SFC editor Ef SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting B Text editor News page http www altus com br site_en Display 4 2 items in most recently used list Atstartup Show Start Page Homepage http www altus com br site_en Advanced settings Figure 7 118 Load and Save Options Dialog Create backup files If this option is activated at each saving the project will not only be saved in lt projectname gt project but also copied to a file lt projectname gt backup If needed you can rename this backup file and re open in MasterTool IEC XE Automatically save every minutes If this option is activated the project will be automatically saved in the defined time intervals to a file lt projectname gt autosave in the projects directory After a non regular termination of the programming system you might reload this autosave file If you regularly save or close the currently opened file the associated auto save file will be deleted in case of an irregular abortion it will be kept If you reopen a project for which an appropriate auto save file is found the Auto Save Backup dialog will appear where you can decide whether to reopen the auto save project or the last version which was saved by the user 207 7 Menu Commands Auto Save Backup The project which you attempt to open has not been closed correctly However there is an automatic backup Project Test project
151. art of the Trace window where the trace tree is visualized Up to the selection in the Trace tree different commands are enabled Notice that besides the zoom commands also a Scroll Mouse can be used to zoom the display of the coordinate system in the trace window Configuration of the Trace A Trace object can be added in the Devices view window by the Add Object command and by Edit Object Primarily the main editor window titled with lt name of trace object gt By shows an empty area in the left part where later the trace graph will be displayed and the trace tree as configured in the Configuration dialog in the right part BlankTrace db Xx Add variable BlankTrace Sr as Set GaGa a sts Se ts Ses tt tS sae St ets Set Se ee gee ce ee oe ee LS g ia Nie ie a sas ee ee he a e pcs Ha pisa Cael pa si ais ta pee s ei eae al oo pss oil pepa p bl lap ico ia ra as ai sia pia a aE a racial pai lidia acid ia eli Te 4 H F 4 H 4 4 F 4 4 F 4 4 4 H Figure 8 33 Trace Editor Window No Configuration A Trace defines one or several variables to be traced For this common settings can be defined concerning the start of the trace sampling trigger conditions buffer size responsible task etc Besides that the appearance display parameters for the coordinate system where the curve will be displayed of every trace variable has to be set To se
152. at uses statistical information in conjunction with polynomial approximation The statistical information 1s used to try to soften the presence of noise in the process The Automatic Stop option enables the automatic termination of the experiment required to obtain the approximate parameters of a first order model to be used by the method of synthesis To determine the end the algorithm monitors the signal PV waiting for its stability To wait for the stability the algorithm monitors the signal to each sampling If the shifting from one sample to another is less than 2 of the total variation the algorithm waits 800 samples within the range to consider the signal stable If it is perceived by graphical representation that the signal does not stabilize the experiment can be toggled to manual mode The fields GP TI and TD of the PID parameters tab express initially the current values configured for the controller parameters The fields Gs Tc and Tde of the Process tab express values of the static gain of the process the time constant of the process and the deadtime of the process respectively Before you start the experiment of identification of process parameters and tuning of the parameters of the controller it is important that the process is in steady state Guaranteed this situation the experiment can be started by pressing the Start button 315 8 Editors Having been the experiment started the trend chart begins to monitor the pro
153. ata MT8500 Managed Libraries Installed libraries Company All companies A z _ Categories mE Common a Name of Companies NextoStandard 144 Standard amp 4 System Name of library title A Standard System 58 3 0 1 0 n Version 3 3 0 10 A 3 4 4 0 3 Util it ES rnntend 4 Group by category Library Profiles Figure 7 111 Library Repository The dialog shows the currently installed libraries as well as their locations repositories Repositories can be added modified or deleted in this dialogue and libraries can be installed or uninstalled As the company and the location directory on the local system where the library files are stored currently selected all the libraries installed will be displayed in a list This list shows the names title the version number and the name of the company as provided by the project information library The option Group by category shows the listing sorted by categories of libraries where the names are displayed in the form of folders that can be opened or closed to show or hide the libraries respectively If this option 1s not enabled the libraries are listed alphabetically According to the available buttons see the descriptions of e Library Repository Edit locations e Installation and uninstallation of libraries Install and Uninstall e Further information about libraries Details and Dependencies 199 7 Menu Comma
154. ate maximum warning e Warning maximum color See above Activate maximum warning 268 8 Editors Configuration e Record Settings e Variable Settings The Trace Configuration dialog opens on command Configuration which is available in the context menu of the trace tree on the right part of the main Trace Editor window By double click on the trace name or the variable names the dialog opens too Here you configure which variables should be traced and which parameters should be set for the tracing and the defined variables The Trace Configuration is composed of one trace record configuration Record Settings and of the dedicated variable settings The configured trace variables are visualized in the trace tree in the left part of the trace configuration dialog and is the same than the one in the main trace editor window s Trace Co nfiguration MinMax Color MainPrg 51 OUT MainPrg S2 QUT MainPrg 53 COUNTER MainPrg 54 COUNTER MainFrg 53 OUT MainPrg 54 OUT MainPrg 53 0UT MainPrg 54 CUT MainPrg 55 CUT MainPrg B CUT MainPrg 57 OUT MainPrg 58 OUT MainPrg 59 OUT MainPrg 510 QUT MainPrg C 11 MainProg B EN BLE MainPrg 53 AMPLITUD E MainPro i5pecialSinus MainPrg enurn Add Variable Delete Variable Figure 8 35 Trace Tree in the Trace Configuration Dialog See on top level the name of the configured trace and indented below the names of the tracing variables For changing the record settings
155. ategory in the selection list below Messages Figure 7 20 with exception of the Precompile messages which always are shown in the field below the messages table The messages belonging to the chosen category will be listed in the Messages table with the following information Description message text Project project name Object name of concerned object within the project Position for example line number network number etc within the object If you want to fade out or in a certain type of messages in the table use the buttons in the upper right corner error s warning s message s These buttons in each case show the number of available messages and by a mouse click on a button you can toggle the display of the respective message type You can navigate between the messages currently shown in the table and jump from a message to the position in the concerned object by using the commands Next Message Previous Message and Go To Source Position see Messages View for further details Element Properties Symbol This command opens the Properties view for the currently selected SFC element The properties like step or transition name comment step time attributes and associated actions are displayed in a structured table They can be edited by a mouse click in the values field and in case of the Init Step property by a click on the checkbox to activate or deactivate the option See SFC Element Properties IEC 61131 Programming
156. ault for example because the corresponding right has been granted to the father object Basically this is the default setting for all rights which not explicitly have been configured The right to perform the action s currently selected in the Actions window has not been designed explicitly but is denied by default for example in case because the corresponding right has been assigned to the father object If currently multiple actions are selected in the Actions window which do not have unique settings referring to the currently selected group no icon will be displayed To configure the rights for a group select the desired action s in the Actions window and the desired group in the Permissions window Then use the appropriate button in the toolbar of the Permissions window oF Grant Explicit granting tam Explicit denying e Clear The currently granted right for the action s currently selected in the Actions window will be deleted that 1s set back to the default Menus from the Editors of Programming Languages As the POU language being edited 1s enabled a menu with the options corresponding to this language Are three different menus e FBD LD IL Editor Commands e CFC Editor Commands e SFC Editor Commands 150 7 Menu Commands The ST language editor does not have a specific menu FBD LD IL Editor Commands The FBD LD IL category provides commands for working in the FBD LD IL Editor which
157. aving inserted an appropriate slave device before no applications can be inserted below non programmable devices Further on only devices correctly installed on the local system and matching the current position in the tree will be available for insertion Re positioning of objects is possible via the standard commands of clipboard Cut Copy Paste Delete or by drawing the selected object with the mouse while the mouse button lt CTRL gt for copying is pressed Only device objects can be positioned on the level directly below the root node EN lt projectname gt If currently no entry is selected e g if you click with the mouse in the empty space of the devices view this equals to having selected the root node entry A device will be inserted as a node in the tree If defined in the device description file automatically sub nodes might be inserted A sub node again might be a programmable device Below a device object further devices might be inserted if those are installed on the local system and thus available in the Add Object and Add Device dialogs The sorting of device objects within the tree from up to down On a particular tree level first always the programmable devices Plc Logic are arranged followed by any further devices each sorted alphabetically 24 3 Concepts and Basic Components e Asan assistance for setting up the PLC configuration in the device tree a scan functionality is provided by the standard device editors
158. be displayed above the identifier Can optionally be assigned a local operand comment Show symbol address for each symbol variable the assigned address is displayed above the symbol identifier Fixed operand size available only to display comment in single line network In this option the following parameters determine the size of fields of information assigned to an operand o Width of the operand characters maximum number of characters of the name of an operand that are displayed o Height of the operand lines maximum number of rows displayed to the name of an operand o Height of the comment of the operand lines maximum number of lines available for the comment of an operand o Height of the comment symbol lines maximum number of lines available for the comment of the symbol of the operand Placeholder for new operands not available Empty operands for function blocks pins with this option enabled empty operands are allowed for pins of function blocks Connect boxes with straight FBD Tab in this option the network components are arranged so that their lines are short and fixed In this way the horizontal space required for the display of networks is reduced as far as possible This can affect the highest boxes for example to provide enough space for input and output If this option is disabled the elements will keep its default size and connection lines adapt space Example ivar verylongidentifier Figure 7 138
159. ble locations By default with the MasterTool IEC XE installation at least the System Repository 1s provided e Installed device descriptions The currently installed devices are listed in a tree structure each showing the Name Vendor name and Version of the device The devices tree may be structured by categories like for example PLCs and Miscellaneous Figure 7 116 If applicable open or close the tree entries via the plus and minus buttons 203 7 Menu Commands e Details This button opens for the currently selected device the Details dialog showing additional information as given by the device description file Device name Vendor name Categories Version Order Number Description e Install Use this button to get a device installed for being available in the programming system The dialog Install Device Description will open where you can browse your system for the respective device description For the standard devices the file filter is to be set to devdesc xml But also description files provided by the manufacturer like for example gsd files for Profibus DP modules can be selected by setting the respective filter As soon as you confirm the selection with OK the dialog will close and the new device will be added to the devices tree in the Device Repository dialog NOTE During installation the device description files and all additional files referenced by that description will be copied to an internal
160. bling 20 4100 Advanced Used range QB21695 OQB21714 Used range 0QX4100 0 0QX4103 7 Slave Mappings Data Start Address Data Size IEC Variable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 8 55 MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities Q Start Address of Diagnostics deci a e SS Area initial address Q o EPSON g Diagnostics area size AAA AAA EE Address MODBUS slave 1 to 255 address Mapping Disabling Initial address used to Any address area disable the MODBUS Q limited according relations which are to the CPU used set on Slave Mappings QX X Table 8 17 MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation Configuration Advanced Configurations This configuration is the same as the MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation one Adding a MODBUS Relation Click on Add button and a screen will pop up where the user can choose the relation data type Regardless of the data chosen the following screen will open where the appropriate settings should be done 286 8 Editors W MODBUS_RTU_Slave_Mapping_000 Coil ps3 Mapping Settings Data Start Address Data Size 1 8 Used range 1 8 IEC Variable 4104 Used range 014104 0 20x4104 Read only Ga Figure 8 56 Adding a Relation on MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities Coil 1 bit Holding Register 16 bits Data Type MODBU
161. c 1 H POU 4 Automatically generate POUs for property access Figure 7 39 Project Information Dialog Statistics The table shows an overview on the objects used in the project See the total Number of objects on top as well as in the table below the number of objects Count per Object type Project Settings Symbol G This command is available in the Project menu and it is automatically included in the POUSs tree The dialog provides subdialogs for various settings like for example project encryption user and access rights management version handling layout definitions for printouts etc POUs x f Projet bl E Project Information Project Settings Figure 7 40 Project Settings Object in POUs Window 131 7 Menu Commands On the left side of the dialog the categories of possible settings are listed On the right side the corresponding dialog will appear Page Setup These commands are related to the dialogs for configuring the layout of a printout page The layout defined here 1s valid for printouts via the Print and Document commands Source Download Project Settings E Page Setup Security E Source Download a Users and Groups dE Visualization Profile Destination device lt All devices in project gt Content The project file itself is always part of the source download archive Use compact download Additional files Timing Implicity at program download Prompt a
162. ce settings as 69 5 User Interface MDI windows They cannot be hidden or undocked from the frame window They can be accessed via the Window menu commands Additional types of windows or views might be added via Manufacturer specific components Customizing User Interface The actual look of the user interface which means arrangement and configuration of the particular components depends on the following e Standard pre settings for menus keyboard functions and toolbars Default settings are installed with MasterTool IEC XE e Properties of an editor as defined in the respective Options dialogs In addition these settings can be overwritten by the user and the current configuration also will be saved on the local system e Arrangement of views or editor windows within the project done by the user The current positions are saved with the project Arranging Menu Bars and Tool Bars Zoom The menu bar is always positioned at top of the user interface between window title bar and view windows A toolbar can be positioned within the same area as the menu bar fix or as an independent window anywhere on the screen To re position a bar click with the cursor on the dotted line at the left end of the bar keep the cursor pressed and shift the bar to the desired position he Project project Ma jae i amp ajaja Figure 5 2 Dotted Line on Left Side of Menu and Tool Bars w NOTE In view windows like for example POU
163. cess to ensure that the operator keep track of what is occurring In the experiment initially the PID controller is passed automatically to manual operating mode Then after a certain period of time the step signal is applied It is important to note that the signal level is not applied immediately In this interval in which the MV remains unchanged is being collected some statistical information that will be used to minimize the possible presence of noise in the process After applied the step the process will begin to respond to this stimulus until steady state again The experiment must be kept running with the process in steady state for certain period of time The procedure can be stopped by pressing the Stop button One should remember that being the Automatic Stop option is enabled at some point the experiment will be terminated automatically by the tuning procedure However the operator is still able to terminate the experiment when convenient even before the automatic finalizing When the Stop button is pressed the experiment is terminated and the new suggested parameters to the controller are displayed in GP TI and TD In order to sent the parameters to the PLC the Write button must be pressed After the auto tuning procedure the controller will remain working in its manual mode To return to the automatic mode press the Auto button of Online Settings group of Settings amp Chart tab 316 9 Installation 9 Installation
164. command is used in the SFC editor to transform the currently selected step to an init step Thus the frame of the step element will change to a double line The step previously having been the init step will automatically change to a normal step and get displayed now with a single line frame This transformation might be useful if you want to reconstruct an existing chart When creating a new SFC POU automatically an init step element will be inserted followed by a transition TRUE and a jump back to the init step Notice the possibility to set back the SFC to the init step by using variables SFCInit and SFCReset 175 7 Menu Commands Insert Step Transition Symbol FT This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a step and a transition before the currently selected position The positioning sequence of the new step and transition depends on whether a step or transition have been selected when performing the insert command Automatically the sequence step transition step transition will be kept See Figure 7 92 for examples step1 selected gt Insert Step Transition gt 2 gt Ap TA Transition TRUE transition selected gt x New Step Insert Step Transition gt Transition Figure 7 92 Step and Transition Inserted The new step by default is named Step lt n gt whereby n is a running number starting with 0 for the first step which is inserted in addition to the init step The new transi
165. contents For further information see Export to CSV Security Project PLC The access control for projects particular objects and the right to perform certain actions in a project can be configured and managed via dialogs of the Project Settings and Object Properties A project basically can be protected by an encrypted password see Project Settings Access rights concerning objects always are assigned to particular user groups not to single users For each object a list of allowed actions can be defined for each user group Each particular user however can get an own password See User Management and Access Right Management for an overview on user group and access right management for a project Depending on the device there might be an access control related to objects and files in the PLC See Users and Groups to get information on the respective user and possibilities of management rights in the device Configuration editor 30 4 Quick Start 4 Quick Start The main goal of this chapter is to indicate the basic steps for the Nexto Series CPUs programming Following this chapter the user will be able to walk the first steps before start a PLC programming The following items will be explored e Create and run projects e Uninstallation update and repairs e Getting help Project Profiles A project profile in the MasterTool IEC XE is a group of rules common features and patterns used in an industrial automation solu
166. ct those entries and use button Close window s Multiple selection is possible Close will close the dialog not applicable to the Configuration Bus Help Menu Contents Index Search The Help menu provides functions to get links and online help on MasterTool IEC XE Available commands Contents Index Search Contact support Update Software License Documentation Altus Home Page About Further commands might be available indicating links on an Internet page Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt F1 gt This command opens the Contents tree of the online help in a separate window The contents 1s structured via books which can be opened or closed via a single mouse click on the plus minus sign The particular pages can be displayed in a separate window by a single mouse click on the page entry Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt This command opens a dialog showing a list of all index keywords provided by the online help in a separate window When you enter a string in the Look For field the first keyword matching this string will be selected in the list By a double click on list entry either the respective help page will be opened or in case of multiple pages found for this keyword a list of help pages will be displayed in the Index Results window This command opens a search dialog in a separate window This dialog supports a full text search over all pages of t
167. ction e Folding Define whether the code should be viewed structured by folds This means that sections specified by indented position and marked by a special comment are hidden in a fold which can be opened or closed via by a mouse click on the plus resp minus sign on the left side of the folds header line The options o None No folding is done o Indent All lines indented to the previous one will be put in a fold which is headed by the preceding line Examples The lines between VAR and END VAR and between IF and END IF are indented thus are packed in a fold indicated by a minus sign in open and by the plus sign in closed state Opened and closed folds examples 214 7 Menu Commands Opened folds Closed folds 1 IF a 1 l IF at l 4 lines 2 THEH 6 END IF S B 07 7 ci c l 4 ELSE 5 b 1 6 EHD IF 7 cr ct l Figure 7 128 Opened and Closed Folds Explicit The code section to be packed in a fold must be marked explicitly by comment lines Before the section in a comment enter three opening braces after the section in a comment enter three closing braces The comment may contain further text also Examples for defining a folding section IF b THEH E IF a THEH c TRUE EHD IF off ph END IF Tm n e Ww M PF fff commentocomment 11 comment comment IF a THEN c TRUE EHD IF off ph EHD IF 3 M nm 0 Fr Figure 7 129 Explicit Folds Defined by Special Comments Word Wr
168. cur during the process and appropriate messages will be displayed describing the error The import command operates under existing projects Thus some decisions are made during the import when the devices are or not previously instantiated in the project These decisions are described below e Ifa device described in the file does not exist in the project it will be created unless it is a module In this case it must be previously existent e Ifa device already exists in the project its settings will be replaced by the configuration described in the file e If an instantiated device in the project is not described in the file it will be removed from the project unless it is a module In this case it will be kept in the project with the same settings NOTE The Import command does not create new projects Thus the option Import from CSV on Project menu is enabled only is the project is opened NOTE In the case of import process triggered by the selection of a device there is no error return if there are no data in the import file to be imported into the device 143 7 Menu Commands Document This command opens the Document Project window where you can configure and print a documentation for the project Document Project Please select the objects which are to be printed Project z i Device El PLC Logic Application LA Bill of Materials Configuration and Cons Diagnostic Explorer
169. d all other features of this object are presented in this document 304 8 Editors Start Page Configuration Bus 3 PIDControl PID Control Editor a Settings amp Chart Advanced Settings Chart Online Settings PIDControl Offline 0 00 100 00 Value IAE ERAN taliti lieu dulu atilidu HU LULL Figure 8 77 Graphical environment of the PID Control object The graphical environment illustrated by Figure 8 77 can be accessed by double clicking with the left mouse button on the PID Control object located in the treeview and then selecting the graphical environment as shown in the Figure 8 78 Edit Object PIDControl Device PLC Logic A meal Select a view to open Default ST POU editor fea PIDControl Use as default Figure 8 78 Access to the graphical environment of PID Control object 305 8 Editors Tab Settings amp Chart The Figure 8 77 presented the main work tab of the PID Control object According to the illustrated in this figure this tab is comprised of two groups Chart and Online Settings Group Chart This group is responsible for displaying the process trend chart including some operations and or settings in this graph The Figure 8 79 presents this group Chart PIDControl Offline 0 00 100 00 Value Execution Cycle Config Chart Figure 8 79 Group Graphic Above the trend chart is
170. d directly in a random way and with the same speed Is volatile i e its content is lost when the equipment is de energized unless if you have a battery for retaining values Set of I O Modules connected to the Fieldbus head Command to reboot the PLC Command to put PLC in execution mode A complete execution of the PLC application program Unit interface that transfers data serially Action to assign the logical high level state to a boolean variable Equipment connected to a communications network that transmits data only if it is requested by other equipment called master Computer programs procedures and rules related to the operation of a data processing system Command to freeze the PLC in its current state Segment of a communication network that connects a group of devices nodes with the goal of isolating the local data traffic or using different protocols or physical media Maximum preset time to a communication to take place When exceeded then retry procedures are started or diagnostics are activated Text box with a help or where you can enter with the help Data structure for hardware configuration Reading of the program or configuration from the PLC Set of screens of PLC Electronic circuit that checks the equipment operation integrity Extensible Markup Language is a standard for generating markup languages In the context of keyboard function window is used for the exchange of screens 329
171. defining the value also ENUM constants are allowed Default empty e Task From the list of available tasks select that one after the execution of which the trace variable should be read Default The first task in the Task Configuration tree e Record condition A boolean variable a value or a boolean expression can be entered here As soon as this condition gets TRUE the trace sampling will be started If nothing is entered here the trace recording will start as soon as the Trace Configuration has been downloaded and the application is running e Comment A comment text might be entered here concerning the current record e Generate Trace POU for visualization Activating the associated checkbox induces the implicit build of the component lt Tracename gt _ lt Taskname gt _VISU Use this option 1f you want to integrate the trace readout within a visualization e Appearance This button opens the Edit Appearance dialog where you can set up the display of the trace window for the currently configured record axes colors and scroll behavior e Advanced This button opens the Trace Advanced Settings dialog Trace Advanced Settings The Trace Advanced Settings open with a click on the Advanced button in the screen Trace Settings group Record Settings 271 8 Editors Advanced Trace Settings Refresh rate ms Trace editor buffer size samples 10001 Measure in every n th cycle Recommended runtime buffer size samples
172. device traffic is being generated within another one In this way is recommended that by accessing a remote network where there is no computer running a gateway you must configure the IP address of the target device in the device Communication Settings In the following picture Figure 8 16 there is no gateway running on the subnet 1 This way to access the PLC110 it is possible to configure the gateway of the device itself GW1 which will be responsible for handling the packages with the computer on the subnet O for example In both cases it is necessary to know what the device IP address is and put it into the parameter ZP Address when it added a new gateway By using one of these two paths it is possible that the PC10 access PLC120 and PLC220 in different subnets of your For details on adding gateway see Communication Settings NOTE In some cases when different subnet than the PLC you must perform a connectivity test using the command ping through the Windows prompt between the computer and the PLC to this one appears in the Communication settings window 247 8 Editors ATTENTION All Nexto series CPUs can be used as a remote gateway in different subnets of the computer where the MasterTool IEC XE is running However this operation causes performance loss of your Ethernet interfaces due to treatment and redirection of packages sent to other devices on the same network Whenever a device is accessed on a network other than
173. ding the code to the device The results each get displayed in the message window The Clean command serve to delete the compile information which was created at the last download including generation of compilation code on the target system This for example will concern online change Available commands e Generate code e Clean e Clean all Generate Code This command allows compiling the currently active application just for test purposes A code generation run will be done like by default is done when logging in with the application However no code will be downloaded and no compile info file will be created in the project directory Thus the user can check for any detected compilation errors before going online with a possibly incorrect code NOTE Some changes made in the application are applied during the code generation process such as changing the name of system tasks when they are changed the names of the corresponding instances Similarly some of project checks are performed only when this command is executed Clean This command deletes the compile information for the currently active application The compile information was created and stored in a file compileinfo in the project directory during the last download of the application After a clean process no online change is possible for the respective application The program first must be re downloaded Clean All This command deletes the compile infor
174. displayed in highlight the name of PID controller in accordance with the name assigned to the PID Control object in the treeview window Devices Just below is the scale of engineering of process variable PV In the upper right corner still above the chart the group Chart has an indicator that allows the user to recognize 1f the PLC is in Offline or Online mode The values presented in the trend chart are always displayed in percentage This chart is composed of three pens representing the following variables e SP controller reference value always drawn in green e PV controller process variable always drawn in red e MV controller manipulated variable always drawn in blue 306 8 Editors Below the trend chart are located buttons that provide functionalities that are applied to the chart The Figure 8 80 shows these buttons start isd Lo led ls Config Chart Figure 8 80 Buttons of Features of the Trend Chart The Start button is used to start the process monitoring In this case the pens of the chart will draw the dynamic behavior of variable SP PV and MV After the start of monitoring the name of this button changes to Stop where the monitoring can be finalized After you stop monitoring the button name returns to Start The Start button and all other buttons that are located immediately on your right are only enabled with the PLC in Online mode These other buttons have the following functions lt shift the gr
175. ditions For further information see Debug Menu Breakpoints a X Application Application Device PLC Logic im New X Bt E By Bh ty POU Location Instance path Tasks Condition Current hit count MainPra Device PLC Logic Application Line 1 Column 1 Impl any any Break always O MainPrg Device PLC Logic Application Line 2 Column 1 Impl any any Break when the hit count is equalto 1 0 O POU Device PLC Logic Application RETURN any any Break always 0 FB1 Device PLC Logic Application Line 5 Column 1 Impl any any Break always 0 O FB1 Device PLC Logic Application Line 4 Column 1 Impl any any Break always 0 O MainPrg Device PLC Logic Application Line 8 Column 1 Impl any any Break always 0 MainPrg Device PLC Logic Application Line 7 Column 1 Impl Device Application MainPrg any Break always Figure 7 21 Breakpoints e Application Name of currently active application Example Application PLC PlcLogic e POU Name of POU containing this breakpoint Example MainPrg e Location Breakpoint position within POU line column numbers text editors or network or element numbers graphic editors Impl in case of function blocks indicates that the breakpoint 1s in the implementation part of the function block Example Line 2 Column 1 Impl e Instance Path Complete object path of the breakpoint position Example Device A
176. ds Alternative and Parallel Example of Parallel Branch In see a new parallel branch created by command Insert branch right when step 1 was selected Automatically a step Step2 in the example gets inserted Processing in online mode When 12 is TRUE Step2 will be executed immediately after step before t3 is noticed So both branches will be executed in contrast to alternative branches Figure 7 94 Parallel Branch Example of Alternative Branch In Figure 7 95 see a new alternative branch created by command Insert branch right when transition t4 was selected Automatically a step Step32 and a preceding and a subsequent transition 141 t42 get inserted Processing in online mode When Step3 is active the following transitions t4 t41 will be checked from left to right The first branch whose transition is found to be TRUE will be executed Thus only one branch is executed in contrast to parallel branches Figure 7 95 Alternative Branch 178 7 Menu Commands Insert Action Association Symbol This command is used in the SFC Editor to associate an action to a step Select the desired step and perform the command The action box will be inserted right to the step box If already one or several action s are associated to a step the new action element will be placed as first action upper position for the step if the step has been selected when performing the Insert command directl
177. e Figure 7 140 Options Dialog Category Syntax Highlighting Define here which color and font style should be used for displaying the particular items in the text editor window Select an item type from the Display Items selection list then select the desired colors for the Item foreground and Item background and define the Item font style by a mouse click on one or several of the respective buttons for bold B italic 1 underlined U and strike through S A sample view of the current settings will be displayed in the Sample window 222 SFC Flags 7 Menu Commands This sub dialog of the Options dialog provides the possibility to set default settings for SFC objects Each new SFC object will get these defaults in its properties NOTE Notice that any modifications in the default settings will not be applied to existing SFC objects until you use the Set defaults button in the SFC Settings Properties window of the particular object The object priority than the defaults The pure editor options that 1s settings for layout and view are handled in a separate SFC Editor dialog gi CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor lf FBD LD and IL editor Fags Build Features ad International Settings Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor EE SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting S Variable Description All steps and actions are reset The init s SFCReset SFCError SFCEnableLimit SFCErrorStep SFCError
178. e breakpoint has been hit the number of times defined Enter the desired number resp select it in the number field e Break when the hit count is equal to e Break when the hit count is a multiple of e Break when the hit count is greater than or equal to Breakpoint Positions The possible breakpoint positions depend on the editor Basically they are those positions in a POU at which values of variables can change or at which the program flow branches out resp another POU 1s called NOTE Breakpoints in methods A breakpoint will be set automatically in all methods which might be called Therefore if an interface managed method is called breakpoints will be set in all methods of function blocks implementing that interface and also in all derivative function blocks subscribing the method If a method is called via a pointer on a function block breakpoints will be set in the method of the function block and in all derivative function blocks which are subscribing the method 191 7 Menu Commands Breakpoint Symbols Figure 7 103 Figure 7 104 and Figure 7 105 show the possible symbols assumed by breakpoints 1 E 1d1 1 O Ex o fbins TF htuarEsi lt el THEI Figure 7 103 Breakpoint in Online Mode 1 3 ldlii erg gq 0 fbins TF hirarEasisFl THEI Figure 7 104 Disabled Breakpoint 1dl 716 Ergo fhinst TF hrarEFa SF THEE Figure 7 105 Program Stop at Breakpoi
179. e Conditional compilation Conditional breakpoints 16 3 Concepts and Basic Components e Debugging step to cursor back to previous caller e Field bus driver matching IEC 61131 3 e Symbolic and PLC configuration available in application e Free memory allocation of code and data e Each object can be specified to be internal or external late link in the runtime system e Precompile notes concerning syntax errors Profiles Single A MasterTool IEC XE project profile is a set of rules common characteristics and patterns used in the development of an industrial automation solution It is a profile that influences the form of implementation of the application With the diversity of types of applications supported by Nexto Series Runtime System to follow a profile is a way to reduce the complexity in programming Applications can be created according to one of the following profiles Single Basic Normal Expert Custom For each profile defined for RTS MasterTool IEC XE can provide lots of compatible templates When the user selects a template as model in the creation of a new project the new application will be developed in accordance to a specific profile adopting rules features and patterns defined by the profile associated to the template Each profile defines names for the tasks and programs which will be previously created by the project templates The developer is required to strictly follow the tasks name althoug
180. e by clicking with the right button on the COM and select Add Device as Shown on Figure 4 19 45 J Device NX3010 S E PLCLogic bg Application fs Bill of Materials B PS on and Consumption 2 Diagnostic Explorer T Diagnoste fi Library Manager pa B MainPrg PRG E POU PRG f Task Configuration e Configuration S MainTask a A Configuration Bus ii NX3010 in Sy Y COM2 W NET1 Copy Paste HL Tt Delete Properties Add Object 2 Add Folder 0 Edit Object Edit Object With Simulation Figure 4 19 Adding an Instance 4 Quick Start After that the available protocols for the user will appear on the screen Set the mode of the protocol configuration and select MODBUS Symbol RTU Slave or MODBUS RTU Slave for the correspondent configuration Then click Add as shown on Figure 4 20 46 4 Quick Start CO Add Device Name MODBUS RTU Slave Action Append device Insertdevice Plug device Update device Device Vendors Name Vendor Version J Mopsus 8 MODBUS Serial 8 MODBUS Master fj MODBUS Slave MODBUS RTU Slave 1 0 0 2 Display all versions for experts only Information H Name MODBUS RTU Slave Vendor WAA Groups MODBUS Slave Version 1 0 0 2 Model Number 77 Append selected device as last child of COM 1 You can select another target node in the navigator while this window is open
181. e see the Manual of the used CPU 80 6 User and Access Right Managemente 6 User and Access Right Management Provide functions for defining user accounts and configure the access rights within a project Notice that also device specific user management might be supported for controlling the user s access rights on the PLC file system and objects during runtime The rights to access project objects via specified actions are assigned only to user groups not to a single user account Therefore each user must be member of a group User Management The configuration of users and groups is done in the Project dialog in the Project Settings window Automatically there is always a group Everyone and by default primarily each defined user or other groups are members of this group Thus each user account at least automatically is provided with defined default settings Group Everyone cannot be deleted just renamed and no members can be removed from this group Also automatically there is always a group Owner containing one user Owner Users can be added to or removed from this group but at least one user must remain This group also cannot be deleted and always has all access rights Thus it is not possible to make a project unusable by denying the respective rights to all groups Both group and user Owner might be renamed When starting the programming system and a project primarily no user is logged on the project But then the user opt
182. e Sensitivity field value multiplied by the Time field the diagnosis will also be indicated It should pay attention to the fact that the watchdog of the CPU is not used to protect the user s application of peaks at runtime but crashes Therefore your time should be configured with a high value compared to the time of execution of the task to which it is related The ideal is to maintain the average execution time of tasks in at most 50 of the time of watchdog Thus diminish the chances of watchdog errors for any peak time on task execution Aiming to protect the system regarding to possible configuration error the MasterTool IEC XE checks in all cyclic tasks during the compilation the watchdog Software Watchdog and the minimum and maximum limits of the task cycle time Interval It is important to highlight that the user will have to be careful when changing the pre defined values by the project profiles as in this way it may put in risk the system execution So it is recommended to use the default values For further information see Task Editor w NX30x project MasterTool IEC XE a proj o File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help osas Bx Moe Devices a Xx StartPage i Configuration Bus 2 MainTask xQ as Ey ADS DO 5 Configuration 3 Device NX3010 2 3 H PLCLogic al s Priority 0 31 h3 gt Application o La Bill of Materials Type Configurati
183. e code results in short execution times Data transfer to the controller device The data transfer between MasterTool IEC XE and the device is done via a gateway component and a runtime system Standard and professional interface Predefined feature sets serve to be able to choose between a standard user interface with a reduced selection of features and less complexity and a professional environment supporting all features When the programming system is initially started after the first installation on the system the user will be prompted to choose one of the sets Also later the user still can switch the set and also a user defined customization of the currently used feature set is possible For the particular differences between the standard and professional version please see Features Advanced Functionalities In the following the user can see the advanced functionalities available on MasterTool IEC XE Object Orientation in Programming and Project Structure Extensions to function blocks Properties Methods Inheritance Method invocation 15 3 Concepts and Basic Components Applications are instances of independent programming objects Special Data Types ANY_TYPE UNION LTIME References Enumerations base data type can be specified DI DINT DINT 16 FFFFFFFF Operators and Special Variables Scope operators extended namespaces Function pointers replacing the INSTANCE_OF operator Init Method replacing t
184. e fields have a minimum and maximum limit value which depends on the functionality of the field For example a timeout field may vary in the value from 10 s minimum and 65535 s maximum In these cases it is not possible to configure values outside this range and this consistency is performed during Setup For some numeric fields this consistency is performed in one of the stages of code generation This also happens when there is a dependency between different fields as for example between the cycle time of a task and its watchdog value In case of parameters representing d I Q and M direct mappings addresses areas the consistency is performed only the during code generation As the projects are designed to any CPU models with different area sizes the fields representing the address ranges within these areas are limited between 0 and 2147483647 During the code generation the values assigned in the configuration are consisted with the limits to available each CPU model In case the values are outside these limits an error message will be generated during the process When the I O Mappings tab is opened and the Reset Origin command is run it will not display show the mappings with its current values In this case it Current Value column displays lt Bad gt Perform the Download command Online menu and close open the module editor window so that the values can be properly displayed and updated For further information see Reset Origin and D
185. e in its Project Information The library namespace must be used as a prefix of the identifier in order to uniquely access a module which is plurally available in the project See also Library Management IEC 61131 Programming Manual for information on library namespaces e Effective Version Effective version 1s that library version which will be currently used due to the definition in the library properties Libraries which have been included in a project automatically by a plug in are displayed grey colored those that have been added manually Add Library are displayed in black color An icon before the library name indicates the type of the library e MasterTool IEC XE library contains version information e The referenced file could not be found or is not a valid library See command Try to Reload Library on IEC 61131 Programming Manual If a library has dependencies on other libraries referenced libraries those automatically will also get included if available and will be displayed with icon 1n a subtree of the entry A subtree can be opened or closed by the respective plus or minus sign In the lower left part of the editor the modules of the currently selected library are displayed The usual buttons for sorting finding etc are available for handling the modules tree 253 8 Editors In the lower right part the following tabs are available e Inputs Outputs Tab on the right side the co
186. e project user management users have to be members of groups and only user groups can get certain access rights Using the Configuration Dialog Basically the handling of the user management dialogs is very similar to that of the project s user management There is even the possibility to import user account definitions from the project s user management 82 6 User and Access Right Managemente A Start Page i EN Configuration Bus y cH Device Communication Setings Users and Groups Upload from device Download to device G Load from disk A Save to disk Users Figure 6 1 Device Dialog Users and Groups Users The following buttons are available for setting up user accounts icki The dialog Add User opens where you can define a user name and a password The password must be repeated in the Confirm password field useri Password pa Confirm password Figure 6 2 Add User Dialog 83 Groups 6 User and Access Right Managemente Import The dialog Import Users opens showing all user names which are currently defined in the project user management Select one or several entries and confirm with OK The dialog Enter password will open where you have to enter the corresponding password as it is defined in the project user Management in order to get the user account imported to the device specific user management The currently selected user account can be modified concer
187. e system objects Grant Deny Clear 3 Runtime objects Devi F Add remove children Dey2 Derne gf Everyone Logger dk Owner PlcLogic Application Settings UserManagement Execute Modify View Howto ue one or more actions and target objects from the left ist Then select the groups in the upper view for which you want to adjust permissions Click Grant to grant permissions for the selected groups Click Deny to deny permissions for the selected groups Click Clear to reset permissions to default for the selected groups Figure 6 4 Device Access Rights See in the following how to define the access permissions and how to get them loaded to the device or stored in a reloadable file 85 6 User and Access Right Managemente Defining the Access Permissions To define the permission for performing an action on one or multiple object s you have to select the object entries below the desired action type in the Actions window then select the desired group in the Permissions window and then click on the Grant or Deny button also in the Permissions window See in the following a description of the particular dialog windows Actions This part of the dialog lists the possible actions which might be performed during runtime on files in the PLC file system resp runtime objects like for example applications The tree is structured in the following way a Object categories Top level for structuring purposes th
188. e viewed See also the help page on ARRAYS IEC 61131 Programming Manual By pressing OK the declaration dialog will be closed and the variable declaration will appear in the declaration editor in accordance to the IEC syntax Messages View The Messages View commands allow the navigation between messages displayed in the messages window and also between messages and the implementation code Available commands e Next Message F4 e Previous Message lt SHIFT gt F4 e Go To Source Position These commands serve to navigate between messages in the Messages window messages view and also between messages and the concerned position in the project View Menu The view window type can be managed by commands from this menu These commands open the corresponding windows as the user s choice Available commands POUs Devices Messages Element Properties Product Library 110 7 Menu Commands Toolbox Watch Breakpoints Call Stack Cross Reference List Start Page Full Screen Properties Default Navigators POUS Devices Provides the following commands of View menu which will be visible as windows in the user interface e POUs e Devices By default each view in the upper right corner has a button for opening a menu with the following commands and options e Open in editor Opens the object in the appropriate editor e Find object Opens where you can search the objects tree for a POU n
189. eakpoints can be defined to work as halt positions when processing an application program for example for debugging purposes Further on there is the possibility to execute the program in defined steps stepping NOTE When an application is stopped on a Breakpoint the module diagnostic variables will not be updated until a MainTask cycle is completed For this it is necessary to run the application through all Breakpoints until it stops again on the first breakpoint present When it stopson this Breakpoint the diagnostics will be updated New Breakpoint Symbol if This command is used to insert a new breakpoint in one of the POUs It does not care where the cursor currently is placed the New Breakpoint dialog will open where in sub dialog Location you can choose one of the possible breakpoint positions allover the project and in sub dialog Condition can define some conditions for the new breakpoint 189 7 Menu Commands Location New Breakpoint Location POU Position E Instance Path Enable breakpoint immediately Figure 7 101 New Breakpoint Dialog Location e POU The selection list offers all POUs currently available in the project Select one to set a breakpoint e Position The selection list offers all possible breakpoint positions of the currently selected POU Depending on the editor type these positions are defined by Line Column numbers text editors or as Network or Element numbers g
190. ect from Nexto perform command Logout from the Online menu 65 4 Quick Start Debug an Application Set Breakpoint and Step Through the Program Help In online mode you can set breakpoints as defined halt positions for the program execution When the program has reached a breakpoint you can execute the program in single steps At each halt position you see the current value of the variables in the monitoring views Select line 1 of MainPrg Press key lt F9 gt which equals the command Toggle Breakpoint from the Debug menu The breakpoint will be indicated counter call the function block of FHI type with the input parameter in output is write in erg REMAN Figure 4 45 Application in Stop State A running application will stop at a breakpoint 1 Es 1 counter 2 fbinst inf 10 10 out 62 Ferg J call the function block of FBi type 3 F with the input parameter in 4 Z f output is write in erg RETURN Figure 4 46 Application in Run State Now you can step further by using lt F8 gt which represents command Step Into from the Debug menu and therefore will step also into the function block instance To skip the steps of the function block use lt F10 gt or command Step Over Each variable value currently read from the Nexto will be displayed You might also have a look at the breakpoints dialog to be opened via command Breakpoints from the View menu Here the break
191. ection element has been inserted when the first input b1 of the SEL box was selected The SEL operator will have output 1 each time a rising edge is detected at its input The command is not available in IL editor A network containing an edge detection will be kept unmodified after conversion from FBD LD to IL NOTE Concerning the view options for the components of a FBD LD IL network notice the settings in the FBD LD and IL Editor Set Reset Symbol El Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt M gt This command is used in FBD or LD to define the type of the boolean outputs as Set Reset or normal It is not available in the IL editor where the corresponding modifiers have to be used appropriately With multiple executions of the command the output will alternate between set reset and normal output NOTE Concerning the view options for the components of a FBD LD IL network notice the settings in the FBD LD and IL Editor Set Outout Connection Symbol E This command can be used in FBD or LD with boxes which have multiple outputs to determine that output which should be connected to the network processing line Notice the shift of the output assignments in case of changing the output connection 163 7 Menu Commands E inst E inst fublo fublo inl Loutl ergvar a inl ioutlprar 2 inz Loute varl E in ioutebvarl joutibvarz eroyvar Insert Branch Symbol Default S
192. ed The major ticks will be elongated by dotted lines for this purpose The color of the grid lines can be chosen from the color selection list e Description Y axis If this option is activated the text entered in the edit field will be displayed at the upper end of the y axis For the x axis no description will be displayed here e Font X and Y axis This button opens the standard dialog for defining the font for the trace display e Backcolor From the given color selection list choose the background color for the coordinate system which should be used as long as this is not selected in the trace window e Backcolor on Selection From the given color selection list choose the background color for the coordinate system which should be used as long as this is selected in the trace window e Reset With this command the appearance is set to its default value e Use as default With this command the current appearance is set as default They are used when a new trace or variable is configured 273 8 Editors Variable Settings See in the following a description of the trace configuration dialog for variable settings lt lt Trace Co nfiguration MinMaxColor ma MainPro S1 0uUT mem MainPra 52 01T Variable MainPrg 51 0UT ma MainPrg 53 COUNTER Gradua Graph type Line Variable Settings ma MainPrg 54 COUNTER ma MainPrg 53 QUT ma MainPrg 54 UT ma MainPrg 53 QUT Activate minimum warning ma MoainPr
193. ed in LD Jump target Jump inserted in FED bvar PS Jump target Figure 7 69 Jump Inserted PROGRAM IL 1 z YAR z bvar BOOL 4 b are BOOL 5 EHD VAR l LD bY ar JUHE C Junp target E Junp target LD bYarz Figure 7 70 Programmed Jump via JMP Operator IL Editor If a JMP operator that has been inserted in IL without preceding LD is converted to LD the operator 227 will be inserted 156 7 Menu Commands pepo i s one Pe 3 END VAR JH PC Output 1 ER v al gt r d gt x A y 4 gt a Pe Conversion of IL to LD Mi 292 Output 1 E v Pe Figure 7 71 JMP Operator Conversion NOTE Concerning the view options for the components of a FBD LD IL network notice the settings in the FBD LD and IL Editor Insert Label Symbol m This command inserts a label field into the currently selected network The default text string can be modified according to your demands e You may enter the name of a label providing a target for a jump instruction e You may enter a pragma instruction See Pragma Instructions IEC 61131 Programming Manual for a detailed description If you want to make use of both of the alternatives enter the pragma first followed by the name of the label 157 7 Menu Commands Insert Return Symbol lt r This command inserts a RETURN instruction FBD or LD Depending on the se
194. ed in the project containing a list of variables to be monitored watchlist e In the online view of the object within the declaration part of the respective editor Example Open an object in online mode for example a program written in ST In the declaration part of the editor window you will find the displayable expressions listed in a table Click on the concerned field in column Prepared Value enter the desired value Perform command Write Values that is by default part of the Online menu The value will immediately be written to the respective field in column Value which means that it is written to the controller The Prepared value field will be empty again The same can be processed in a watch view containing the desired expression Notice in this context the Prepare Value dialog which is available for currently forced variables and where a new value to be written can be defined Force Values Default Shortcut lt F7 gt ATTENTION Extraordinary changes of variable values in an application currently running on a controller can cause unwanted behavior of the controlled system Evaluate possible dangers before Writing or Forcing of variables and make appropriate security precautions Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered 194 7 Menu Commands This command is available in online mode It effects that one or more variables o
195. ed value must be defined in online mode in one of the following places which are used for monitoring e Ina watch view defined in the project containing a list of variables to be monitored watch list 195 7 Menu Commands e In the online view of the object within the declaration part of the respective editor e In the online view of the object within the implementation part of the FBD LD IL editor A forced value is indicated with a symbol YY Device Application MainPrg Expression Type Value Prepared value Comment iwar INT 0 fbinst FB1 qa fbinst2 FB1 erg INT 100 result bvar BOOL OL i INT 0 Figure 7 108 Forced Values in the Declaration Editor of a POU Online View Prepare Value Dialog Prepare Value Expression Device Application MainPrg bwar Type BOOL Current value TRUE What do you want to do a Prepare a new value for the next write or force operation FALSE Remove preparation with a value 0 Release the force without modifying the value a Release the force and restore the variable to the value it had before forcing it Figure 7 109 Prepare Value Dialog This dialog 1s used to prepare a new value for a variable to remove a prepared value to release a forced variable or to release 1t and additionally reset 1ts value to the one the variable was assigned to before forcing The dialog will open 1f you click in the Prepared Value field of a currently forced val
196. elected the Appearance of the Y axis dialog opens The dialog is also available when you are in the Configuration dialog of the trace 275 8 Editors In both dialogs you define how the trace data will be displayed in the trace diagram That is you define the looking of the coordinate system axes configuration colors grid etc in which the values graphs of the variables will be displayed The appearance settings of the record Edit Appearance dialog are used in the default single channel mode but the appearance settings of the variables Appearance of the Y axis dialog are visible in the multi channel mode Trace Editor in Online Mode Overview The Trace is running like an application on the current device You get indicated an activated Trace sampling by the green color of the Trace object in the devices tree emi we olka 2 p Devices f Projet 5 E ido N X3010 S E PLC Logic E 2 O E un E F J 4 Bill of Materials a Configuration and Consumption 3 Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostic il Library Manager MainPrg PRG S 04 Task Configuration 2 MainTask aj Minhas olor Trace 4 Configuration Bus S E Nx3010 NX3010 56 comi BR com2 3 NETI Figure 8 42 Active Trace in Devices Tree Downloaded Trace For the first use and later after any changes in the trace configuration you have explicitly to download the Trace application in order to activate the t
197. er Basic Configuration P Reset warm S G Resetcold S G Reset origin OSO Simulation S d Table 5 6 Online Menu Debug Menu Commands for controlling the program run on the controller Start Stop and for debugging actions Breakpoints Stepping Writing and Forcing Symbol Command Shoa UCI CS MIN Ca o O IC ToggleBreakpoint oS S O Step Out lt Shift gt lt F10 gt E ames OOOO MENE 9 Be eee ee IEA A ie vts e oros vetas O LA 75 5 User Interface Add All Forces to the Watchlist A eT Display Mode i HA y SCS a NA Oo eoe AE Table 5 7 Debug Menu Tools Menu Commands for opening tools which serve to prepare the environment for working on a project installation of libraries and devices options for editors loading amp saving etc Symbol Command Sorteo E Library Repository VIA f Device Repository A HS O Table 5 8 Tools Menu Window Menu Commands for handling the windows in the user interface arrangement opening closing etc Symbol Command sona O pem O e Previous tor SSCS o Teese cater SOS ase An O ito yor Reset E New Horizont Tab Group TITO O II EE C ICI EE Po o IS IE AE O Previous Pane SS lt n gt lt window title gt application path Icon O woo EA Table 5 9 Window Menu Help Menu Commands for getting online help and information on the programmi
198. ere are two folders for File system objects and Runtime objects F Action types Indented below there are nodes for the four types of actions which might be performed on the particular objects These nodes also just serve for structural purposes Add remove children adding or removing of child objects to an existing object Execute for example start stop application setting breakpoints etc Modify for example downloading application etc View monitoring Objects action targets Below each action type node finally find the targets objects of the action for example Device These object entries are displayed in a tree structure mapping the device tree or the file system Structure NOTE Assigning an access right definition to a father in the objects tree usually means that the children will inherit this definition as long as they do not get an explicit own definition However depending on the device this might be handled differently In any event inheritances are not visualized here in the dialog Permissions This field shows the currently defined user groups Before each group one of the following icons indicates the currently assigned permission concerning the target which is currently selected in the Actions window The action s currently selected in the Actions window are granted for the group The action s currently selected in the Actions window are denied for the group Currently
199. erty Furthermore when creating a new POU the wizard will offer to extend FBs or implement interfaces The new tabular declaration editor also will offer to extend FBs implement interfaces and decorate the entire POU or single declarations with compiler pragmas The input assistant will offer declaration keywords that are used together with object oriented programming EXTENDS etc Device Management Support extended programming features Enable logical device support Enable simplified device handling If activated the user will only See the newest device description version for a particular device the version itself is only displayed at some places for informational purposes Enable repository dialog If activated the menu command Tools Device Repository will be available Otherwise the command Tools Install Device will appear instead providing access to the Install Device dialog Another possibility is to install new device descriptions using the package mechanism If activated the user enables the access to logic devices Off On Off On l Off O o Library Management Enable simplified library handling If activated the following simplifications will apply The user will not be able to save a project as a library The user will not be able to install a project to the library repository The user will not be able to open library projects for editing
200. es beginning with the character describe the name of the parameters of a device mapping or request The subsequent lines contain the values for these parameters In this file the information is separated by semi colon The export file can be imported into an existing project via the import command NOTE The devices which cannot be exported have the Export to CSV option disabled In the these devices will not exported if it is used the option available in the Project menu NOTE This feature is available from the version 1 40 of MasterTool IEC XE to later Import from CSV This command allows you to import one or more devices described in the command generated by the export file To import all the devices described in the file you must use Import from CSV available on the Project menu Partial import occurs when you want to import only a device described in the file For this the device to be imported must be instantiated in the project and its name must match the name of the device described in the file Thus the partial import may occur via CSV Import from CSV on the context menu of the target device By choosing Import from CSV option the Open dialog box appears It is possible to choose the file generated by the export command After selecting the file and clicking Open the import will be started and the devices described in the file will be added to the current project The import will be undone if errors oc
201. es of the application variables on Nexto Start Page Configuration Bus MainPrg X Device Application MainPrg Expression Prepared value Comment ivar ga fbinst erg NM 50 result T H x E a 4 cu T E D ivar 734 ivar 734 1 counter e fbinst in w 10 out 50 Ferg 5 call the function block of FBl type with the input parameter in d output is write in erg REDUAN ds Go hi eA Figure 4 42 Monitoring Expressions and Code Lines 64 4 Quick Start Writing and Forcing Variables You can write or force a Prepared value to variable ivar on the Nexto which means that Ivar will be set to this value at the beginning of the next cycle Perform a double click on the field in column Prepared value enter a desired integer value and leave the field by lt ENTER gt or by a mouse click outside of the field Perform command Write Values and Force Values Debug menu to write or force this value on Nexto You will see the result at once in column Value Using the Watch Views Watch view windows can be used to configure specific sets of watch expressions of the application for example for the purpose of debugging From the View menu use Watch Watch 1 commands The watch window will open In column Expression perform a mouse click in the first line of the table to open an edit frame Enter the complete path for variable ivar which should be monitored De
202. espective online commands to test the application To switch off the simulation mode first log out and then again perform command Simulation The checkmark in front of the command will disappear the target entry in the device tree again will be displayed in normal letters and you can log in to a real device For further information on simulation features and restrictions see Simulation Mode Debug Menu Provides commands to start and stop the program in PLC in addition to running breakpoint features for testing purposes and force values Most of these commands can also be used in simulation mode Available commands Start Stop New Breakpoint Toggle Breakpoint Step Over Step Into Step Out Run to Cursor Set next statement 188 7 Menu Commands Show next statement Write values Force values Unforce values Add All Forces To Watchlist Display Mode Start Symbol Default Shortcut lt F5 gt This command starts the application program on the device PLC Stop Symbol E Default Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F8 gt This command stops the application program on the device PLC Breakpoints The category Breakpoints provides commands for handling breakpoints for debugging purposes These commands allow adding removing or changing the breakpoints Symbols indicating the breakpoints status Breakpoint enabled Breakpoint disabled 2 Stop at breakpoint in online mode 63 Br
203. ess Settings TI Method PureStat a F Automatic Stop Start Figure 8 93 Window Autosetup Through the window Autosetup it is possible perform the procedure of tuning the PID controller parameters using the method of synthesis For the application of this method 1t is necessary to be known the parameters of a first order system that represents the process In this way 1t 1s necessary that these parameters are identified by conducting an experiment in open loop controlled by an operator This experiment consists of applying a step signal to the process and wait for the steady state response See below the necessary steps to perform the auto tuning procedure In the Tf field is configured the time constant in desired closed loop It is important to emphasize that the synthesis method does not produce good results when Tf lt Tc lt 10 and when Tc Tde Sample Time 2 lt 10 Where Tc and Tde correspond to the time constant and the transport delay of the process and SampleTime is the range of application of PID On the Step field you can configure the step in percentage that is applied to the process in the experiment In other words the signal applied at the output of the controller will be corresponding to MV MV Step In the field Method the user can select between two methods to perform the identification of process parameters The first of them PureStat uses only statistical information while the second PolySt
204. ey only zooms along the x axis The same can be done with the numpad key and key while pressing the lt SHIFT gt key e Scrolling the mouse wheel while pressing the lt CTRL gt key only zooms along the y axis The same can be done with the numpad key and key while pressing the lt CTRL gt key All keyboard shortcuts listed in Shortcuts for Trace Reset Visualization Symbol a This command restores the default settings of the graphics appearance after the it have been changed by a zoom action for example The default settings are defined in the Configuration dialog Compress Symbol With this command the values shown for the Sampling Trace are compressed 1 e after this command you can view the progression of the trace variables within a larger time frame A multiple execution of the command is possible This command is the counterpart to Stretch Stretch Symbol With this command you can stretch zoom the values of the Sampling Trace that are shown With repeated stretches that follow one after another the trace section displayed in the window will increasingly shrink in size This command is the counterpart to Compress Multi Channel With this command it is able to change the view of the trace diagram Default view is a diagram with one x and y axis and all variables are visualized there In multi channel view every variable is visualized in its own diagram but with identical x Axis Zooming and Scrolling
205. f the currently active application are permanently set to user defined values in the PLC The setting will be done both at the beginning and at the end of a cycle The Figure 7 107 presents the sequence of processing in acycle of application program Read inputs 1 Force values 2 Process code 3 Force values 4 Write outputs 5 Figure 7 107 Sequence of processing in a cycle If a forced variable has its value changed during the code execution 3 its value will keep changed until the follow force values process This kind of situation can generate some inconsistences during the logic monitoring It happens because the monitored value can be different of the real one used by the application program since the communication is treated only in the end of CPU sequence of processing The forcing will remain active until it is explicitly suspended by the user for particular and for all variables or until the application gets logged out ATTENTION The forcing operation does not actuate in I or Q operands updated with the functions REFRESH_INPUT and REFRESH_OUTPUT These functions execute a read to I operands or a written from Q operands after executing them and they do not consider the forcing effects For this reason it is not recommended forcing operand that have been updated by the functions REFRESH_INPUT and REFRESH OUTPUT that are actitives in the application program To prepare variables for forcing the desir
206. figuration and bus consumption list is available in the device tree for any project created from the MasterTool Standard Project The list displays all configured devices on the bus with your type description and the individual identifier of each device on the bus In addition it provides information about the consumption of each one of them and the current balance of the project on the basis of the source model used The information and consumption configuration can also be printed As the rack model does not have an individual ID beyond the one displayed at the top of the screen the Name field does not present a value for this device The same goes for the visualization of power consumption in the Edit screen of the power supplies Programming Language Editors For details see Programming Language Editors CFC SFC ST FBD LD IL in IEC 61131 Programming Manual Declaration Editor The textual declaration editor serves to create the declaration part of a POU object It can be supplemented by a tabular view Any modification made in one of the views always is immediately applied to the other one Depending on the current settings in the Declaration editor options either only the textual or only the tabular view will be available or you can switch between both via buttons Textual Tabular at the right border of the editor window Usually the declaration editor is used in combination with the programming language editors that means it wil
207. forces Display Mode These commands can be used to choose which of the following formats should be used for the monitoring display Perform a mouse click on the desired option in the Display Mode submenu The currently set option is marked by a tick e Binary e Decimal e Hexadecimal Tools Menu This menu provides commands for installation uninstallation of libraries and devices customization and project options environment editors etc Available commands Library Repository Install Library Device Repository Install Device Options Library Repository Symbol it The Library Repository is accessed through the Tools menu and opens the Library Repository dialog NOTE The Library Repository dialog is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Professional or the option Enable repository dialog is enabled For further information about features see Features 198 7 Menu Commands NOTE The Library Repository dialog which can also be accessed through the editor of Library Manager will be available depending on the type of the installation A repository of libraries is the database for libraries that have been installed on the local system aiming at a later inclusion in projects of MasterTool IEC XE A library project library stored in a repository cannot be opened out of this for editing or viewing 1 rammer Til Library Repository Location System Edit Locations C ProgramD
208. g 5 OUT O MainPrg 58 007 CO MainPrg 59 0UT AA e e a O MainPrg 510 0LIT A A AAA C MainPrg D IN ob toe eee Le elds tte rar Meter cies NOME O snes 5 MainPrg B ENABLE see ee ae ea esse oe es Fences seca noe ee seca sea cen aac enar eaeeee cee dea eee C3 MainPrg 53 AMPLITUDE A A aE e ORI E CI MainPra iSoecialSinus Add Variable o n F EEES Delete Variable A e Visible aaa aaa aaa alaaa ii Appearance CET SO bh in Aaa OE EEE EE E E EE S EE EE E esasi Wy eR o el Configuration TRd4md5so40me Te4mdbs340mz Tr4mdbs540mz Tr 4mdr 340m2 Figure 8 32 Trace Editor Window in Online Mode The Figure 8 32 shows an example of tracing in online mode Four variables have been selected for display in the variables tree in the right part of the dialog In the context menu of this part of the window see the commands available to add or delete variables to set them visible to change the appearance or to reach the configuration dialog Commands and Zoom Functionality For working in the Trace Editor in offline and in online mode there are commands available in the Trace menu as well as in the trace window The Trace menu provides commands for operating the trace graph With focus on the diagram in the trace window the context menu provides the trace menu commands too The trace configuration with trigger setting and the variable selection can only 266 8 Editors be done in the context menu of the right p
209. g 54 QUT ma MainPrg 55 OUT ma MainPrg B QUT Warning minimum color sa MainPrg S OUT ma MainPrg 58 OUT ma MainPrg S9 OUT Activate maximum warning ma MainPrg s10 QUT ma MainPrg C TP ma MainPro B ENABLE Warning maximum color ma MainPrg 53 AMPLITUD E sa MainPro ispecialSinus Appearance ma MainPrg enum ee ee Critical lower limit Critical upper limit Add Variable Delete Variable Figure 8 40 Trace Configuration Variable Settings For the trace record you must define the variables to be traced and to be displayed in the record coordinate system In order to add a variable to the record use button Add Variable bottom part of the window in the left part of the Trace Configuration window In the right part of the window now the Variable Settings dialog will appear and at the same time an empty variable entry will be added in the record tree Define the variable Variable Enter here the name path of the variable to be traced Beside of data variables it is possible to trace the content of pointers properties references or ARRAY elements The Input Assistant can be used in order to get a valid entry Check and edit the current configuration settings see below The variable will be immediately entered in the trace tree To modify the variable settings later just select the variable entry in the trace tree and use the Variable Settings dialog again Graph color From the given color selection list choose a col
210. g Register Mask AND 16 bits Holding Register Mask OR 16 bits Input Register 16 bits Input Status 1 bit Data Start o MODBUS data size UN 1 to 65536 Range of addresses of the Table 8 28 Mappings on MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Requests Configuration The MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping request configuration seen on Figure 8 66 follow the parameters described on Table 8 29 294 8 Editors Read Data Read Data Read Data Write Data Write Data Write Data Start Address Start Address Range Diagnostics Variable Type NXMODBUS_DIAGNOSTIC_STRUCTS T_DIAG_MODBUS_ETH_MAPPING_1 Generate Diagnostics Variables Generate Disabling Variables Figure 8 66 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Requests Screen Configuration Description Default Possibilities 01 Coils Reading 02 Input Status Reading 03 Holding Registers Reading 04 Input Registers Reading Function Code MODBUS function type poe A 06 Register Writing 15 Multiple Coils Writing 16 Multiple Registers Writing 22 Register Mask Writing 23 Multiple Register Reading Writing Polling ms Communication period ms 100 O to 3600000 1 to 65536 Read Data Start Initial address for the Address MODBUS reading data Read Data Size Data size for the MODBUS reading Range of addresses for the IEEE A DATSE MODBUS data reading Write Data Start Initial address for the Address MODBUS writ
211. g with OK the modifications will be loaded and immediately shown in the online view monitoring of the respective object s e Login with download Activate this option if the application project should be compiled and loaded completely e Login without any change Activate this option in order to keep the program running on the controller unchanged Afterwards an explicit download might be done thus loading the complete application project or at the next re login you will be asked again whether an online change should be done Via the Details button in the login dialog you can get some information Project name Last modification IDE version Author Description on the currently concerned application within the IDE integrated development version programming system in comparison to that currently available on the PLC Application Information Application in the IDE Application in the PLC Untided113 Untided113 Friday July 20 2012 10 09 AM Friday July 20 2012 10 08 AM MasterTool IEC XE MasterTool IEC XE Figure 3 4 Application Information Dialog If other applications are currently available on the PLC you will get additional dialog boxes on how to handle the situation For a description please see Login 2 By using the command Online Change lt application gt Online menu you can explicitly perform an online change on a particular application 27 3 Concepts and Basic Components Regard that online change of a m
212. ge view in category Build lists among the usual information on the download process also the changed interfaces the concerned variables and all objects for which new code has been generated If data locations change a message box will hint at possible problems referring to the use of pointers Notice that an online change automatically will be offered when you are going to log in on a PLC with an application program which is already running there but has been modified since the last download source download to connected device This command is used to create and transfer a file from the current project for any device The command opens the Select Device dialog where the user must choose the network path to the PLC as in the Communication Settings dialog Select the corresponding item in the devices tree and press OK This will set up a connection with the device and the source code will be sent in the form of a file The source code can be reloaded for the programmer in offline mode through the command Source Upload on the File menu The default settings for the target device content and time for sending the source code are set in the Project Settings category Source Download 186 7 Menu Commands Configuration of Basic Cluster This command allows the user to configure whether the CPU connected will be configured as PLC A PLC B or Non Redundant You can also configure whether there will be project synchronization between
213. ght be set back because an un ambiguous conversion is not possible At boxes jumps or returns the symbol for the negation is a small circle at the respective input or output connection A negated contact in LD is indicated by a slash in the contact symbol hyarl j Figure 7 75 Negated Contact To negate a contact or coil select the element cursor positions 8 resp 9 and use the command Notice that the ToolBox in category Ladder Elements provides negated contact elements for inserting by drag amp drop To negate an input or output put the cursor according to cursor positions 2 or 4 To negate a jump or RETURN instruction select the last preceding output cursor position 4 To cancel the negation of an element use the same cursor positions and also perform the Negate command 162 7 Menu Commands Edge Detection Symbol FBD E LD Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt E gt This command is used in FBD or LD to insert an edge detection element at a boolean input This corresponds to inserting a R_TRIG function block for detecting a rising edge FALSE gt TRUE respectively a F_TRIG function block for detecting a falling edge TRUE gt FALSE When the command is performed repeatedly at the same insert position the inserted element will toggle between rising edge detection T falling edge detection and none biH Lvar O 1Var Figure 7 76 Edge Detection at SEL Operator In this example an Edge Det
214. greement for Software E This software belongs exclusively to Altus Sistemas de utoma o 5_A and t was developed to meet your needs with IMPORTANT This ts a hondine contract Unon installation a I accept the agreement 5 I do not accept the agreement Figure 9 3 License Screen It will appear a screen with information regarding the MasterTool IEC XE new version that have just been installed 5 Setup MasterTool IEC XE Lo O aaa Please read the following important information before continuing x Be When you are ready to continue with Setup dick Next IMasterTool IEC XE MT8500 Version 1 40 Changed the installer based in Microsoft InstallShield to installer based in Inno Setup This change reduces the installation time Added MODBUS devices with mappings of symbolic variables Added Import Export command to CSW files This command imports or exports the project configurations Added Import Export support to the MODBUS Symbolic drivers E aloalo l ee ee ee ld MIRTA A r a ee i IEA AS Figure 9 4 Version Information Screen 318 9 Installation On the next screen it is possible to define whether or not a shortcut on the Desktop will be created Select the desired option then press Next to continue if Setup MasterTool IEC XE Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform whi
215. gs A further editor window will open for the new function block FB1 Declare there in the same way as done for MainPrg the following variables FUNCT TON BLOCK FB1 VAR INPUT Las TNT 62 4 Quick Start END VAR VAR OUTPUT out INT END VAR VAR ivartiNis 2 END VAR In the implementation part of the editor enter the following Sut in ivar Define the Resources for Running and Controlling the Program on Nexto Start Gateway Server The Gateway Server is started automatically at system start as a service Make sure that there is an icon X in the system tray indicating that the gateway is running If the icon 1s looking like 4 the gateway is currently stopped This icon is part of the GatewaySysTray program which is available for controlling and monitoring the Gateway service It provides a menu with a Start Gateway and Stop Gateway commands thus allowing the user to stop or restart the service manually The menu also includes the command Exit Gateway SysTray which just terminates the GatewaySysTray program not however the Gateway service The GatewaySysTray program is started automatically when Windows is started however it also can be started manually via the Programs menu Start Nexto simulation The simulation device PLC MasterTool IEC XE SP Win is available as a service at system start It is represented by an icon in the system tray Mil for status stopped ii for status running If allowed b
216. h the suggested names for the respective programs may or not be followed To ensure compatibility of a project to a certain profile throughout development we use two approaches e MasterTool IEC XE only allows the creation of projects based on a template by selecting at the same time the profile to be used e Incode generation MasterTool IEC XE checks all the rules defined for the valid profile to the project The next sections detail the features or patterns of each profile which follow a graduated scale of complexity Based on these definitions it is recommendable that the user always uses the simplest profile which attends his applications needs If the profile corresponding rules turns more into barriers than didactic simplifications it 1s time to user go to a sophisticated profile The programming tool allows the profile alteration of an existing project see Updating an Old Project but it is up to the developer make the necessary adjustments in order to the project gets compatible to the new selected profile In the Single project profile the application has only the MainTask user task This task 1s responsible for the execution of a single Program unit called MainPrg This single program can call other programming units from the Program Function or Function Block type but all user code will be executed exclusively by the MainTask In this profile the MainTask is cyclic with priority fixed in 13 thirteen and executes exclu
217. he currently reached step position Breakpoints A breakpoint set in an application program will cause a break during the execution of the program The possible breakpoint positions depend on the editor In each case there is a breakpoint at the end of a POU See Breakpoint for a description of the commands concerning breakpoints Stepping Stepping allows a controlled execution of an application program e g for debugging purposes Basically you step from one instruction to the next one by repeated use of the key lt F10 gt but also the user can step over POUs which are called e The next statement to be executed can be explicitly defined Set next Statement e The next execution break can be defined simply by placing the cursor there Run to Cursor e Step Out steps back to the previous caller See Breakpoint for a description of the stepping commands Symbols used in text editors Current step position indicated by a yellow arrow before the respective line and a yellow shadow behind the concerned operation 29 3 Concepts and Basic Components e Wart erg 0 fbinst ic gt IF bvarFALsE THEW ivari 45 23 ELSE ivarl 45 45 Mi TE i Im om 2 Ww hs Figure 3 5 Step Into Printing The currently active editor view can be printed by using the Print commands Regard also the possibility to create a documentation of several or all objects of the project with a defined layout and a table of
218. he execution of auto tuning procedure see Auto Tuning Procedure The field View Options is used to control the view of the values of the parameters and variables The possible values are e Raw displays the values such that is in PLC e Percent displays the values in percentage in the range of 0 to 100 within the range of minimum and maximum values of the parameter or variable e Engineering displays the values in the form of engineering scale set to the parameter or variable The fields affected by the view options are SP PV MV ManualMV DeadBand MaxVarMV and Bias These fields are affected only when displayed in the text box The trend chart and the bar graphs are always shown in percentage The engineering unit displayed next to the text box of the fields also changes according to the selection of the field View Options showing the engineering unit if configured in percentage or nothing if the option is Raw For the MV ManualMV MaxVarMV and Bias fields does not make sense to view in engineering scale In this case it will be displayed as a percentage The Save button saves on file CSV current controller settings The Load button reads from the file CSV with previously saved settings and loads them into the controller The Save and Load buttons allow saving and loading controller parameters for example after a PLC maintenance procedure To load controller parameters that were previously stored in a CSV file cl
219. he INI operator Exit Method Output variables in function and method calls VAR_TEMP VAR_STAT VAR_RETAIN VAR_PERSISTENT Arbitrary expressions for variable initialization Assignments expression Index access with pointers and strings New User Management and Access Rights Concept User accounts user groups group specific rights for access and actions on particular objects Features in Editors ST Editor Editing resources Line break Autocomplete Inline Monitoring and Inline set reset assignment FBD LD and IL are reversible and programmable in a combined editor IL editor is a table editor LD FBD IL editor Main output in boxes with multiple outputs can be changed LD FBD IL editor no automatic update of box parameters LD FBD IL editor branches and networks within networks SFC editor only one step type macros multiple selections of independent elements no syntactic check during editing automatic declaration of flag variables Library Versions Multiple versions can be used in the same project using the context resource Installation in repositories automatic update and debugging Additional Functionalities Configurable menus toolbar and keyboard usage Customer specific components might be plugged in PLC Configuration and Task Configuration integrated in devices tree UNICODE support Single line comments Watchdog Multiple selection in the project object tree Online help integrated in the user interfac
220. he Watch command submenu by default in the View menu It provides an editor for creating watch lists A watch list can be used to define and monitor a list of expressions of various objects and to write or force values to those expressions on the controller in online mode By default four individual watch lists can be set up in the watch views Watch 1 Watch 2 Watch 3 Watch 4 The Watch All Forces option in online mode always gets filled automatically with all currently forced values of the active application 277 8 Editors Create Watchlist To set up a Watch lt n gt list in the watch view perform a mouse click in a field of the Expression column to open an edit frame Enter the complete path for the desired watch expression Syntax for watch expression lt device name gt lt application name gt lt object name gt lt variable name gt Example Device Application MainPrg ivar as shown in Figure 8 44 The type of the variable will be indicated by an icon input output and normal If a comment has been added to the declaration of a variable it will be displaced in column Comment After having closed the edit frame the Type will be added automatically in column Type The Value column will be used in online mode for displaying the current value of the expression To appoint a prepared value to a variable you may click in the assigned field of the column Prepared Value and directly type in the desired value
221. he instance execution Ea SE within the cycle without considering its own execution time Possibilities 20 to 100 ay Be Delay for the answer transmission po 0 to 65535 Minimum Minimum silence time between Interframe diferenti rames 3 5 to 100 0 chars Table 8 20 MODUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping Advanced Configurations Mapping Configuration The mapping configuration of MODUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping seen on Figure 8 59 follow the parameters described on Table 8 21 288 8 Editors Figure 8 59 Mapping Screen of MODUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping Configuration II CT Possibilities Coil 1 bit Input Status 1 bit Data Type MODBUS data type yP yP Holding Register 16 bits Input Register 16 bits Data Start MODBUS data quantity O BBB Data Range Range of addresses of the configured data Table 8 21 Mapping Configuration on MODUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mapping MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Q By adding the MODBUS RTU Ethernet Client for Direct Representation protocol the following screen will be shown 289 8 Editors Figure 8 60 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities TCP RTU via TCP Protocol Protocol selection TCP Diagnosis variables Any address of Q area limited according to CPU used Sie Diagnosis area size 20 20 Table 8 22 Diagnostic Initial Address Q Start
222. he online help You can enter the string to be searched in the Look For field The following search options can be set e Search in titles only The string will only be searched in the titles of the help pages e Display partial matches If the option is activated the string will also be found if it is part of another string Example log will be also be detected in dialog whereas if the option is deactivated log will only be detected if used in the help text as a separate string log e Limit to matches The number of matches which should be detected and reported in the Search result window can be limited 228 7 Menu Commands The list of help pages containing the searched string will be displayed in the Search Results window which will open automatically Contact Support This command opens the Altus web site directly on the technical support page Update Software License This command opens a dialog box where you can change the company name serial number and software key Documentation It allows accessing the MasterTool IEC XE documentation Available commands e Technical Specifications e Programming Manual e User Manual Technical Specifications This command opens the default web browser to the Technical Specifications document on its most current version available on Altus website Programming Manual This command opens the default web browser with the Programming Manual on
223. he previous version the network element is also used in the IL editor NOTE The display of the elements in a LD FBD IL network is defined in the FBD LD and IL Editor Toggle Network Comment State Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt O gt This command can be used in FBD LD or IL editor to comment out a network to set it back from comment to normal state The command will effect the network in which the cursor is currently positioned A commented out network will be displayed according to the options set for comments and will not be noticed in program processing 151 7 Menu Commands ivarl erg ivars ivari erg ivar Insert Assignment Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt A gt This command is used to place an assignment in a LD FBD or IL editor Depending on the selected position insertion takes place directly in front of a selected input directly after a selected output or if a whole network or sub network is selected at the end of the network or sub network In FBD the assignment is inserted as a line followed by in LD it is represented by a coil and pere PP Assignment in LD 22 Assignment in FBD Figure 7 64 Assignment in LD FBD To define the assignment select the and replace it by the name of the variable that is to be assigned The Input Assistant can be used for this purpose In IL an assignment is programmed via the LD and ST
224. hic editors In order to paste the content of the clipboard you use the Paste command In order to copy a selection onto the clipboard without deleting it use the Copy command In order to remove a selected area without changing the clipboard use the Delete command Ea Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt C gt or lt CTRL gt lt INS gt This command copies the current selection to the clipboard This does not change the contents of the editor window In tree structures as for example in the POUs view this applies to the selected object Multiple selection is possible Remember that not all editors support the Copy command and that its use can be limited in some editors For this selection type the same is true as for the Cut command In order to paste the content of the clipboard you use the Paste command In order to delete a selected area and simultaneously put it on the clipboard use the Cut command Symbol El Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt V gt or lt SHIFT gt lt INS gt 99 Delete Select All 7 Menu Commands This command pastes the content of the clipboard onto the current position in the editor window Pasting is not supported by all editors and its use might be limited In graphic editors the command is only supported if a correct structure will result from the insertion Multiple selection is possible Depending on the current position for example in the devices tree a dialog might be o
225. hich was most recently executed in the currently open editor or view window Repeated use undoes all actions back to the time that the window was opened This applies to all actions in the editors for POUs data types visualizations and global variables With the Redo command the user can restore an action which you have undone before Redo Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt Y gt 98 Clipboard Cut Copy Paste 7 Menu Commands With this command in the currently opened editor or view window an action can be restored which has been undone Undo before The command category Clipboard provides the usual functions to manage contents between the project and the clipboard Available commands Cut Copy Paste Delete Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt X gt or lt SHIFT gt lt DELETE gt This command transfers the current selection object entry string to the clipboard The selection is removed from the editor and object tree In tree structures which are used to organize objects as for example in the POUs view this applies to the selected object Multiple selection is possible Remember that not all editors support the Cut command and that its use can be limited in some editors The form of the selection depends upon the respective editor For example it is a string or character in text editor s resp might be one or several elements surrounded by a selection frame in grap
226. his command is used to create a new project with the aid of dialog New Project 88 7 Menu Commands q New Project Categories Templates 13 General Y Empty Library MasterTool Standard Project Creates a new project automatically induding the corresponding CPU and selected POUs and Tasks Name Test Location Ci Temp h Figure 7 1 New Project e Categories The available categories of templates and project wizards are offered in a tree structure If a category is selected the assigned templates and wizards will be displayed in the Templates list on the right side e Templates This is a list of all templates wizards belonging to the category currently selected in the Categories tree on the left side A template determines the base configuration of a project file There is a model MasterTool Standard Project project that automatically provides the CPU and inserted devices POUs and tasks according to user choices There is also a model for Empty Library library e Name Name of the project to be created The default name is specified by the currently selected template wizard and includes a numeric suffix guaranteeing the uniqueness within the file system for example Unbekannt1 You can edit the entry considering the file path conventions of the operating system It should not be used for special characters and should be subject to the maximum limit of 200 characters Optionally you can add an extens
227. hortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt V gt This command branches the current execution line within a network in FBD LD The current line will be split into two sub networks An additional line will be drawn below the existing one In online mode the two subnetworks after a branching point will be executed one after the other from up to down If you drag the branch element from the toolbox or another position within the network you will get indicated all possible insert positions by grey position markers A branch can be inserted at the input connectors of boxes which are not positioned in a sub network at the output connectors of a box 1f that is not connected also indirectly to the input of another box within a sub network at the connector between contacts and coils cursor position 10 or at a contact A branch cannot be inserted inside of OR in contacts groups and inside of multiple assignment groups Each subnetwork gets an own marker an upstanding rectangle symbol which serves for selecting the sub network For information on cursor positions see the corresponding item in IEC 61131 Programming Manual Figure 7 78 Sub network Markers in FBD Network Each subnetwork can get another branching thus multiple branches and thus a widely ramified construction of sub networks is possible within the main network For adding branches to branches see the commands Insert Branch above and Insert Branch bel
228. hould be opened Edit Object with This command works like Edit Object but must be used in devices that can be opened in more than one editor Project Information Symbol i This command opens the Project Information dialog where you can view and define properties and information on the project file e g access attributes version number author and company information as well as Statistics concerning the project objects Notice the possibility of external access on project information data via property keys and automatically generated functions Four tabs are available for the information categories File Summary Properties and Statistics 126 File 7 Menu Commands Project Information Name Project project Location C Temp Size 639 42 KB 705 967 bytes MS DOS name C Temp PROJEC 1 PRO Created Monday July 23 2012 1 56 38 PM Changed Monday July 23 2012 4 23 06 PM Last access Monday July 23 2012 1 56 38 PM Attributes Read only Hidden Archive System Last saved with MasterTool IEC XE Automatically generate POUs for property access Figure 7 35 Project Information Dialog File Here the following properties of the project file are displayed Name Location Size MS DOS name Created Changed Last access and Last saved with Further on the currently set file attributes are shown Read only Hidden by default not visible in Explorer Archive ready for archiving System system file
229. hout modifying the value Unforce all selected Expressions and restore the variable to the value it had before forcing it Comment 4 Device Application MainP INT x F Device Application MainP INT F 50 Device Application MainP INT 10597 Figure 8 46 Watch All Forces MODBUS Editor To add a MODBUS device just click with the right mouse button on the communication port that you want to enable the Protocol and choose the option Add Device 279 8 Editors A screen will open where the MODBUS are available for the selected communication port now simply choose the desired option and click Add The MODBUS for symbolic mapping devices are available from the version 1 40 of MasterTool IEC XE to later In order to use them properly the Nexto UCP version 1 3 0 20 or later is necessary MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation Q By adding the MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation Q the following screen will appear Remove Edit Read Data Start Write Data Start s j j Ts Read Data Size Read IEC Variable Ceres Write Data Size Write IEC Variable Figure 8 47 MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation Screen Q Start Address of Initial address for the Any address of Q Diagnostics Area diagnosis variables area limited according to CPU used Table 8 9 Initial Address for Diagnosis on MODBUS Master for Direct Representation 280 Figure 8 48 8 Editors W
230. i s les 1 VAR GLOBAL El gt a Device NX3010 2 DG_MODBUS Symbol Client diagnostics variable J S E PLcLogic 3 DG_MODBUS Symbol Client T_DIAG MODBUS ETH CLIENT 1 Spa O Application 4 DG_MODBUS Symbol RTU Master diagnostics variable E E E Bill of Materials z DG_MODBUS Symbol_RTU Master T_DIAG MODBUS RTU MASTER 1 E B Configuration and Consumption 6 DG_MODBUS Symbol RTU Slave diagnostics variable E 7 DG_MODBUS Symbol_RTU_ Slave T_DIAG MODBUS RTU_SLAVE_1 F E8 A 8 DG_MODBUS Symbol Server diagnostics variable E Diagnostics 3 DG_MODBUS Symbol Server T_DIAG MODBUS ETH SERVER 1 Disables 10 DG_NX3010 diagnostics variable ReqDiagnostics 11 DG_NX3010 AT 3QB21000 T_DIAG NX3010 1 iH Library Manager ae DG_MODBUS Client diagnostics variable E MainPrg PRG 13 DG_MODBUS Client AT 30821520 T_DIAG MODBUS ETH CLIENT 1 a Task Configuration 14 DG_MODBUS Server diagnostics variable 2 MainTack 15 DG_MODBUS Server AT QB21540 T_DIAG MODBUS ETH SERVER 1 Configuration Bus 16 DG_NX5001 diagnostics variable Cs 17 DG_NX5001 AT QB21560 T_DIAG NXS5001 1 8 is ee oaen 18 DG_PO5063 diagnostics variable o 8 NX5001 NX5001 19 DG_PO5063 AT QB21646 T DIAG PO5063_1 4 pososs PO5063 20 DG_PO1000 16DI 24 Vdc Opto Coupled diagnostics variable P01000_16D1_24_Vdc_Opto_Coupled PO 21 DG_PO1000_16DI 24 Vdc Opto Coupled AT QB21671 T_DIAG P01000 1 F Y COM1 22 DG_NX1001 diagnostics variable MODBUS_Symb
231. iagnostic_Structs 1 0 0 1 Details LibNextoNet LibNextoNet 1 1 0 11 WAA 18 Standard 3 4 4 0 System Standard Ti Ta cC E TarkiEr 2479 ftounoctorm h E 2 lecsfc lecSfc 3 4 2 0 System 7k Bl owt Bb a LibMNextoMet Library repository El fibnextone Inputs Cutputs ad GlobalDefines METHOD Creat Datastructures Fes Name Type Inherited from Address Initial Comment Common F CreateSocket RTS_IEC_ RESULT E Nextonet 4 Protocol PROTOCOL Lu CreateSocket 4 pSocketld POINTER TO WORD En Destroy z Ry GetSocket Inputs Outputs Graphical Documentation FR Initialize AR Interfaceld Fay isValidSodket A NICTeamingActve Ey NICTeamingPosition 54 Poll BR psPastDiagnostcs Fy Registeret EP ReleaseSocket ser Status CreateSocket Inputs Qutputs Graphical Documentation METHOD CreateSocket Type Inherited from Address Initial Comment RTS _JEC RESULT PROTOCOL POINTER TO WORD Figure 8 22 Library Manager Editor Structure of the Editor Window The upper part of the dialog displays the libraries currently included in the project The following information is provided Name Title Version and optionally Company name as it has been specified in the Summary dialog of the Project Information of the library during its creation e Namespace The default setting for the namespace of a library is lt libraryname gt except the library explicitly has got another namespac
232. ication settings of the respective device Available commands Login Logout Create boot application Logoff current online user Download Online Change Source download to connected device Cluster Basic Configuration Reset warm Reset cold Reset origin Simulation Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt F8 gt This command connects the application to the target device PLC or simulation target and thus changes into the online mode For a login with the current active application the code generation must have been completed without errors and the Communication Settings of the device must be configured correctly If the communication settings are not yet set properly then a dialog box will appear asking you whether you want to set the active path by one of the following options or to cancel the login operation e Option 1 Yes The communication settings dialog should be opened and a network scan performed automatically If the device recently defined in any project as active path this information is stored on your local system is found then this device will automatically be set to be the active one e Option 2 No The communication dialog should be opened without any further automatically executed configuration action You have to configure the active path manually If the Login command 1s called from the Online menu the currently active application will be concerned If the command is called from the c
233. ick the Load button After the selection of the desired CSV file a small window Figure 8 84 will be presented to the user allowing parameters loading procedure The values of parameters can be saved and loaded into PID Control object By pressing the OK button the parameters marked will be automatically loaded into the PLC reconfiguring the controller 310 8 Editors W Load Parameters PID Parameters Raw Values DeadBand 0 00 4 MaxVarMV 0 00 Bias 0 00 Ei Ei 57 E Figure 8 84 Parameters Selection Window Write Parameters Operation The writing or editing operation of PID controller parameters in PLC is performed from the Write button located in the Online Settings group The background of the fields of Online Settings group that allow editing when they change their values pass to the blue color and the font to white This indicates that the value of the parameter or variable has been modified and the new value has not yet been sent to the PLC By pressing the button Write all parameters and variables in this condition and with no error messages are sent to the PLC and the background and font colors are restored SP me Kof cm2 MV 0 00 55 Figure 8 85 Parameters Editing Example The Figure 8 85 demonstrates that the fields SP GP TI and TD have changed but have not yet had their new values sent to the PLC Notice that the 77 field displays an error message because its value is negative the e
234. igure 7 133 Options Dialog Category Monitoring Enable inline monitoring Activate deactivate inline monitoring Monitoring foreground color From the selection list choose a color for the writing in the monitoring fields Monitoring background color From the selection list choose a color for the background of the monitoring fields Flow control foreground From the selection list choose a foreground color of flow control color fields Flow control background From the selection list choose a color for the background of color flow control fields Define how much decimal places digits should be maximum Float precision i i displayed in case of floating values String length Define the number of characters maximum displayed in Sample ss Preview of the currently defined monitoring settings bFALSE FALSE Table 7 6 Monitoring Fields Foreground color Black Background color Peach 2 digits Float precision String length 2 characters Figure 7 134 Example of Inline Monitoring in ST Editor FBD LD and IL Editor This dialog of Options enables user to perform settings for editing in editors FBD LD and IL 219 ffi CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor FBD LD and IL editor Features ad International Settings Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Text editor View E Show network title E Show network comment Show box icon E Sh
235. iles on the Host are displayed in the right part that on the Runtime system In order to update the Runtime file list use button If you want to create a new folder where the file should be copied use button a If you want to delete the currently selected file use button gt 248 8 Editors In the Location selection fields of Host and Runtime each enter the appropriate directories between which one or several files should be transferred This is to be done via the selection list at the entry field or via browsing in the file system tree The files to be copied have to be selected in the file system tree Multiple selection is possible also a folder can be selected in order to get copied all contained files For transferring the selected files to the defined host or runtime system directory use button gt gt and lt lt To transfer in this context means to copy So if a file is not yet available in the target directory it will be created also there If however already a file with the given name is available and is not write protected this will be overwritten In case of write protection an appropriate message will be generated This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor and serves to view the events which have been logged on the runtime system in the programming system This concerns Events at system start or shutdown loaded components and their versions Application download and boot
236. imum Number of Tasks The maximum number of tasks the user can create is only defined for the Custom profile the only one which has this permission The others already have their tasks created and configured For additional information on the maximum IEC task quantity per CPU and project profile see User Manual Nexto Series CPUs NX3010 NX3020 and NX3030 MU214605 CPU Configuration The Nexto CPU configuration is based on the action of structuring the diagnostics area the retentive and persistent memory area and hot swap mode among other parameters The user must double click on the Nexto CPU in the device tree and configure the field as described in the Editors chapter of this manual 42 4 Quick Start oe NX30 x proiect MasterToo XE Fie Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help oo a PRI Devices StartPage Configuration Bus 2 MainTask ff NX3010 NADA S f Device Nx3010 General Parameters Bus Interrupt Configuration PLCLogic Diagnostics Area CPU Parameters 0 Application Q Start Address Start User Application after a Watchdog Reset EA Bill of Materiais 21458 O O Configuration and Consumption 3 Hot Swap Mode Diagnostic Explorer Enabled without startup consistency Diagnostics Used range QB21458 QB21946 fi Library Manager E MainPra PRG E Pou PRG pe Task Configuration R2 Configuration i ACK Delay x10 ms 2 MainTask 10 o ueg pnposa
237. in each of the branches of the parallel connection select one of the contact elements multiselection while keeping pressed the lt CTRL gt KEY and then use the command 159 7 Menu Commands select b1 and b2 keeping the lt CTRL key pressed x i Use Insert Contact command 1 az az2 a HE b2 b22 lA H al all bl Hll 1H H Figure 7 73 Inserting Contacts Notice also the commands Insert Contact right Insert Contact Parallel above Insert Contact Parallel below A new contact element is preset with the text You can select this text by a mouse click and replace it by the name or address depending on the current settings in the FBD LD and IL Options dialog of the desired variable or the desired constant The Input Assistant can be used for this purpose Insert Negated Contact Symbol 41 This command is used to insert a negated contact Alternatively a combination of the commands Insert Contact and Negation can be used to insert a negated contact Insert Contact right Symbol 4 Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt D gt This command inserts a contact in a LD network The same 1s valid as for command Insert Contact except that the new element will not be inserted left but right to the current cursor position in line Insert Contact Parallel below Symbol t r Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt R gt This command inserts a contact parallel to the marked position in the network The s
238. in the POUs view Start Page Configuration Bus te DUT ro 1 r PE DUT 3 2 STRUCT 3 ivar INT z bvar BOOL 5 END STRUCT Figure 8 19 DUT Editor Window 250 8 Editors FBD LD IL Editor A combined editor is available for editing POUs in the languages FBD Function Block Diagram LD Ladder Diagram and IL Instruction List This means a common set of commands and elements is used and an automatic internal conversion between the three languages is done In offline mode the programmer always can switch to one of the other editor views Notice anyway that there are some special elements which cannot get converted and thus will only be displayed in the appropriate language For further details see FBD LD IL Editor Commands In addition there are some constructs which cannot get converted unambiguously between IL and FBD and therefore will be normalized at a conversion back to FBD This concerns Negation of expressions and explicit implicit output assignments The editor will open in a bipartite window when editing an object programmed in FBD LD IL the upper part containing a declaration editor The programming language for a new object is specified when creating the object via command Add Object For further information see the IEC 61131 Programming Manual Global Variables List Editor The GVL Editor is a declaration editor for editing Global Variables Lists It is working according to the options cur
239. ing W Enable repository dialog Professional AECA GE TO Meu O sera 30 orem usSeo Tedures are switched off and the user interface is adapted for most effective usability Predefined feature sets Figure 7 117 Options Dialog Features Predefined Features Sets Currently there are two predefined sets of features which can be exchanged via button Predefined feature sets Standard Some rarely used features are switched off and the user interface is adapted for most effective usability Recommended for the majority of users Professional All features are available and the user interface is more complex in order to unveil all possibilities of the system Particular Features Alternatively each of the features which are only available with the Professional set can be activated on or deactivated off in particular For this purpose add or remove a checkmark in the respective option box The concerned features belong to the categories described in Table 7 3 In the last two columns each see the default setting for the Standard and Professional set 205 7 Menu Commands Category Standard Smart Coding Show system symbols If this feature is activated symbols of the system library will be available on the input assistant IEC 61131 3 Languages Only if this feature is activated the following object types will appear in the Add object context menu Method Prop
240. ing data Data size for the MODBUS writing Depends on the function used 0 to 2147483646 1 to 65536 Write Data Size Depends on the function used Range of addresses for the Write Data Range MODBUS data MODBUS writing Diagnostic Diagnostic variable name Disabling Variable Initial Variable used to disable 0 to 2147483647 Name of a variable declared on a program or GVL Field designed for the symbolic variable 295 8 Editors the MODBUS relation which is used to individually disable the configured MODBUS requests This variable may be of BOOL type The variable may be single or array element and can also be in structures Table 8 29 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Relation Configuration MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Q By adding the MODBUS RTU Ethernet Server for Direct Representation protocol the following screen will be shown MODBUS Server Configuration Server Settings Q Start Address of Diagnostics Area TCP Port Protocol 21540 502 a RTU via TCP Size Mapping Disabling 20 4096 H O TP Advanced Used range QB21540 QB21559 Used range 0QX4096 0 0X4099 7 Server Mappings Data Type Data Start Address Data Size IEC Variable Oo oini OD mias Quini Add Edit Figure 8 67 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Direct Representation Configuration Description Default Possibilities Q Start Address of Diagnosis variables Any address
241. inserted below an application The selectable variables for the symbol configuration use the compile information as basis too e Compiler defines Here you can enter defines see define instruction and conditions for the compilation of this object The expression expr used in those pragmas can be entered here several entries can be entered in a comma separated list For example it might be useful to make dependent the compilation of an application on the value of a certain variable 117 7 Menu Commands Properties MainPrg Device PLC Logic Application T Exdude from build External implementation Late link in the runtime system A Enable system call E Link Always Compiler defines Figure 7 25 Properties Dialog Category Build Access Control This dialog allows configuring the access rights on the current object for the available user groups This corresponds to the configuration via the Permissions dialog which is available in the User Management menu 118 7 Menu Commands Properties MainPrg Device PLC Logic Application Groups actions and permissions Group View Modify Remove Add remove chilc a Everyone 4 mI Key to the symbols Permission is ap explicitely granted Mot specified but granted by default explicitely denied Mot specified but denied by default Please note Members of the group Owner are granted all permissions
242. ion for example project by default automatically the extension defined by the currently selected template wizard will be assigned e Location Location of the new project file The default path is specified by the currently selected template wizard You can use the Windows standard browser for modifying the path via button or choose one of the recently used location paths via eA button e OK A new project will be created according to the done settings If any settings are missing an error icon will be displayed at the respective entry field in the dialog When the cursor is placed on an error icon a tooltip will provide a hint what to do If a project was already opened when setting up the new one you will now be asked whether this should be saved and closed before creating the new project 89 7 Menu Commands The name of the new project in each case will be displayed in the title bar of the frame window of the programming system NOTE An asterisk behind the project name will indicate that the project has been modified since the last save Open Project Symbol G Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt O gt This command can be used to open an existing project file with the aid of the standard dialog for opening a file hee Open Project y lt E Bibliotecas Documentos Organizar Nowa pasta Y Favoritos Biblioteca Documentos WE Area de Trabalho Inclur 2 locais mM Downloads Locais Organizar p
243. ion of Commands the configuration of User accounts and Groups the creation of Object Types the viewing editing removing and handling of child objects of Project Objects e Below each category node there are nodes for the particular actions which might be performed on the command user account group object type or project object These nodes also only have optical function Possible actions F Execute execution of a menu command F Create creating a new object in the current project Add or Remove children adding or removing of child objects to an existing object Modify editing an object in an editor F Remove deleting or cutting an object View viewing an object in an editor Below each action node find the possible targets that 1s project objects of the respective action The Permissions window provides a list of all currently available user groups except the Owner group and a toolbar for configuring rights to a group Left to each group name one of the following icons indicates the currently assigned permission concerning the target which is currently selected in the Actions window e HF The action s currently selected in the Actions window are granted for the group e The action s currently selected in the Actions window are denied for the group The right to perform the action s which are currently selected in the Actions window has not been granted explicitly but is granted by def
244. ion should be used when the project gets compiled for example by one of the build commands or during download Settings e Save parse trees to file In case of large projects or low performance systems it might be reasonable to activate this option It helps to avoid out of memory problems by storing the precompile language model information of the project in a temporary file and not in the main memory However this will increase the project loading and compilation time e Replace constants Per default this option is activated which means For each constant of scalar type thus not for strings ARRAYS structures directly its value gets loaded In online mode the constants are indicated by an 3 icon preceding the value in the declaration or watch view In this case any accessing of constants e g via an ADR operator or forcing and writing are not possible If the option is deactivated the constant can be accessed however this will mean a longer processing time 133 7 Menu Commands Visualization Profile Project Settings Page Setup EN Al Security Visualization Profile FB Source Download Specific Profile No Profile 89 Users and Groups dE Visualization Profile Figure 7 43 Project Settings Dialog Category Visualization Profile Define here a visualization profiles to be used when the project gets opened Currently there 1s no visualization profile available to Nexto Series CPUs 134 Security 7
245. ionally might logon on via a defined user account with user name and password in order to have a special set of access rights Notice that each project has its own user management Therefore for example to get a special set of access rights for a library included in a project the user must separately logon on to this library In addition users and groups set up in different projects are not identical even if they have identical names Access Right Management User management in a project is only useful in combination with the access right management In a new project basically all rights are not yet defined explicitly but set to a default value This default value usually is granted In the further run of working on the project each right can be explicitly granted or denied and set back to default The access right management of a project is done in the Permissions dialog or for object access rights in the Access control dialog which is part of the object Properties dialog Access rights on objects get inherited If an object has a father object example if an action is assigned to a program object that is inserted in the structure tree below the program then the program is the father of the action object the current rights of the father automatically will become the default settings of the child Father child relations of objects concerning the access rights usually correspond with the relations shown in
246. is shown and performing the command means to stop the tracing This means the display will freeze the currently viewed section of the graph s Reset Trigger Cursor Symbol FE This command will reset the trace display after a trigger event has occurred or the trace has been stopped The tracing display will continue with the actual values ls As long as this option 1s activated Default the actual position of the mouse cursor in a coordinate system of the trace window will be always indicated in the status bar You can move the cursor by clicking in the black triangle of the cursor and scroll it with pressed left mouse key The same can be done by using left right arrow key All keyboard shortcuts listed in Shortcuts for Trace The option will automatically be deactivated if one of the options Mouse Scrolling or Mouse Zooming 1s activated Symbol Mouse Scrolling Symbol Y This command activates the mouse scrolling mode If this mode is activated the mouse cursor will be displayed for a short moment as a double arrow and you can scroll the time axis of the currently displayed trace by moving the mouse on the trace window The same can be done with the left right arrow key while pressing the ALT key For vertical scrolling use the up and down arrow key With additionally pressed CTRL key the vertical and horizontal scrolling is done in greater distances If the Multi Channel option is enabled you can scroll the time axis of a
247. isters Reading 04 Input Registers Reading 05 Coil Writing 06 Register Writing 15 Multiple Coils Writing 16 Multiple Registers Writing 22 Register Mask Writing 23 Multiple Register Reading Writing Polling ms Communication period ms 0 to 3600000 Read Data Start Initial address for the Address MODBUS reading data NS cagas Read Data Size Data Size tonne MODBUS Depends on the function used reading Range of addresses for the Read Data Range MODBUS data reading NES 0 to 2147483646 Write Data Start Initial address for the Write Data Size mana loess NN Depends on the function used Range of addresses for the Write Data Range MODBUS data MODBUS 0 to 2147483647 writing Diagnostic l l Name of a variable declared on a program Field designed for the symbolic variable which is used to individually disable the Initial Variable used to disable configured MODBUS requests This the MODBUS relations variable may be of BOOL type The variable may be single or array element and can also be in structures Table 8 16 MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Relation Configuration Function Code MODBUS function type Disabling Variable 285 8 Editors MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation Q By adding the MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation the following screen will appear PR a Slave Settings Q Start Address of Diagnostics Area SlaveAddress 21695 11 Size Mapping Disa
248. it Process Data Process data are the variables used by the I O module for access and control as shown in Figure 8 2 233 8 Editors Select the Outputs Name Type Name HSC Input 00 Command e Digital Inputs High Speed Counter Input 00 Command BYTE Digital Inputs Byte 0 HSC Input 00 Preset Value Digital Inputs Byte 1 High Speed Counter Input 00 Preset Value DINT HSC Input 00 Status HSC Input 01 Command High Speed Counter Input 00 Status BYTE High Speed Counter Input 01 Command BYTE HSC Input 00 Current Value HSC Input 01 Preset Value High Speed Counter Input 00 Current DINT High Speed Counter Input 01 Preset Value DINT C HSC Input 01 Status C Pulse Catch Reset High Speed Counter Input 01 Status BYTE Pulse Catch Reset Byte 0 BYTE HSC Input 01 Current Value Pulse Catch Reset Byte 1 BYTE High Speed Counter Input 01 Current DINT C Input 02 Period Input 02 Period DWORD Figure 8 2 Process Data Information regarding each parameter is described in the current module Technical Characteristics Module Parameters The modules parameters are configured through the screen shown in Figure 8 3 234 Name Operating Mode Input Filter Enable Mask Input 00 Input 01 gt Input 02 Input 03 Input 04 Input 05 gt Input 06 Input 07 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 gt Input 14 os Input 15 Input 16 Pulse Catch Enable Mask Pulse Catch Elongation Time V
249. ith an installation of the programming system Available commands Features Load and Save International Settings CFC Editor Declaration Editor SFC editor 204 7 Menu Commands Text Editor FBD LD and IL editor Syntax Highlighting SFC SmartCoding Features This subdialog in the Options dialog provides the possibility to adapt the selection of available features in the currently used programming system environment In the upper part you can switch on and off the particular features in the lower part you can switch between the predefined sets on a whole NOTE Some settings restrict the selection of object types that can be newly created in a project However if the user opens a project that already contains objects of currently not insertable types these nevertheless will be visible and fully functional ai CFC Editor i Declaration editor RF FBD LD and IL editor gt add International Settings G Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting E Te editor Library management 7 Enable simplified library handling C Hide system libraries W Enable repository dialog Move the mouse over any text feld above in order to display ts description Y Support extended programming features Predefined Feature Sets Please select a feature set that best fits your needs Device management 4 Enable logical device support C Enable simplified device handl
250. ith the previous profiles as it allows multiple interruption tasks Therefore the application can include several ExternInterruptTask lt nn gt or TimelnterruptTask lt nn gt tasks executing the ExternInterruptPrg lt nn gt and TimelnterruptPre lt nn gt programs The interruption tasks additional priorities can be freely selected from 08 to 12 In this profile besides the standard programs each task can execute additional programs In this project profile the application can also include the user task FreeTask from the Freewheeling task with priority 31 responsible for the FreePrg program execution As this task is low priority it can be interrupted by all others and it can execute codes that might be blocked There are eight tasks and it s POUs already completely defined as shown on Table 3 4 as the respective programs associated to the chosen language The intervals and trigger events of any task and the interruption tasks priorities can be configured by the user At the application development using the Expert project profile a special care is necessary with the interruption task scaling In case there is information and resources sharing among these tasks or between these tasks and the basic tasks it is strongly recommended to adopt strategies to guarantee the data consistence p pE MainTask MainPrg 13 Cyclic t00ms CyclicTask00 CyclicPrg00 43 Cyclic 200ms CyclicTask01 CyclicPra0 43 Cyolic 500ms Externi
251. itor window in offline or online mode via command Edit Object For information on what is currently going on in your project in off line or online mode see the following components Messages view Precompile Compile Build Download messages etc are displayed in this window Watch view and Online Views of Editors Shows a monitoring view of a POU and a user defined list of watch expressions Information and Status Line The line at the lower border of the user interface provides information on the currently logged in user Also if the user are currently working in an editor window the current position of the cursor and the status of editing mode In online mode the current status of the program will be indicated Current user Each project has a user and access management The currently logged in user will be named in the status line Position Counted from the left and upper margin of the editor window o Ln Number of lines o Col Number of columns a column includes exactly one space character or digit o Ch Number of characters in this context a character can be a single character or digit as well as a tab including for example 4 columns By a double mouse click on one of the fields the user get the dialog Go To Line where you can enter a different position where the cursor should be placed Status of editing mode INS refers to insert mode and OVR refers to overwrite mode By a double mouse click on this field you can toggle
252. k Start Close Project save Project save Project As Source upload Source download Print Page Setup Recent projects Exit Figure 4 1 New Project Later a window will be presented to the user requesting the project type selection and following the name and path to store the project in the computer Click on OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel Creates anew project automatically induding the correspo Location C temp Figure 4 2 Project Classification 32 4 Quick Start Choosing the MasterTool Standard Project a wizard for project creation will be opened where the user must select the desired CPU and the basic hardware modules composing the bus considering the model of the rack the power supply and the redundancy configuration In this case the CPU NX3010 no redundancy will be used a NX9001 rack and a NX8000 power supply MasterTool Standard Project a k ad You are about to create a new MasterTool Standard Project Choose the following options and the wizard will create project as you decide Choose the CPU model NX3010 Altus 5 4 CPU 1Eth 2 Serial Memory Card and Rack Expansion Choose the rack model NX9001 Altus 5 4 12 Slot Backplane Rack Choose the power supply model Nx3000 Altus S A 30 W 24 Vdc Power Supply Module Choose the redundancy configuration Without Redundancy Figure 4 3 Hardware Modules Following the user must select
253. l Del Usuario Serie Nexto Spanish MU214605 Nexto S ries CPUs User Manual English MU214100 de Utilizac o CPUs S rie Nexto Portuguese MU214305 Manual del Usuario CPUs Serie Nexto Spanish MU299609 MasterTool IEC XE User Manual English MU299048 Manual de Utiliza o MasterTool IEC XE Portuguese MU299800 Manual del Usuario MasterTool IEC XE Spanish MP399609 IEC 61131 Programming Manual English MP399048 Manual de Programac o IEC 61131 Portuguese MP399800 Manual de Programacion IEC 61131 Spanish Table 1 1 Support Documentation Visual Inspection Prior to installation we recommend performing a careful visual inspection of equipment by checking if there is damage caused by shipping Make sure all components of your order are in perfect condition In case of defects inform the transportation company and the nearest Altus representative or distributor CAUTION Before removing modules from the package it is important to discharge eventual static potentials accrued in the body For this touch with nude hands in a metallic surface grounded before modules handling Such procedure ensures that the levels of static electricity supported by the module will not be overcome It is important to record the serial number of each item received as well as software revisions if any This information will be necessary if you need to contact Altus Technical Support Technical Support To contact Altus Technical Support in S o Leopoldo R
254. l be placed in the upper part of the window which opens when you are going to edit or view monitor an object in offline or online mode The declaration header describes the POU type for example PROGRAM FUNCTION_BLOCK FUNCTION and might be extended by POU global pragma attributes The online mode of the declaration editor is structured like that of a watch view Variable declaration also is done in Global Variable Lists and Data Unit Types which however are created in separate editors Regard the general information on variables declaration Textual Declaration Editor Start Page Configuration Bus progi f program for temp calculation progl 2 3 VAR 4 7 al ARRAY 0 4 0 2 OF DINT 1 4 0 1 2 0 201 2 0 3 1 varl AT QB0 INT 3 END VAR 4 mr t 1 varl r varl 1 P Figure 8 7 Textual Editor View 238 8 Editors Behavior and appearance are determined by the respective current text editor settings in the Options dialogs There you can define the default settings for highlight coloring line numbers tabs indenting and many more The usual Windows functions are available and even those of the IntelliMouse can be used if the corresponding plug in 1s installed Notice that block selection is possible by pressing lt ALT gt while selecting the desired text area with the mouse Tabular Declaration Editor Start Page Configuration Bus lz progl PROGRAM progl Y X 4 x Sco
255. l behavior for every variable in its own style These settings are used when the trace diagram is displayed in multi channel view Appearance of the Y axis Display mode Auto Fixed Minimum Maximum Grid Description Font Figure 8 41 Edit Appearance of the Y Axis Dialog e Auto With this option selected the axis is automatically scaled according to the trace editor s buffer contents e Fixed By selecting this option the range displayed on the axis is defined by the minimum and maximum fields e Minimum Sets the minimum value displayed on the selected axis e Maximum This value defines the maximum value displayed on the selected axis e Grid If this option is activated a grid will be displayed The major ticks will be elongated by dotted lines for this purpose The color of the grid lines can be chosen from the color selection list e Description If this option is activated the text entered in the edit field will be displayed at the upper end of the y axis For the x axis no description will be displayed e Font this button opens the standard dialog for defining the font for the Trace display Appearance You find this command in the context menu of the trace tree in the right part of the main window of the Trace Editor It opens the Edit Appearance dialog in the Trace editor The dialog is available when the name of the trace on top level of the trace tree is selected If a variable in the trace tree is s
256. l get an appropriate error message To modify an existing group Use button Edit to open the Edit Group dialog The entry fields are the same as in the Add Group dialog Figure 7 49 The password fields however for safety reasons will show 32 characters After having modified the desired entries close the dialog with OK to get applied the new settings To remove one or several groups Select the respective entries in the group s tree and use button Remove Note that you will get no further inquiry The members of the deleted groups will remain unmodified An appropriate error message will appear 1f you try to delete the groups Everyone and or Owner 139 7 Menu Commands Settings Project Settings Page Setup a y Security Users Groups Sigk E Source Download _ ey Users and Groups 4 Maximum number of authentication trials 3 p dE Visualization Profile W Automatically logoff after time of inactivity 10 minute s Figure 7 50 Project Settings Users and Groups Settings Dialog The following basic options and settings concerning the user accounts can be made e Maximum number of authentication trials If activated the user account will be set invalid after the specified number of trials to log in with a wrong password If not activated the number of erroneous trials is unlimited Default option activated number of trials 3 permissible values 1 10 e Automatically log out after time of inac
257. l show a new value or lt Unforce gt or lt Unforce and restore gt At the next Force Values and Write Values for the first option command the prepared values will be set There is a maximum limit on the number of allowed forces on MasterTool IEC XE This limit is 128 forces 1 e 128 forcing entries regardless of the type of the variable For example if it is forced on a variable of type BOOL this action will consume one forcing entry as well will be consumed only one entry if forced a REAL After forcing 128 entries the MasterTool IEC XE does not allow forcing showing a warning In addition it is only possible to force symbolic variables For the forcing of direct representation variables these must be associated with a symbolic variable in its Declaration or be declared in a local bus editor as inputs and outputs of a module and MODBUS mappings It is also not allowed forcing device diagnostics even if they are mapped into symbolic variables This is not allowed to prevent a wrong interpretation of diagnostic devices In case you need to write a value in an area of diagnostics it must be used the command Write Values not Force Values In addition to the limit of the number of entries in the list of forces is also considered before forcing a new entry if this will not exceed the limit of forcing buffer This limit is 10240 bytes For basic types variables occurs not overflow buffer limit however in the case of variables of complex
258. layed Figure 4 39 60 4 Quick Start w Project project Master Tool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Ea iE de AS ry 106 gt Devices I x Start Page Configuration Bus MainPrg 3 f Projet 1 PROGRAM MainPrg Device NX3030 z WAR S E PLCLogic 3 END VAR f Application ES Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostic Til Library Manager 3 MainPra PRG Task Configuration 2 MainTask A Configuration Bus Fl Nx3030 Nx3030 1 4 comi Y coma NET RB NET2 4 mr Figure 4 39 ST Editor Window In the declaration part of the editor put the cursor behind VAR and press the lt ENTER gt key An empty line will be inserted where you may enter the declaration of the variables ivar and erg of type INT and fbinst of type FB1 PROGRAM MainPrg VAR ivari INT fbinst FBL erg INI END VAR Alternatively you may directly type an instruction in the implementation part of the editor body and make use of the Autodeclare function Enter Programming Code in the Body of MainPrg ivar ivaril counter fbinst in 11 out gt erg call function block of type FBI with input parameter in j CUELPuE is written Lo erg Instead of steps you can use the Auto Declaration feature Without an preceding declaration enter an instruction immediately in the body of the program then press the lt
259. le installing MasterTool TEC XE then dick Next Additional icons Create a desktop icon Figure 9 5 Icon on the Desktop Selection Screen On the next screen a review of the selected components to be installed is executed Click in Next to continue or Back to modify any feature 319 9 Installation if Setup MasterTool IEC XE Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing MasterTool IEC XE on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or dick Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location C Program Files Altus M7T8500 Start Menu folder MasterTool IEC XE Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon Figure 9 6 Components Revision Screen At first the software prerequisites such as the NET Framework have to be installed 5 Setup MasterTool IEC XE Preparing to Install Setup is preparing to install MasterTool IEC XE on your computer Installing prerequisites Installing Microsoft Net Framework 4 Full Figure 9 7 Prior Conditions Screen to Install MasterTool IEC XE 320 9 Installation During the installation process a screen requesting the extraction of the NET Framework files will appear Extracting files Ea Preparing D 175fc32693d285395c8cHMeadaf64Windows6 04B956250 46001 x86 msu Figure 9 8 Extracting Files for the NET Framework Installation The Microsoft NET Framework installatio
260. lected position insertion takes place directly in front of a selected input directly after a selected output directly before a selected line cross or at the end of a network or sub network In IL a Return instruction will be inserted Insert Input Symbol 4 Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt Q gt This command inserts an additional input at an extensible box AND OR ADD MUL SEL in FBD or LD editor It is not available in the IL editor The maximum number of inputs depends on the box type for example ADD can have two or more inputs In order to extend a box by an input at a certain position select the input above which you wish to insert an additional input In order to extend a box by an input at the lowest last position select the box body The new input primarily is allocated with the text Replace this text by the name of a desired constant or variable The Input Assistant might be used for this purpose Insert Coil Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt A gt This command is used to insert a coil in parallel to the previous coils If the marked position is a connection between the contacts and the coils then the new coil will be inserted as the last If the marked position is a coil then the new coil will be inserted directly above it The coil is given the text as a default setting You can click on this text and change it to the desired variable or you can use the Input Assist
261. lication 10 Lo 6IB0 Flags Comment CONSTANT inputi _ RETAIN PERSISTENT Figure 7 18 Dialog Box for Declaration of Variables Some fields will be filled automatically with default values but still can be edited See below Name By default the name of the new variable which you have entered in the editor Object By default the name of the currently edited object To define another object where the variable declaration should be performed select one of the available objects For example if you are going to declare a global variable Scope VAR_GLOBAL here you will get all global variables lists already defined within the project Type By default INT If this is the first variable in the line INT but if there is already a declared variable in the line the type of this variable will be pre set For modifying this entry you can press button to get the Input Assistant dialog which allows you to select one from all possible data types In case you want to declare an ARRAY variable you might use the array wizard which is offered also via the arrow button See below for a description Scope By default VAR local variable Alternatively set another scope from the selection list Initialization Here you can enter an explicit initialization value for the variable If nothing is entered here the variable will be initialized with the default value Address The variable being declared can be bound to an IEC address
262. lication S MB Diagnostics VAR GLOBAL DG_H TOAG _Nx3000_1 DG_N TOAG NAGOLO 1 J loConfig_Globals VAR GLOBAL a er nextostandard 1 0 0 E Cluster Co 5 IP Address E Real Time pale RTC_5 La neatostandard 1 0 0 H E Startup Co System Calls i Sg EN TA ENUM nextostandard 100 E i ERROR ENLI nextostandard 1 0 0 Insert with arguments Insert with namespace prefix Structured view p Local variables show documentation Global variables f Input Parameter Documentation Output Parameter Named I Os ices eer Parameter VAR_GLOBAL EN_TASK_STATUS Cuida Address Keywords ConversionOperators This enum define the value to set task status SET_TO_SCHEDULE EN_TASK_STATUS VAR Schedule selected task SET_TO_NOT_SCHEDULE EN_TASK_STATUS WAR Figure 7 17 Input Assistant Dialog Auto Declare Default Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F2 gt This command opens the Auto Declare dialog for the declaration of a variable For this purpose the cursor must be placed in a line of the implementation part of the editor which contains an undeclared variable or an already variable must be selected If the dialog should open automatically as soon as a line containing a not yet declared variable is left the respective option in the SmartCoding must be activated 108 7 Menu Commands Auto Declare Scope Type WAR a INT Object Initialization Address FB1 App
263. ll diagrams simultaneously with mouse or keypad left right arrow key while pressing the lt ALT gt key For vertical scrolling of the selected diagram use the up and down arrow key With additionally pressed lt CTRL gt key the vertical and horizontal scrolling is done in greater distances If you scroll out of the view range currently available in the trace buffer out of data will be displayed in the trace window To de activate the mouse scrolling mode activate the Cursor mode To get back to the default appearance use command Default Appearance To zoom the display use command Mouse Zooming All keyboard shortcuts listed in Shortcuts for Trace 262 8 Editors Mouse Zooming Symbol i This command activates the mouse zooming mode In this mode the mouse cursor will get displayed as i and you can draw a rectangle in the trace window in order to re define the area of the trace curves to be displayed This area will then be viewed in a way that it fills the trace window To de activate the mouse Zoom mode activate the Cursor mode To get back to the default appearance use command Default Appearance Notice also the possibility to zoom the display of the trace window by using a scroll mouse or by using a keyboard e Scrolling the mouse wheel zooms the coordinate system along the x and y axes The same can be done with the numeric keypad key and key e Scrolling the mouse wheel while pressing the lt SHIFT gt k
264. lthough the automatic display is activated and thus the list in the cross references view might change Start Page Symbol This command opens a view providing a selection of commands for quick starting with a new or recent project version information and a viewer for the Altus home page In the Load and Save options you can configure that the start page automatically appears when the programming system gets started Full Screen Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt F12 gt This option if activated effects that the MasterTool IEC XE frame window will be displayed in full screen mode To toggle back to the previous mode deactivate the menu entry or press the shortcut again Properties Common Symbol This command opens dialog Properties lt objectname gt The properties of the currently selected object in the POUs or Devices view will be displayed on various tabs the availability of which depends on the type of object The following dialogs are possible It provides information on the object Full name Object name as used in the POUs or Devices View Object type Object type Type of the object for example POU Application Interface etc Open with Type of the editor which is used to edit the object Description only modules allows to add a description to the modules 116 Build 7 Menu Commands Properties MainPrg Device PLE Logic Application
265. ly the active application will be stored in a file lt application gt app in the target system folder thus available as boot application Command Create boot application allows also in offline mode to save the boot application to a file Projects Download Login Method without Project Differences In order to ensure that the user will not have problems on sending and logging same projects in the CPUs running from different stations it can be performed the following steps after sending a project e In the Additional files dialog Project Project Settings Source Download menu and Additional files button select the option Download information files Close all dialogs by clicking OK Run the command Source download File menu In the Select Device dialog that opens choose the CPU on which the project was sent Close the dialog by clicking OK wait for the download of the project To login on running CPUs without generating changes on project from different stations you must open a Project Archive generated from the original project and execute the Login command In the absence thereof may be made of the following steps Run the command Source upload File menu In the Select Device dialog that opens choose the CPU on which the project was sent Close the dialog by clicking OK wait for the loading of the project In the Project Archive dialog which opens at the end of the loading process choose the folder to extract a
266. ly used in any object will be used This sub dialog of the Options dialog provides sub dialogs for settings concerning the editing in a SFC Sequential Function Chart editor The settings made in each of these dialogs will immediately be applied to the currently opened editor views as soon as they have been confirmed and the dialog closed with OK 210 Layout ai CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor I FBD LD and IL editor Features ad International Settings Gar Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCoding SS Syntax Highlighting E Text editor 7 Menu Commands Elements Step height Step width Action width Qualifier width Property width Figure 7 122 SFC Editor Options Dialog Category Layout The settings are to be made in grid units One grid unit is equal to font size currently set in the text editor options Qualifier width Action width LI H oO H a H i E cu LJ Ea Es a is bos Lat a ct ff k mi TH H mi pi tl re 1 H qu coa rt f 3 1 E il I Ly LI LO oy ct rt m fo Ti m F H Property width Figure 7 123 Layout Options Step height Step element height in grid units Possible values 1 100 Step width Step element width in pixels in grid units Possible values 2 100 Action width Action element display width in grid units Possible values 2 100 Qualifier width Qualifier display width in grid units
267. m POUs that will be started by the task If the task is executed in the present cycle these programs will be processed for the length of one cycle The combination of priority and condition will determine in which chronological order the tasks will be executed For each task you can configure a watchdog time control the possible settings depend on the target system Additionally there is the possibility to link System events for example Start Stop Reset directly with the execution of a project POU In online mode the task processing can be monitored Task Editor Usage By a double click on a Task configuration object in the Devices view window and by opening this object via command Edit object the editor window will open 255 8 Editors e Wwe ProjectTasks project MasterTool IEC XE Po File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Bsus AI Devices v dh X Start Page E Configuration Bus amp MainTask vX Q Sl El ProjectTasks l Configuration 2 Device NX3010 8 2 PLCLogi aa all a Priority 0 31 13 gt Application a 3 Bill of Materials Type gt E Configuration and Consumption Cydic v Interval e g t 200ms 100 ms K 4 Diagnostic Explorer a ad Diagnostics Watchdog il Library Manager Enable A CyclicPrqo1 PRG EX ExternInterruptPrg00 PRG Time e g t 200ms 1000 ms x E BternInterruptPrg01 PRG Ar TimelnterruptPrg01 PR
268. mation for all currently active applications The compile information was created and stored in a file compileinfo in the project directory during the last download of the application After a clean process no online change is possible for the respective application The program first must be re downloaded 182 7 Menu Commands Online Menu Login The Online menu provides commands apply in online mode Provides commands for controlling the application program on a real or on the simulation target system device PLC after having logged in ATTENTION Extraordinary changes of variable values in an application currently running on a controller can cause unwanted behavior of the controlled system Evaluate possible dangers before Writing or Forcing of variables and make appropriate security precautions Online Change modifies the running application program and does not effect a restart process Make sure that the new application code nevertheless will effect the desired behavior of the system Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered When calling the commands which are marked by an asterisk in the list below the user will be prompted to confirm Such a confirmation prompt will additionally appear for the commands which are marked by two asterisks in the list below if option Secure online mode 1s activated in the commun
269. me provider version etc Communication Settings This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog which can be opened via command Edit Object or by a double click on the device object entry in the Devices window It serves to configure the communication parameters for the device 242 8 Editors Start Page Configuration Bus jj Device X Select the network path to the controller Gateway 1 038 2 Set active path Fie Gateway 1 Node Name i nats NX3010_MasterTool ne NxX3010_192 168 17 217 01019 G NxX3010_192 168 17 25 0119 Add gateway E NX3010_MasterTool 0382 active Add device Scan network Filter Target ID Sorting order Mame ll Pl Don t save network path in project Secure online mode Figure 8 13 Device Dialog Communication Settings The dialog contains a bipartite window which in the left part shows in a tree structure the currently configured gateway channels and in the right part the corresponding data and information When creating the first project at your local system there will be no gateway configured To add a local gateway click Add Gateway and after that click OK Gateway window By selecting a gateway the user may see in the right part of the window the Node Name Node Address Driver IP Address and Port MasterTool IEC XE Gateway Service The MasterTool IEC XE Gateway Server is started automatically at system start as a se
270. mmediately will be displayed accordingly If you entered a not yet known instance name you also must specify the name of the desired function block For this purpose after closing the instance name input the input focus automatically changes to the box type edit field within the box In this case the input assistant will only offer function blocks e If the box should represent an operator program function or interface then when the cursor is placed in the instance field just press the down arrow key The input focus will change to the box Type Field within the box where you can enter the respective operator program function or interface name directly or via the Input Assistant After having terminated this input the box will be displayed accordingly In the IL editor the corresponding instructions will be inserted 155 7 Menu Commands Insert Jump Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt L gt This command inserts a jump The target of a jump is another network that is the label of that network In FBD or LD depending on the selected cursor position insertion takes place directly in front of a selected input directly after a selected output or if a whole network or sub network is selected at the end of the network or sub network For an inserted jump a selection can be made accompanying the entered text and the jump can be replaced by the name of the label to which it is to be assigned hyard Jump insert
271. mponents of the currently selected library module are listed in a table with variable Name data Type Address Initial value and Comment as defined in the library e Graphical the IEC implementation of the module is viewed graphically e Documentation The components of the module currently selected in the left part get displayed in a table showing the variable Name Data type and the Comment which might have been added to the component declaration when creating the library Thus inserting such comments is an easy way to automatically provide the user with module documentation Library included in the project Tab Documentation Start Page Configuration Bus ral Library Manager Name Namespace ective wersif Add library Io Standard 3 4 2 0 System lo Stange 3420 Properties H NextoStandard 1 0 0 13 WAA m s A f loDruNextoBus loDrvNextoBus 1 0 0 18 AA o Placeholders f NX3010 Diagnostic Structs WAA N3010_Diagnostic_Structs Details 4 LibNextoNet LibNextoN eje 1 0 11 WAA LibNextoNet 3 Standard 3 4 4 0 System Standard F art Tarf 247 Cuetarn Tart Er aa lecstc lecStc 3 4 2 0 System lecste Library repository gt standard Bistable Function Blocks Counter cu Type Inherited from Address Initial Comment cup BOOL Count Down on rising edge 5 Miscellaneous BOOL Load Start Value String Functions WORD Start Value Timer BOO
272. must be specified with the UDP port of the attached device eg 192 168 192 15 1749 The network then will be scanned for the respective device in order to get its node address and to add it to the list e IP Address using TCP If this option is selected a unique IP address eg 192 168 101 15 must be specified The network then will be scanned for the respective device in order to get its node address and to add it to the list If you specify a device which is not available in the network the device entry anyway will be added to the list with a default name NewDevice and address FFFF FFFF FFFF You can use the Resolve Address command to identify the device when it is connected later on Please note that any network scan will delete this device when it is not available at the time of the scan e Scan network This command starts a search for available devices in your local network and the configuration tree will be updated accordingly The command will also be executed on a double click on the gateway entry The found devices will be listed below that gateway entry in the tree of which an entry has currently been selected when calling the command Communication with Remote Gateway The Scan Network option available in devices only allows mapping and accessing devices that are on the same subnet of the selected gateway This way when you add a gateway is important to know which device you want to access If the device is p
273. n appropriate variable for the handle of the task of type RTS_IEC_HANDLE hlecTask RTS IEC HANDLE The disabling and succeeding reenabling can be handled by employing the interface functions in the following manner hTecTask TlecTaskGetCurrent 0 TecTaskDisableWatchdog hlecTask gt Watchdog protected code TecTaskEnableWatchdog hIiecTask e The POUs which are currently controlled by the task are listed here in a table with POU name and optionally a comment Left to the table there are commands for editing o In order to define a new POU open the Input Assistant dialog via command Add POU There choose one of the programs available in the project o In order to delete a call select it in the table and use command Remove POU o Command Open POU opens the currently selected program in the corresponding editor o In order to replace a program call by another one select the entry in the table open the Input Assistant and choose another program The sequence of the listed POU calls from up to down determines the sequence of execution in online mode Via the commands Move up and Move down the currently selected entry can be shifted within the list Task Editor in Online Mode Which task is being Processed For the execution of the tasks defined in the Task Configuration the following rules apply e That task is executed whose condition has been met that is if it is specified time has expired or after its condition event
274. n be defined The Windows standard dialog for saving a file will be opened for this purpose In the Name field the file name is already set If desired browse for another path and or edit the file name entry In the Data type field choose one of the available file types Regard the following before saving that project as a library e If the library should later be suitable for getting installed in other projects enter at least a title and a version number optionally recommended also a category and the company name in the Project Information Summary e The saving of a library project does not include an automatic check for errors If there is already a file with the defined name a message dialog will open to ask you whether that file should be replaced If you choose No you will get back to the Save Project dialog described above to select another path Project Archive Extract Archive This command is used to extract an archive file default file extension projectarchive that has been created by use of the command Save Send Archive Regard that extracting an archive will require to close all currently loaded projects in any of the currently opened instances of the programming system This is to avoid direct impact on running projects if for example libraries are changed due to the extract operation The archive file can be selected via the standard dialog box that arises in response to the command execution After co
275. n obligate resource object for each application It is available in the devices tree to any project created from MasterTool Standard Project and can be added via the Add Object command At the topmost position of a task configuration tree there is the entry 484 Task Configuration Below there are the currently defined tasks each represented by the task name The POU calls of the particular tasks are not displayed in the task configuration tree The task tree can be edited tasks can be added copied pasted or removed by the appropriate commands usable for the devices tree For example for adding a new task use command Add Object The particular tasks can be configured in the Task Editor dialogs which additionally provide a monitoring view in online mode The options available for a task configuration are target specific Ee Task Configuration E CyclicTask00 CydicTask01 E ExternInterruptTask00 ge MainTask E TimelnterruptTask00 Figure 8 24 Task Configuration in Devices Tree Below an Application A Task is a time unit in the processing of an IEC program It is defined by a name a priority and by a type determining which condition will trigger the start of the task This condition can be defined by a time cyclic freewheeling or by an internal or external event which will trigger the task for example the rising edge of a global project variable or an interrupt event of the controller For each task you can specify a series of progra
276. n will be started Microsoft NET Framework 4 Setup Installation Progress Please wait while the WET Framework is being installed File security verification All fles were verified successfully E Eyt Installation progress Installing NET Framework 4 Client Profile Figure 9 9 NET Framework Installation Screen At this point MasterTool IEC XE installation was started and the required files are being installed on the computer This operation may take some minutes dependind on its configuration 321 9 Installation 5 Setup MasterTool IEC XE Please wait while Setup installs MasterTool IEC XE on your computer Extracting files C Managed Libraries System Collections 3 4 3 0 Collections compiled ibrary E ss Figure 9 10 MasterTool IEC XE Installation Screen After installation is finished the next screen will be shown On this window it is strongly recommendable to choose the restart option After that click Finish to conclude the installation procedure 5 Setup MasterTool IEC XE ECE Completing the MasterTool IEC XE Setup Wizard To complete the installation of MasterTool IEC XE Setup must restart your computer Would you like to restart now Yes restart the computer now O No I will restart the computer later lo _ lt YN Mactar Ton IEC YE 322 9 Installation Figure 9 11 Installation Complete The MasterTool IEC XE will be installed and re
277. nal File Extract To Folder IPs bet lt Extract to the project folder gt memory Jpg Do not extract gt Figure 7 7 Additional Files Dialog By default an additional file will not be extracted together with the project files see the remark lt Do not extract gt to the right of the file name If you want an additional file to be extracted you have to select it by a click on its name Afterwards you have to choose one of the three options provided below e Extract to the project folder will extract the selected file to the same directory as the project files specified by the path The remark to the right of the file name will be changed into lt Extract to the project folder gt e Extract to that folder will extract the file to the folder that you can specify either by typing the corresponding path into the text field or by making use of the standard dialog for browsing after a click on Lo The remark to the right of the file name will be changed to the specified path e Do not extract will reset the selected file to the default mode After adjusting the extract properties of the additional files you may exit the Additional file dialog pressing OK A click on Show comment will display the comment eventually given on the archived project by its author If no comment is contained in the archive a corresponding error message will be displayed instead Having configured the set up in the dialog box you may click on to unp
278. name created for the application select Add Object and POU as depicted on Figure 4 8 w NGloproject MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Hellnoo i BAXA 4 o Devices rux Start Page Configuration Bu 3 3 wam eA P a 1 Device Nx3010 ES PLC Logic 0 Ed Bill of Ma 2 Configuri Copy Diagnost Faste Ss ad Diagnost Delete Hi Library M __ Properties 2 F a E IE j r a B MainPra E 58 Task Conl z DUT S Conf Add Device Global Variable List ss iin D Add Folder Persistent Variables H Configuration Bu _ Ena dit Object Contr reos e H gers a comi Eat Object wih 2 COM2 8 Login POU for implicit checks a NET i Trace Simulation Figure 4 8 Inserting POUs A configuration window will appear on the screen where the user must put the POU name and select the language type to be implemented Then the button Open must be clicked 36 Add POU E Create a new POU Program Organization Unit Name POU Type Program Function Block Extends Implements Structured Text ST Figure 4 9 Classification 4 Quick Start For a POU editing the tab with the correspondent name must be selected and the application development in the chosen language started The same procedure is valid for the POUs created automatically by the project profile 37 4 Quick Start
279. nd click on Extract e The project will open and Login command can be executed in the corresponding CPU For further information see File Menu and Online Menu 28 3 Concepts and Basic Components Monitoring In online mode there are various possibilities to display the current values of the watch expressions of an object on the PLC e Inline monitoring in the implementation editor of an object For details see the description of the respective editor e Online view of the declaration editor of an object For details see the description of the do Declaration e Object independent watch lists For details see the description of the watch views e Trace sampling Recording and display of variable values from the PLC For details see the description of the Trace Editor functionality Debugging To evaluate programming errors you can use the MasterTool IEC XE debugging functionality in online mode In this context regard the possibility to check an application in simulation mode 1 e without the need of connecting to a real hardware target device Breakpoints can be set at certain positions to force an execution break Certain conditions such as which tasks are concerned and in which cycles the breakpoint should be effective can be set for each breakpoint Stepping functions are available to get a program executed in controlled steps At each break the current values of the variables can be examined A call stack can be viewed for t
280. nd is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu It effects that the execution order indicated by the element numbers in the upper right corner of an element in the CFC Editor gets determined by the data flow of all elements and not by their position topology The advantage of the order according to data flow is that an output box which is connected to the output pin of a block immediately will be processed after the block which is not always so in case of a topological process flow A topological order of processing might deliver another result in some cases than a processing by data flow This can be recognized from the above described example Figure 7 87 Processing According to Data Flow When the command gets executed the following will happen internally First the elements are ordered topographically Then a new sequential processing list will be created Based on the known values of the inputs the computer calculates which of the not yet numbered elements can be processed next In the above shown network e g the ADD block 0 could be processed 172 7 Menu Commands immediately since the values at its inputs 1 and 2 are known Block SUB 1 can only be processed afterwards since the result from ADD must be known first etc Feedback paths get inserted last Therefore a sequencing by data flow will result Order by Topology This command is part of submenu Execution Order in the CFC menu It effects that
281. nds Edit Locations Multiple repositories can be used to manage libraries All repositories currently defined are shown in the selection list in Location By default the location described as system is always available as defined in MasterTool IEC XE installation To edit the path or name of the repositories use the Edit Locations button and open the corresponding dialog Hi Edit Repository Locations Repositories libraries are searched in that order Location Marne C ProgramData MTeS00 Managed Libraries System Figure 7 112 Edit Repository Locations Currently defined locations are listed in the Repositories window The search order 1s from top to bottom To modify this order use the buttons Move up or Move down lt All locations gt displays all currently defined libraries locations In this view it is not possible to perform an installation Define new repository and Change name and or Path from a repository To add a new repository use the Add button The Repository Location dialog will be opened and in the location field should enter the path of the new repository To do this use the button and look for a new folder properly Note that the folder must be empty In the Name field type a symbolic name for the location To modify an existing repository select the respective item in the dialog and use the Edit button The Repository Location dialog will also be open to edit the path and the name of the same
282. nes in an editor to make the navigating in long programs easier Via the appropriate commands the user can jump to the next or previous bookmark The commands e Toggle Bookmark e Bookmark Next e Previous Bookmark e Clear Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark Symbol 6 This command is used in a text editor to set a bookmark in the current line respectively to remove a set bookmark A cyan colored rectangle at the left margin will indicate that a bookmark is set 106 7 Menu Commands Brr i ivar err 1 strvar err i INT T0_5T 3 blnc FALSE 14 END IF 15 3 16 M IF ivar err gt 3 THEN 17 ivar rr OU 1A Fun TF Figure 7 16 Bookmarks in ST Editor Next Bookmark Symbol This command is used in a text editor to jump to the next bookmark Previous Bookmark Symbol This command is used in a text editor to jump to the previous bookmark Clear Bookmarks Symbol This command is used to clear all bookmarks in the current editor window Input Assistant Symbol ES Default Shortcut lt F2 gt The Input Assistant dialog and the command Input Assistant only will be available if currently the cursor 1s placed in a text editor window The dialog offers all project items available for being inserted at the current cursor location The items are sorted by Categories For the currently selected category the available items and their respective data type are displayed in the Items window If option Structured
283. nfirmation of the selection with Open there will pop up a dialog box 92 7 Menu Commands Project Archive General Extract archive content relatively to C Temp Archive contents Library profile Es Referenced devices E Referenced libraries Additional files Show comment Figure 7 6 Project Archive Under Extract archive content relatively to the path to which the archive is to be extracted to is specified You can modify the target directory either by hand click on the path indication and modify it by typing or by a click on what gives rise to the standard dialog for browsing The lower rectangle of the dialog box displays the file categories packed in the archive A click on the sign which antecedes each category will expand a list of its associated files All categories mentioned are marked by what indicates that all of the corresponding files will be extracted If you want to prevent certain files or even an entire category from being extracted you have to deactivate their marking by a click the mark will then appear as for partial deactivation m respectively for entire deactivation a The archive may contain other than the project files that have been added explicitly After a click on Additional files there will pop up the following dialog box 93 7 Menu Commands Project Archive Indude the following information into the archive Extract archive content relatively to Additio
284. ng Syntax Highlighting E Text editor Editing Text area Margin Monitoring 4 Line numbering Foreground color MM SteelBlue Background color LJ White Highlight current line MW Firebrick v Show bracket scope MW SteelBlue Focused border color Mi Teal Unfocused border color C LightGray Font dick onto the sample to edit BAaBbtcXaYyZz Mouse actions Ctri Click Toggle fold fully 7 Menu Commands Click Togale fold shift Click Select fold Alt Click None Figure 7 132 Options Dialog Category Text Editor Margin Show bracket scope The following options concern the left margin of the editor window which is separated by a vertical line to the editing area Line numbers will be displayed in the declaration and in the implementation part of the window each starting with 1 in the first line Foreground color Color of the line numbers Background color Color of the margin background Highlight current line Color of the line number of the currently edited line A bracket scope contains lines between corresponding keywords like e g between IF and END_IF You can activate this bracket scope function by option Matching brackets in category Text area If the cursor then is placed before after or within a corresponding keyword the bracket scope will be indicated by a bracket in the margin area Focused border color Color of the vertical separator line on the righ
285. ng system Symbol Command Shortcut 76 5 User Interface y a A INN ES EEN Table 5 10 Help Menu Bus Editor Menu Commands related to customization and best bus editor preview Configuration Bus Symbol Command O sonu a pea O C ET A O AA l HERE ooo O Table 5 11 Graphic Editor Menu User Files Memory Nexto Series CPUs have a memory area destined to the general data storage in other words the user can store several project files in the CPU memory This memory area varies according to the CPU model used In order to that be possible the user must access the project under development in the MasterTool IEC XE software and click on the Devices Tree placed at the program left Two clicks must be executed on the Device item and the Files tab selected as showed on Figure 5 5 77 5 User Interface File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help oh 8S GSO amp a A amp Devices 3 Memory C Device NX3010 S E PLC Logic 0 Application Runtime Location 3 l ax Name A InternalMemory 412 11 JaNpold D Modified B Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption ee Diagnostic Explorer Diagnostic Vil Library Manager E MainPrg PRG Task Configuration Configuration mainTask J Configuration Bus J Nx3010 Nx3010 Y comi Y com2 Y NETI Directories cannot be uploaded
286. ning Library categories The assignment of a library category later serves for sorting the available libraries in the Library Repository dialog If no category 1s specified explicitly the library will be added to category Miscellaneous All special categories must be defined in a category description file in XML format One or several category description files can exist for this purpose You can call such a description file in order to choose the desired category for the local library project or alternatively you can call another library project which itself already has included the information from a category description file Via button Lu open the dialog Library categories which shows the currently assigned categories 128 7 Menu Commands Library Categories If this project is used as a library it will appear under the following categories From Description File From Other Library Figure 7 37 Library Categories Dialog In order to assign the current library project to one or several further categories use button Add and select one of the options e From Description File The standard browse dialog for selecting a file will open where you can search for the desired description file libcat xml e From Other Library The standard browse dialog for selecting a file will open where you can search for a library already containing category information library The categories read f
287. ning user name and password This Edit User lt usurer name gt dialog corresponds to the Add User dialog Delete The currently selected user account will be deleted O Add The dialog Add Group opens where you can define a new group name and select from the currently defined users those who should be members of this group Add Group Name Dev2l Group members E Group Devi A Group Everyone A Group Owner E User Everyone User Owner E User useri E User user Figure 6 3 Add Group Dialog E import The dialog Import Groups opens where the groups currently defined in the project user management are listed You can select one or several entries and confirm with OK to get them integrated in the groups list of the device specific user management 4 Edit The currently selected group can be modified concerning group name and associated users For this purpose the Edit Group lt group name gt dialog opens which corresponds to the Add Group dialog Delete The currently selected group can be deleted Applying and Storing the Current Configuration See the respective buttons in the top bar of the dialog Upload from device Download to device The current user management configuration must be downloaded to the device to get 1t effective The configuration currently applied on the device can be uploaded into the configuration dialog 84 6 User and Access Right Manageme
288. nline run In this case The position which was last viewed during an online stepping session will be still displayed but in greyed letters Call Stack I X Application Task Location Instance path Figure 7 22 Call Stack View 114 7 Menu Commands Cross Reference View This command opens a view window where you can get listed the cross references of a project variable that 1s the locations where the variable 1s used within the project or just within the scope of the same POU Cross Reference List x I Xx Name ivar h Z E b E POU Variable Access Address Location Comment MAINPRG ivar Declaration Line 3 Decl MAINPRG ivar Write Line 1 Column 1 Impl MAINPRG iwar Read Line 1 Column 1 Impl Figure 7 23 Cross Reference List View If all cross references within the project should be listed type in the identifier string manually or copy it via copy amp paste from any editor window to the Name field and then confirm with lt ENTER gt or use button 4 If only the cross references within the same POU should be listed Either select the identifier string within the editor window of that POU and drag it with the mouse into the Cross Reference List view If a valid identifier has been entered the found locations will be listed in the form of a table showing the following information on the variable POU o O Name of the POU where the variable is used Variable name or POU name of the reference How the va
289. nnecting two communication networks with different protocols Physical equipment used in data processing which normally run programs software Shortcut navigation for a new help page Generic standard for operation and use of PLCs Former IEC1131 Adapts electric and or logically the transfer of signals between two devices Priority event that temporarily halts the normal execution of a program The interruptions are divided into two generic types hardware and software The former is caused by a signal coming from a peripheral while the later is caused within a program Also called I O I O devices on a system In the case of PLCs typically correspond to modules digital or analogue output or input monitoring or driving the controlled device See Input Output Module belonging to subsystem of inputs and outputs Set of interconnected I O modules to a CPU Machine PC or the system that is in use Action to establish a communication channel with the PLC Equipment connected to a communications network where originate command requests to other network equipment Simultaneous communication with a group of nodes connected to a network Memory size unit Represents 1024 bytes Light Emitting Diode Type of semiconductor diode that emits light when energized It s used for visual feedback Set of options available and displayed by a program in the video and that can be selected by the user to activate or to perform a particular task
290. nonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 283 MODBUS RTU Slave for Direct Representation PQ oooooooonnnncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnos 286 MODBUS RTU Slave for Symbolic Mappl A miei A 287 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation PQ oooocncnnnccncnnnnnnncnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 289 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping ccccccccccnnnnnnoonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 292 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation PQ oooonncnnnncnnnccnnnncnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnonnnnns 296 MODBUS Ethernet Server por Symbolic Mapping cccccccccccceeccceceeeeeseeesesesseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeenees 299 PROFIBUS PQ OP crunicore a scan cetusdacaceuss esuutcesasseueausatus aiie 300 CPUs 300 Serial IDEA COS LA A AAA AAA TA AAA AA AAA A AAA AAA IATA 301 Ethernet e A 302 PID Control Edito sais 303 Insert PHD Control objectintis application ON 303 Graphical TN ir OMI HG oie 304 9 INSTALLATION lt A 317 IODA GNOSTIC S Si so eastcaeosevioatueinemeseeens 324 Diapnostics Paren 324 Summary Diacnos taaan nani 324 MGLOSSAR Y alta 328 viii 2 Technical Description 1 Introduction Nexto Series is a powerful and complete Programmable Logic Controller PLC with unique and innovative features Due to its flexibility smart design enhanced diagnostics capabilities and modular architecture Nexto can be used for c
291. ns 13 2 Technical Description MasterTool IEC XE A PC with Windows XP 32bits Windows Vista 32 bits or Windows 76 32bits or 64bits Table 2 4 Minimum Requirements Data for Purchase Included Items The product may be acquired in two ways e Product package contain the following items o MasterTool IEC XE software recorded on CDROM o Altus Software License Contract e Ina product package that contains the license for subsequent download of the software at Altus site www altus com br Versions Licenses Product Code The following codes shall be used for product purchase MasterTool IEC XE Basic L license MasterTool IEC XE Professional L license MasterTool IEC XE Advanced L license Table 2 5 Codes for MasterTool IEC XE Purchase 14 3 Concepts and Basic Components 3 Concepts and Basic Components Introduction MasterTool IEC XE is a device independent PLC software programming Matching the IEC 61131 3 standard it supports all standard programming languages Basic Concepts Regard the following basic concepts determining programming with MasterTool IEC XE Object Orientation The mind of object orientation is not only reflected by the availability of appropriate programming elements and features but also in the structure and version handling of MasterTool IEC XE and in the project organization Component based structure of the programming system The functionality available in the u
292. ns a dialog for installing libraries 202 7 Menu Commands To perform the installation just select the file and click the Open button NOTE The nstall Library dialog is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Standard or the option Enable Repository dialog is disabled For further information about features see Features Device Repository Symbol i Device Repository is accessed through the Tools menu and opens the dialog Device Repository NOTE The Device Repository dialog is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Professional or if the option Enable Repository dialog is enabled For further information about features see Features S Device Repository Location system Repository C ProgramData MT8500 Devices Installed device descriptions Na E Ve ndo F Ve rsio n Install CEE Hi Miscellaneous de Central Processing Unit A Fieldbusses A I O Modules i MODBUS J i PLCs A Power Supplies A Special Modules Figure 7 116 Device Repository A device repository 1s a database for the devices which have been installed on the local system for the purpose of being available in the MasterTool IEC XE development system In the Device Repository the user can add or remove such device installations e Location Device repositories can be available on multiple locations on the system The selection list offers the currently availa
293. nstance has to be redefined also In functions and function blocks the formal names of the in and outputs are displayed The main output of the function return value however is displayed without name In case the box interface has been changed you can update the box parameters for example modified number of outputs by command Update parameters The update will not be done automatically Concerning insert positions the most recently inserted POU will be inserted at the currently selected position e Input the box will be inserted before this input Its first input and if applicable its first output will be linked within the existing branch e Output the box will be inserted after this output Its first input and if applicable its first output will be linked within the existing branch e Another box The old element will be replaced by the new POU As far as possible the connections will remain as they were before the replacement If the old element had more inputs than the new one then the unattachable branches will be deleted The same holds true for the outputs 154 7 Menu Commands e Jump or Return The box will be inserted before this jump or return Its first input and if applicable its first output will be linked within the existing branch e Network or Sub network The box will be inserted following the last element of the network or sub network and be linked with its first input All box inputs that could not
294. nt Toggle Breakpoint Default Shortcut lt F9 gt This command basically toggles between status enabled and disabled of a breakpoint However it also effects that a new breakpoint will be set if not yet one is already set at the current breakpoint position Step Over Symbol Default Shortcut lt F10 gt This command can be used for stepping through a program in online mode for example for debugging purposes For instructions on just one level this command is equivalent to a step by step If however a POU call is reached then Step Over effects that this POU will be executed completely within the current step In SFC a complete action will be executed If you would like to jump to the first instruction of a called POU you had to use the Step Into command Step Into Symbol Default Shortcut lt F8 gt This command can be used for stepping through a program in online mode for example for debugging purposes 192 7 Menu Commands A single step will be executed The program will stop before the next instruction If necessary there will be a changeover to an open POU If the present position is a call up of a function or of a function block then the command will proceed on to the first instruction in the called POU In The possible halt positions during stepping depend on the editor The current position is indicated by a yellow shading All other situations the command will act like Step Over
295. nt for Visualization element Product Library la Watch lt n gt n 1 2 3 4 Watch All Forces l Breakpoints Call Stack 73 5 User Interface E Cross Reference List B StatPage SO Full Screen lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt lt F12 gt la Properties o o Table 5 3 View Menu Project Menu Commands for handling project objects and the general information on the project Symbol Command o O _ _ Shonot Oooo Global Variable List o itm Method O O O IA Persistent Variables AN Task E IN CTS ES IN IA EN OA E ee eet Object wit o setActve Appication a Project Information N ZEK ES O IE Document E X Compare P useranagement S S a ET EEN Ca Permissions OOOO OOOO Table 5 4 Project Menu 74 5 User Interface Build Menu Commands for building the project that is for doing a pre compilation run including a syntactical check In addition commands for deleting the last compile information Clean command which is of meaning for online change and for offline code generation Symbol Command Shortcut Generatecode SO clean PO Clean al Table 5 5 Build Menu Online Menu Commands for logging in and out to from the controller for loading the project on the controller and for reset Symbol Commend SCS sma Logoff current online user SS P Downboaa S o O Oooo Source download to connected device ee Clust
296. nte lel Save to disk ar Load from disk The current configuration can be stored in a xml file dum and re loaded from this file which is useful to set up the same user configuration on multiple systems The standard dialog for browsing in the file system will be provided for this purpose The file filter automatically is set to dum which means device user management files The actual settings can also be documented as printed version by use of the command Print File menu or Document Project menu Access Rights This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor It is part of the Online User Management feature and serves to grant and deny the currently defined user groups certain permissions thus defining the users access rights on files or objects like for example an application on the PLC during runtime Notice that these permissions can only be assigned to groups not to particular users For this reason a user must be defined as member of a group The configuration of users and groups is done in the Users and Groups tab of the device editor Figure 6 4 shows the permission to add and remove children to from the PLC Logic object granted for user group main_control Start Page Configuration Bus Device X Communication Settings Users and Groups Access Rights Information Upload from device Download to device G Load from disk a Save to disk Actions Permissions Fil
297. nterruptTask00_ ExterninterruptPrg00 02 External IO EvT_0 TimelnterruptTask00__ TimelnterruptTask00 01 Cyclic 20ms f ExterninterruptTask01_ ExterninterruptPrg01 11 External IO EvT 1 TimelnterruptTask01 _ TimelnterruptPrg01 09 Cyclic 30ms f A AA Table 3 4 Tasks on Expert Profile Custom The Custom project profile allows the developer to explore all Runtime System potentialities implemented in the Nexto Series processing centrals No functionality 1s disabled no priority task 19 3 Concepts and Basic Components and programs association or nomenclature is imposed The only exception is for MainTask which should always have this name in this Profile Besides the real time tasks with 00 to 15 priorities which are scaled by priority this profile also allows the tasks definition with smaller priorities smaller from 16 to 31 In this range it is used the Completely Fair Scheduler time sharing which is necessary for the execution of the codes that might be blocked e g the use of sockets The developer is free to partially follow or not the organization defined in the other project profiles according to the particularities of his application On the other hand the custom model associated to this profile does not need pre defined elements task program or parameter The creation of all application elements is up to the developer However the user can generate the same elements available for the
298. nu bers O E retries before reporting a 2 of Retries li communication error Table 8 14 Device Configurations on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Mapping Configuration The mapping configuration on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping seen on Figure 8 53 follow the parameters described on Table 8 15 Figure 8 53 MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Screen a Possibilities Variable Value Name of the symbolic variable a nO IIA PISO Or Default Coil Writing 1 bit Coil Reading 1 bit Holding Register Writing 16 bits Holding Register Reading 16 bits RRA LYRE cad Holding Register Mask AND 16 bits Holding Register Mask OR 16 bits Input Register 16 bits Input Status 1 bit a 1 to 65536 1 to 65536 Table 8 15 Mapping Configurations on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Data Start a Address MODBUS data initial address MODBUS data size Range of addresses of the configured data Data Range 284 8 Editors Request Configuration The request configuration on MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping seen on Figure 8 54 follow the parameters described on Table 8 16 Mappings Requests General Parameters Carts Vr Type COS AGNOSTIC SRUCTST DAG MODELS ATAPI 3 Figure 8 54 MODBUS RTU Master for Symbolic Mapping Data Request Screen Configuration Description Default Possibilities 01 Coils Reading 02 Input Status Reading 03 Holding Reg
299. odified project is no longer possible after a Clean operation Clean all Clean In this case the information on which objects have been changed since the last download will be deleted Thus only the complete project can be downloaded Consider the following before going to do an online change Is the changed code without any errors Application specific initializations reference run etc will not be processed because the machine is keeping its state Can the new program code really do without such initializations Pointer variables keep their value from the last cycle If the user points on a variable which now has changed its size the value will not be correct any longer For this reason the user should re assign pointer variables in each cycle If the active step in a function chart gets removed the chart will remain inactive NOTE Online changes may not be applied when you change device parameters such as bus modules PROFIBUS parameters and MODBUS mappings The same is true 1f you add or remove devices and also for tasks configuration Boot Application Boot Project A boot application is the project which will be started automatically when the controller gets started booted For this purpose the project must be available on the PLC in a file lt project name gt app This file can be created in offline or online mode by command Create boot application Online menu At each successful download automatical
300. ogramming Documents Related to this Manual For additional information about MasterTool IEC XE the user can examine other specific documents in addition to this one These documents are available in its last review on www altus com br General Regards on ALTUS Documentation Each product has a document called Technical Characteristics CT where there are the characteristics for the product in question Additionally the product may have User Manuals manual s codes if applicable are always mentioned at CTs from the respective modules 2 Technical Description MasterTool IEC XE Support Documentation It is advisable to consult the following documents as a source of additional information CE114000 Nexto Series Features and Configuration English CT114000 S rie Nexto Caracter sticas e Configura es Portuguese CS114000 Serie Nexto Especificaciones y Configuraciones Spanish CE114100 CPUs Nexto Series Features and Configuration English CT114100 CPUs S rie Nexto Caracter sticas e Configura es Portuguese CS114100 CPUs Serie Nexto Especificaciones y Configuraciones Spanish CE103705 MasterTool IEC XE Features and Configuration English CT103705 MasterTool IEC XE Caracter sticas e Configura es Portuguese CS103705 MasterTool IEC XE Especificaciones y Configuraciones Spanish MU214600 Nexto Series User Manual English MU214000 Manual de Utilizac o S rie Nexto Portuguese MU214300 Manua
301. oject to other CPUs the refresh button should be disabled The list can be exported to or imported from a XML file To export use El button to get the standard dialog for saving a file The file filter is set to xml files xml The log file will be stored with the specified file name with extension xml in the chosen directory To view log entries stored in an xml file which might have been exported in this way use button The standard dialog for browsing for a file will open In addition here the filter 1s set to xml files xml Choose the desired log file and its entries will be displayed in a separate window For clearing the current log table that is removing all displayed entries use 2 button If option Offline Logging is activated also certain offline actions will be logged which do not refer to the connection with the PLC DUT Editor User defined data types can be created in the Data Unit Type editor DUT editor This 1s a text editor and behaves according to the currently set text editor options The DUT editor will be opened automatically in a wndow when adding a DUT object in the Add object dialog In this case it provides by default the syntax of an extended structure declaration which then might be changed as desired to a simple structure declaration or to the declaration of another data type unit for example an enumeration The editor also opens when you open an existing DUT object currently selected
302. oject while the programming system will stay opened If the project contains non saved modifications you will be asked whether you want to save these changes Masterlool EC XE The current project has been changed Do you want to sawe the changes M o Cancelar Figure 7 3 Project Alterations For terminating MasterTool IEC XE use command Exit Save Project Symbol lal Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt S gt This command is used to save the project at the currently defined location It is only available if any modifications have been done in the project since the last saving This is indicated by an asterisk behind the project name in the title bar W Project project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Onl art Bla Y Ea Figure 7 4 Title bar Modified Project In case the project is write protected the following message dialog Figure 7 5 will be opened 91 7 Menu Commands Save of Read Only File The project file Test project cannot be saved because itis write protected You can either save the file in a different location or the application can attempt to remove the write protection and overwrite the file in its current location Overwrite Cancel Figure 7 5 Message Dialog Project Write Protected The Save As field allows to define a new project path Save Project As This command is used to save the project whereby location and type of the file ca
303. ol This command available in the SFC Editor transforms a parallel branch to an alternative branch Notice that after a branch transformation you must check and adapt the chart appropriately that is you must arrange steps and transitions as required for the respective type of branching Insert Branch Symbol iS This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a branch left to the currently selected element s Insert Branch Right Symbol o This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a branch right to the currently selected element s To insert it each left to the currently selected step use command Insert branch e Ifthe uppermost element of the current selection is a transition or an alternative branch an alternative branch will be created e Ifthe uppermost element of the current selection is a step a macro a jump or a parallel branch a parallel branch with label Branch lt x gt will be inserted This is a default label name where x is a running number You can edit the label name The branch label might be used as a jump target 177 7 Menu Commands e If currently a common element of an existing branch is selected horizontal line the new branch will be added to the existing branches on the right most position If currently a complete arm of an existing branch is selected horizontal line the new branch will be added directly right to that one NOTE Notice that branches can be transformed by comman
304. ol_RTU_Master MODBUS Symb 23 DG_NX1001 AT QB21681 T_DIAG NX1001_1 g MODBUS_Device MODBUS Device 24 DG NX1005 diagnostics variable iA oes 25 DG_NX1005 AT QB21683 T_DIAG NX1005 1 i 26 DG NX2001 diagnostics variable J MoDBUs_symbol_RTU_slave MODBUS Symbo 27 DG_NX2001 AT QB21687 T_DIAG NX2001 1 NETI 28 DG_NX2020 diagnostics variable J MoDBUS_Symbol_Client MODBUS Symbol Cieni 29 DG_NX2020 AT QB21691 T_DIAG NX2020 1 J MODBUS_Device_1 MODBUS Device 30 END VAR J MODBUS_Client MODBUS Client 31 a MODBUS Server MODBUS Server a MODBUS_Symbol_Server MODBUS Symbol Se 8 Devices POUS 4 m r El Messages Current user nobody INS Lni Coli Chi Figure 10 3 Diagnostics Variables Using Communication Drivers Through Symbolic Mapping The Disables object is used to declare disabling requests variables in drivers which use symbolic mapping These variables can be declared directly by the user in any POU or GVL but can also be generated automatically using the Generate Disabling Variables button available on the screen of the drivers request configuration If the object does not exist in the project yet it is created after pressing the button After that if necessary the variables declared in this object may be edited 326 10 Diagnostics Arquivo Editar Visualizar Projeto Compilar Comunica o Depurar Ferramentas Janelas Ajuda SS A IEI E ALIADA BIS le Dispositivos x X B
305. om the Extern type with priority fixed in 02 two the task called TimeInterruptTask0O0 is an interruption task from the cyclic type with priority fixed in 1 one The basic project model includes these three task already completely defined as shown in Table 3 2 The developer needs only to implement the program contents p al E ExterninterruptTask00 ExterninterruptPrg00 02 Extemal lO_EVT_0O TimelnterruptTask00 TimelnterruptTask00 01 Cyclic 20ms Table 3 2 Tasks on Basic Profile In the Normal profile the application has a user task from the cyclic type called MainTask This task is responsible for the execution of a single programming unit POU called MainPrg This program and this task are similar to the only task and only program of the Single profile but here the application can integrate additional user tasks This other tasks are called CyclicTask00 CyclicTask01 etc each one responsible for the execution of the respective program CyclicPrg lt nn gt The CyclicPrg lt nn gt tasks are always from the Cyclic type with priority fixed in 13 thirteen equal to MainTask These two types form a group called basic tasks which the associated programs can call other POUs from the Program function or Function Block types Furthermore this profile can include interruption tasks with higher priority than the basic tasks which can preempt these tasks execution at any time The task called ExternInterruptTask00 is
306. on e Logoff e Permissions Logon Symbol This command opens the Logon dialog for logging on to a project or library via a defined user account 147 7 Menu Commands Logging on with a certain user account means to log on with those object access rights which are granted to the group which the user belongs to The configuration of user accounts and groups 1s done in the Project Settings subdialog User Management For an overview see User and Access Right Management Please select the project or library where you want to logon and enter your user name and password Project Library User name userl Password TEREA Figure 7 58 Logon To log on select the project or an included library from the selection list in the Project Library field Enter User name and Password of a valid user account noticing that each project or library has an own user and access rights management Log on with OK If already another user is logged on the project this one will be logged out automatically by the new logon action When you are logged on to a project or library and try to perform an action for which you have no right automatically the following Logon dialog will be opened giving the possibility to log on with another user account provided with the appropriate rights In order to perform this action you must logon as a user which is member of one of the following groups Owner Please enter your user name and password P
307. on which is occupied by a character or a white space Wrap guide If soft or hard word wrap is activated see above tab Editing the defined wrap margin will be indicated by a vertical line in the defined color Color of the cursor caret Selection color The currently selected area will be highlighted with this color 216 7 Menu Commands Folded line foreground The header of a closed folded section of code lines will be written in this color Folded line background The header of a closed folded section of code lines will be highlighted in this color Choose the font to be used in the text editor By a mouse click on the sample field you get the standard dialog for setting the font Table 7 4 Visual Help to Edition Matching brackets prog_st ie al E en Highlight current line E 31a I F End of line markers mM gt IF a 1 4 lineej Folder line background a Folder line foreground TF ivar a c Eje EHD IF Wrap guide Matching brackets ee selection color Caret color Figure 7 131 Examples for the Settings in the Text Area Dialog Margin Definition of colors font mouse click definitions concerning the area left to the editing area of the text editor window 217 Monitoring gi CFC Editor 9 Declaration editor AF FBD LD and IL editor Features ald International Settings Ga Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Es SmartCodi
308. on and Consumption Cydic x Interval e g t 200ms 100 ms ia Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostc Watchdog il Library Manager Enable 3 MainPrg PRG B POU PRG Time e g t 200ms 50 ms y gt 4 Task Configuration 2 Configuration ay tz MainTask a Configuration Bus nx3010 Nx3010 POUs Y comi Add POU POU Comment Y com2 Remove POU MainPrg Y NETI Open POU Change POU Move Up Move Down 4 p El Messages Current user nobody Figure 4 13 Configuring a Task POU Task Connection As described previously for a POU to be executed in the application it must be connected to a task In the project profiles without considering the Custom the POUS are already associated to its respective tasks However in case the Custom profile is being used or new POUSs are created they must be connected to the tasks 41 4 Quick Start To associate a created POU the desired task must be accessed through a double click on it in the device tree and the Add option selected After this a screen called Input Assistant will appear on the screen where the desired POU must be selected as shown on Figure 4 14 Input Assistant Categories Items Programs a Mame Type Origin 18 Application Application E MainPrg PROGRAM Insert with arguments Insert with namespace prefix 4 Structured view W Show documentation Documentation PROGRAM MainPrg Figure 4 14 Connecting POUs to Tasks Max
309. on settings The variable will be immediately entered in the record tree To modify the variable settings later just select the variable entry in the record tree again and use the Variable Settings dialog again e Graph color From the given color selection list choose a color in which the trace curve for the variable should be displayed e Graph type Specify here how the particular data points in the trace curve of the variable should be displayed It is recommended to use the Line type for big volumes of data See Table 8 6 Type No graph will be displayed Line The points are connected to a line Crosses The points are indicated by crosses The points are connected in shape of a staircase vertical line up to the y value of the next point from there horizontal line up to the x value The points are indicated by dots Table 8 6 Graph Type e Activate minimum warning If this option is activated the trace graph will be displayed in the color defined in Warning Minimum Color as soon as the variable exceeds the value defined in Critical lower limit e Critical lower limit See above Activate minimum warning e Warning minimum color See above Activate minimum warning e Activate maximum warning If this option is activated the trace graph will be displayed in that color which is defined in Warning maximum color as soon as the variable exceeds the value defined in Critical upper limit e Critical upper limit See above Activ
310. oncepts and Basic Components The Project Information dialogs can be used to edit or view project specific information like e g file data statistics on the objects author name etc For a detailed description see Project Menu External File Any external file with any extension can be added to the POUs view of a project via the Add Object command In the Add object dialog choose object type External File Press button L Jfor getting the dialog for browsing for a file the path of which will be entered to the field below File path In the field below Name automatically the name of the chosen file will be entered without extension The user can edit this field to define another name for the file under which 1t should be handled within the project Select one of the options As long as the external file is available as defined the defined update options will effect accordingly Otherwise just the file version stored in the project will be available e Remember the link The file will be available in the project only if it is available in the defined link path e Remember the link and embed into project A copy of the file will be stored internally in the project but also the link to the external file will be remembered When the external file changes then If the external file 1s linked to the project the user can additionally select one of the options o Reload the file automatically The file will be updated within the project as s
311. ontext menu when an application object is selected in the device tree then the selected application will be affected no matter whether it is set active 183 7 Menu Commands The following situations are possible when going to login with the currently active application error free communication settings configured properly e The application is not yet available on the controller You will be asked you to confirm the download For this purpose a dialog box with the following text will open Application lt application name gt does not exist on device Do you want to create it and proceed with download The Details button in this dialog provides information on already applications on the PLC corresponding to the information available in the Applications dialog of the Device Editor e The application project is already available on the controller and has not been modified since the last download the login will be done without further interaction with the user e Another version of the application is already available on the controller in not running mode You will be asked whether that should be replaced via a dialog box with the following text Unknown version of Application lt Application gt on target Do you want to perform a download and replace the application Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series CPUs Manual The Details button in this dialog provides some information P
312. ontrol systems from medium or high end applications Due to its compact size and superior performance Nexto can also be used for small automation systems with time critical requirements MasterTool IEC XE is a complete tool for programming debugging and performing configuration and simulation of user applications Based on a concept of being integrated flexible and easy to use this software provides six programming languages defined by IEC 61131 3 standard Structured Text ST Sequential Function Chart SFC Function Block Diagram FBD Ladder Diagram LD Instruction List IL and Continuous Function Chart CFC MasterTool IEC XE allows the use of different languages on the same application providing to the user a powerful way to organize the application and to reuse codes used in previous applications This product offers features for every stage of an automation application starting from initial graphical architecture topology analyses passing through a programming environment that supports IEC 61131 3 languages and a realistic simulation tool where the user can verify application s behavior before running in a real system and ending in a complete diagnostics and status visualization interface MasterTool IEC XE also offers two different protection schemes as application security features IP Protection and Secure PLC Login IP Protection is targeted to protect user s intellectual property allowing the user to protect the comple
313. oon as 1t has been changed externally o Prompt whether to reload the file A dialog will pop up as soon as the file has been changed externally The user can decide whether the file should be updated also within the project o Do nothing The file will remain unchanged within the project even when it is changed externally e Embed into project Just a copy of the file will be stored in the project There will be no further connection to the external file In the dialog there is the button Display file properties This button opens the standard dialog for the properties of a file which also appears when the user selects the file object in the POUs window and use command Properties The dialog contains a tab External file where the properties which have been set in the Add Object dialog can be viewed and modified Device Device Tree In the Devices window Device tree the hardware can be mapped on which the application is to run Each device object represents a specific target hardware object Examples controller field bus node bus coupler drive I O module monitor Each device is defined by a device description and must be installed on the local system in order to be available for inserting in the devices tree Figure 3 2 The device description file defines the properties of a device concerning configurability programmability and possible connections to other devices In the device tree however not only device objec
314. or Pasta Nome _ UntitledW project _ Untitled5 project Untitled project L Untitled project L Untitled project C Untitled project UntitledO project L Untitled 1 project _ Untitled 2 project Untitled13 project L Untitled 4 project Untitled15 project C Untitledl project Untitled17 project 4 Bibliotecas Documentos E Imagens al Musicas EE Videos Computador E Disco Local Cs ta Disco Local D ti Rede Nome Untitled11 project Project files Figure 7 2 Open Project When you select Open the chosen project will be opened or not The following cases are possible e Another project is still open e Project was not terminated regularly and AutoSave was activated e Project is read only Another Project is Open You will be asked whether it should be saved and closed 90 7 Menu Commands Project Not Terminates Regularly Auto save activated If the Auto Save function had been activated and MasterTool IEC XE had been terminated non regularly before the last project was saved after a modification you will get the Auto Save Backup dialog when going to re open the same project For details see Load and Save Project is Read Only If the project you want to open is read only on disk you will be asked whether you want to open the project in read only mode or whether you want to make the project writable Close Project This command will close the pr
315. or in which the trace curve for the variable should be displayed Graph type Specify here how the particular data points in the trace curve of the variable should be displayed It is recommended to use the Line type for big volumes of data Check Table 8 8 for all possible types of graphics Type Crosses A spline graph created of the recorded values will be displayed The points are connected in shape of a staircase vertical line up to the y value of the next point from there horizontal line up to the x value The points are indicated by dots Table 8 8 Types of Graphics 274 8 Editors e Activate minimum warning If this option is activated the trace graph will be displayed in the color defined in Warning minimum color as soon as the variable exceeds the value defined in Critical lower limit Critical lower limit See above Activate Minimum Warning Warning minimum color See above Activate Minimum Warning e Activate maximum warning If this option is activated the trace graph will be displayed in that color which is defined in Warning maximum color as soon as the variable exceeds the value defined in Critical upper limit e Critical upper limit See above Activate maximum warning e Warning maximum color See above Activate maximum warning e Appearance This button opens the Appearance of the Y axis dialog where you can set up the display of the trace window for the currently configured Y axis colors and scrol
316. orizontal Tab Group Symbol E This command is available 1f several editor windows are arranged in tabs It will place the currently active tab window in a new separate tab group below the existing one active window means that window where the cursor was last placed If you open a further object that 1s a further editor window this will be added to that tab group which contains the currently active window 226 7 Menu Commands New Vertical Tab Group Float Dock Symbol m This command is available if several editor windows are arranged in tabs It will place the currently active tab window in a new separate tab group to the right of the existing one active window means that window where the cursor was last placed If you open a further object that is a further editor window this will be added to that tab group which contains the currently active window This command can be used to un dock a window that is currently docked that is fix part of the MasterTool IEC XE user interface frame The window will become floating and can be positioned anywhere on the screen To dock a floating window use the Dock command This command can be used to dock a window which previously has been undocked by a Float command Auto Hide This command can be used to hide a window The window will be represented by a tab at the border of the MasterTool IEC XE user interface and only be visible if you click with the cursor in
317. ow The command is not available in IL editor Networks with branch elements cannot be converted to IL 164 7 Menu Commands Insert Branch Above Symbol 471 This command is available for inserting another branch within an existing one above the current cursor position Insert Branch Below Symbol Hl This command is available for inserting another branch within an existing one below the current cursor position Update Parameters Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt U gt This command can be used in FBD LD or IL editor to update the parameters inputs outputs of a box which is already inserted in a network after having changed its interface for example by adding an output The already defined connections of inputs and outputs remain unchanged resp if an input or output gets added this will get the and can be assigned 1 Original version of 2 Function block 3 Updated function the function block with modified added block by Update two outputs output Parameters in the FUNCTION BLOCK fublo FUNCTION BLOCK fublo FBD network VAR IHPUT VAR INPUT inl INT inl THT ft inst in2 TNT in INT fublo EHD VAR END VAR a inl ioutl ergvar VAR OUTPUT VAR OUTPUT a ing Loute f ivar ioutl INT ioutl INT ioutip2 gt E i1oute INT ioutz2 IHT FER AFD icut INT fF inst FHD VAR fublo 7 a inl ioutl ergyvar 2 inz iout4pivar Figure 7 79 Update Parameters in FBs Remove Unused FB Call Parameters
318. ow operand comment E Show symbol comment E Show symbol address Pl Fixed size for operand fields 7 Menu Commands Behavior Placeholder for new operands E Empty operands for function block pins Figure 7 135 FBD LD and IL Editors Viewing Options Show network title the title of the network if set is displayed in the upper left corner of a network 1 network title network comment Label symbol comment IED ivar operand content Figure 7 136 Components in the Editor s View e Show network comment the comment if set network is displayed in the upper left corner of a network If the title of the network is visible the comment will appear on the line below the title e Show box icon If a function block or variable available in the library or in the properties of the object are provided with an icon bitmap this will be displayed inside the box in the FBD and LD editors The standard operators also include icons 220 7 Menu Commands TRUE IN T varoutput pt in PT Y ET Figure 7 137 Boxes with icons for standard operators on a FBD network Show operand comment the comment that can be assigned to a variable on the implementation part of the editor is displayed The comment of the operand only refers to the current position of variable use unlike symbol comment which is defined in the declaration of a variable Show symbol comment the comment of each symbol variable will
319. ownload Bus Editor The bus editor feature already comes preset according to the CPU model and to the selected source in the wizard Its configuration can be changed via the Configuration Bus option located in the device tree 232 8 Editors File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Sa e oa 3 A Coa Devices J Device NX3010 S E PLcLogic Application 8 Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption pa Diagnostic Explorer Diagnostic i Library Manager E FB1 FB 2 MainPrg PRG Task Configuration MainTask Configuration Bus Nx3010 Nx3010 Y comi Y com2 Y NETI NX9001 00 E Messages 24 Vde 16 DI Module NX1005 24 Vdc 8 DO Transistor 8 DI Mixed Module NX2001 24 Vdc 16 DO Transistor Module Add Device Current user nobody Figure 8 1 Bus Editor To add a device to the bus 1t must be selected in the Products Library and dragged to the desired spot insertion Remove Device To remove a device on the bus just click the right mouse button on it and select Delete or click the left mouse button on the device and click on lt DELETE gt key NOTE Online changes cannot be applied when the devices parameters are changed on the bus or when devices are added or removed Digital I O Module Editor By adding a digital I O module to the bus there are three possible configuration screens for
320. paces e g in string literals are never ignored Ignore Comments Ignore Properties Folders access rights exdusion from build POU bitmaps etc Figure 7 55 Project Compare Dialog On Compare the currently open project with field the reference project can be e Project on disk by default the path of the actual project itself is entered so that it will be compared against its version latest saved You can replace it by modifying the file path after a click on the text field Alternatively you may make use of the La standard dialog box for browsing after a click on e Project in a source control database where you first have to specify the host name as well as the number of the port Afterwards you may insert the path of the designated project in the text field or select it via the standard L dialog box for browsing after a click on On Compare options field one or several of the following options concerning the comparison can be activated e Ignore Whitespace Discrepancies due to a different number of blanks will not be mentioned e Ignore Comments Comments will be excluded from comparison e Ignore Properties Object properties will not be compared After closing the dialog Project Compare with OK the comparison is executed according to the Settings Survey of Comparison Result by means of Marked Device Trees The result of the comparison is represented in a new window entitled Project Compare Difference
321. part of the dialog e Filter The list can be reduced to all devices with a Target ID matching with that of the device currently configured in the project e Sorting order The list can be sorted according to the Name resp Node Address in alphabetical resp ascending order Below the node tree the following commands are available e Do not save network path in project Activate this option if the current network path definition should not be stored in the project but in the local option settings on your computer So the path setting will be restored if the project is reopened on the same computer but will have to be redefined if the project is used on another system e Secure online mode Activate this option if the user for security reasons should be prompted for confirmation when selecting one of the following online commands Force values Release force list for lt application gt Single Cycle Start lt application gt Stop lt application gt and Write Values In the context menu of the node tree objects we can find the following commands e Change Node Name This command opens the same named dialog where is possible to view the current name and add a new one to the selected device e Delete Selected Device This command removes the currently selected device or gateway In the right part of the dialog there are the buttons e Set active path This command sets the communication channel currently selected in the tree below
322. pe Name Address Datatype Initialization Comment Attributes 1 VAR ARRAY 0 4 0 2 OF DINT 1 40 1 260 2 1 2 0 3 1 attribute displaymode hex warning 2 VAR vari OBO INT ABINGE L E Jenya yu 1 Varl t varl 1 A Figure 8 8 Tabular Editor View The tabular view of the editor provides columns for the usual definitions required for a variables declaration Scope Name Address Data type Initialization Comment and Attributes pragma The particular declarations are inserted as numbered lines The declaration header can be edited in the Edit Declaration Header dialog which opens on the same named command Ehr Decaan Cee Dedaration PROGRAM Comment program for temp calculation Figure 8 9 Edit Declaration Header Dialog Attributes dialogs for specifying pragma instructions and attributes 239 8 Editors To add a new line of declaration above an existing one first select this line and use command Insert from the toolbar or the context menu To add a new declaration at the end of the table click beyond the last existing declaration line and also use the Insert command The newly inserted declaration by default first uses scope VAR and the recently entered data type Automatically the input field for the obligatory variables name will be opened where you must enter a valid identifier and close with lt ENTER gt or by a mouse click on another part of the view Each
323. pened where you have to choose whether the object from the clipboard should be entered below or above In order to copy a selection onto the clipboard without deleting it use the Copy command In order to remove a selected area without changing the clipboard use the Delete command Symbol A Default Shortcut lt DEL gt This command deletes the selected area from the editor window It does not change the contents of the clipboard The command applies to the selected object For the type of selection the same rules apply as with the Cut command In order to delete a selected area and simultaneously put it on the clipboard use the Cut command Default Shortcut lt CTRL A gt This function selects all the content of the currently opened device For example in POUs and lists it selects the complete code In the graphic editor it selects all the devices that are there Remember that not all editors support the Select All command and that its use can be limited in some editors Find Replace Find The category Find Replace provides commands which can be used to perform a find action concerning certain strings in the project Available commands Find Replace Find Next Find Next Selected Find Previous Find Previous Selected Symbol gi Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F gt Use this command to search the project for a certain string All editable places within the project objects will be searched
324. plied See chapter compatibility between versions of the documentation to see if was no format changes in the parameters Choosing No the parameters format of devices will be updated as amended However the parameters will be changed to the configurator default values NOTE If the model of CPU used is modified this name is not changed This behavior may cause confusion if the user does not change the default name which is the CPU model with which the project was created For example a project created with NX3010 CPU with its default name kept after the CPU modified to NX3020 will keep your name as NX3010 until it is modified by the Updating an Old Project When a project was created in a different MasterTool IEC XE version from that one installed on the computer it is necessary to make a modification to the device available version in the updated MasterTool Accordingly the Device object in the configuration tree project will display the icon at its side as well as other objects that were also modified from one version to another Update should always be taken to a more current version of the device but of the same type 1 e if the project was created with a NX3010 UCP model the upgrade should be made to the most current version of this same model 141 7 Menu Commands Before starting an update it is important to check the documentation of the modules used in the project If there is any incompatibility between the par
325. points currently set can be viewed and edited and new breakpoints might be entered Notice also that the breakpoint positions will be remembered when you log out They will be indicated by faded red bullets Currently a non dynamic version of online help is installed By default 1t can be accessed via the Help menu The language in which the help pages are displayed can be changed in the Options menu International Settings dialog Context Sensitive Help Default Shortcut lt F1 gt You may press lt F1 gt in within an active window a dialogue or on a menu command to open the online help If a menu command is selected the corresponding help page will be displayed Likewise lt F1 gt is executed on a selected text for example a key word a basic function or an error message within the message window the corresponding help page will be displayed 66 4 Quick Start Uninstallation Update Repair To uninstall the programming system and its additional components or to modify the current installation executes the current setup file 67 5 User Interface 5 User Interface The following chapter describes the MasterTool IEC XE programming system user interface e User Interface Components e Customizing the User Interface e View objects in online mode User Interface Components The MasterTool IEC XE programming user interface 1s an arrangement of components see below Figure 5 1 This interface depends on the
326. ppercase automatically AutoFormat E Text editor Automatically list selection in cross reference view Figure 7 144 SmartCoding Options Dialog e Declare unknown variables automatically Autodeclare If this option is activated the Autodeclare dialog will open automatically when you enter a not yet declared identifier in any programming language editor e List components after typing a dot This means that when entering a dot in an editor at a position where an identifier is expected you will get a selection list with possible entries e List components immediately when typing As soon as you enter any character in the editor a list will open which contains all available identifiers and operators Depending on which character sequence you have entered automatically the first entry of this list matching this character sequence will be selected Anyway you can select any item in the list by placing the cursor on the required item and pressing lt ENTER gt key e Convert keywords to uppercase automatically Autoformat If this option is activated all keywords used in text parts of editors automatically will be written in capital letters Example If you enter bVar bool this will be converted to 1Var BOOL e Automatically list selection in cross reference view If this option is activated the Cross Reference View always automatically lists the references of the variable currently selected in the active editor
327. pplication MainPrg FBinst1 e Tasks Tasks during the run of which the breakpoints should be noticed n in case of no restriction default and particular task name s Example MainTask SubTask1 e Condition Definition of when number of hits the breakpoint should cause a break in processing possible entries see New Breakpoint Example Break when the hit count is equal to 3 113 7 Menu Commands e Current Hit Count Indicates how often the breakpoint has been run through hit up to now Example 3 The following functions are available as buttons in the upper right part of the dialog for editing the current breakpoints parameters and for removing or adding breakpoints Symbol Name Description S New breakpoint Opens the New breakpoint dialog for defining a new breakpoint See description of the corresponding command Clean breakpoint Removes the breakpoint do not mix up with disabling Enable Disable breakpoint Toggles the breakpoint between enabled and disabled L In case of disabling the breakpoint will not be removed from the list but can be re enabled Properties Dialog Breakpoint Properties will be opened where you can modify the breakpoint parameters The dialog matches the New Breakpoint dialog See the corresponding command for a description 5 Go to source position The Select Online State dialog will open from where z you can get to the so
328. proportional action V Enable integral action 4 Enable derivative action Enabled derivative action on PV Figure 8 90 Group Control Settings Tab Project Settings This tab contains the option Automatic Task Association with the option enabled the controller is automatically associated to a task system which allows it to be used normally If the option is disabled the controller should be associated with any task manually or called in some POU user Project Settings Autosetup Restrictions Fi Automatic Task Association Figure 8 91 Tab Project Settings Tab Autosetup Restrictions This tab contains fields that define the minimum and maximum values that the auto tuning can be assigned to the variables MV and PV Project Settings Autosetup Restrictions Minimun My 15 Maximum MV 85 Minimun PV 10 Maximum PV 90 Figure 8 92 Tab Project Settings Auto Tuning Procedure The procedure of automatic tuning of PID Control is accomplished by accessing object window Autosetup This is accomplished by clicking on the button Autosetup located in the Online Settings group of Settings amp Chart tab The Figure 8 93 displays the window Autosetup 314 8 Editors wW Autosetup Parameters PID parameters Process if 1 5 Step ejz GP PID parameters Proc
329. r experts only Information Figure 4 22 Selecting the Protocol Finding the Network As there 1s the possibility of more CPUs being connected to the network the user must find all communication units and select the desired one Initially the option Device must be accessed in the device tree double clicking on it In the tab Communications Settings select the Gateway and click on Scan network Then the user must wait until the MasterTool IEC XE software searches and show the available CPUs in the network 49 4 Quick Start File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help a a AIR AL a Device NX3010 ide a oo Select the network path to the controller Q Gateway 1 EB Bill of Materials B Configuration and Consumption Diagnostic Explorer Diagnostc i Library Manager E MainPrg PRG POU PRG 9 Task Configuration Configuration 2 MainTask s AA Nx3010 Nx3010 COM 1 a com2 Y NET eag jonpog Don t save network path in project Secure online mode Current user nobody Figure 4 23 Finding the CPU Following the desired CPU must be selected and the option Set active path clicked to activate the CPU and to inform the configuration software the CPU should communicate and send the project eS ee eee lt g eon en oe ee m Ereg Y 4 X B StartPage i Configuration Bus ff Device MR ConmuricatonSetngs ies 109 use
330. r the currently selected position in the diagram Zoom Into Macro Symbol gt This command is used in the SFC Editor to zoom into a macro that is to open the macro editor view The command can be used in offline and online mode Select the macro box in the SFC diagram and perform the command The main SFC editor view will disappear and instead the macro editor will be opened Here you can edit or just view the section of the chart which is just represented by the macro box in the main SFC view The zoom menu as usual for editor views is available in the lower right corner To return to the SFC standard view by command Zoom out of macro cs 2 SFC _prog q gt x PROGRAM SFC prog YAR gt count INT iExit INT iEntry INT LStepAction INT lt ii gt n w FF pa Figure 7 99 Macro Editor 181 7 Menu Commands Zoom Out of Macro Symbol lt This command is used in the SFC Editor to close the macro editor which is currently opened in order to return to the main SFC editor view The command can be used in offline and online mode Build Menu The command category Build provides commands for handling the project file These commands on the one hand serve to handle syntactical checks either just on the changed objects or on all objects of the active application On the other hand the user can perform an offline code generation run in order to check for detected compile errors before downloa
331. racing for the currently running application After having changed the application the trace is terminated automatically and you have to re download it After having logged out and logged in from to the application without having made any changes the trace will continue without a re download Configuration of Trace Graphs The Configuration dialog for the variables 1s also available in online mode and changes can be done online You can double click the name of the variable in the configuration tree in the right part of the trace editor or you can open the context menu there and select the configuration command 276 8 Editors MinMaxColor MinMasColor A AAA A AAA a AAA e AAA E AAA A AAA E AAA e PA A a al o A ame Mainfrg 51 007 A A A A ne A A A A e ee ma MainPrg 52 0UT we l E A ie GS a Pee Deans era ee o ma MainPrg 53 COUNTER 445 o ict ae dea E A E E CTE a ee a a A ma MainPrg 53 0UT T a o oc veils vee a leet hate mee ma MainPrg 54 OUT a et UD ee aes me MainPrg 53 GUT 64 PER spent A iit eS ETA users ma MainPrg 54 OUT mE czo oo e o ds a ma MainPrg 55 OUT 4199 PO eos set eae En a ES mm MainPrg B OUT _ O a es ee mm MainPra s7 OUT 120 Ae et et eSATA atl O PEER ma MainPrg 58 OLT To ec Ue Eo ee ia mee MainPrg 59 OUT A O O O eee en Peere eer cine mem MainPrg 510 0UT 1 A ree ee a ee A ee mas MainPrg D IN 899 ol eae ears h onoo od plc a mm MainPrg B EMABLE ne Ces a ee ma MainPrg 53 AMPLITUL S iii
332. raphic editors In case of a function block additionally the user has to decide whether the breakpoint should be set in the implementation or in an instance If it should be set in the implementation leave option Instance Path deactivated If it should be set in an instance activate option Instance Path to select the desired instance see the following e Instance Path If the currently selected POU is a function block and this option is deactivated the breakpoint will be set in the implementation body of the POU If you want to set the breakpoint in an instance activate the option and select the desired instance 190 7 Menu Commands Condition New Breakpoint Condition Tasks 2 Only break if the breakpoint is hit in one of the following tasks Fl Configuration Hit Count Break when the hit count is a multiple of T Enable breakpoint immediately Figure 7 102 New Breakpoint Dialog Condition e Only break if breakpoint is hit in one of the following tasks Activate this option if the breakpoint only should be effective if the POU where it is placed is processed by particular tasks All tasks currently defined in the project will be listed and the desired one s can be defined by setting tick s correspondingly Options of Hit Count group e Break always The program always will stop at the breakpoint In addition to that there is the possibility that the program do not stop at the breakpoint until th
333. rate line per each 240 8 Editors Attributes You can enter attributes and pragmas here without enclosing braces one per line attribute displaymode hex warning This is a warning text Part xy has been compiled completely Figure 8 11 Attributes Each variable is declared in a separate line the lines are numbered You can change the order of lines line numbers by selecting a line and move it one up or down by the Move up and Move down command from the toolbar or the context menu The list of declarations can be sorted according to each of the columns by a mouse click on the header of the respective column The column which currently determines the order is indicated by an arrow symbol ascending order or descending order Each further click in the column header changes between ascending and descending order To delete one or several declarations select the respective lines and use lt DEL gt or the Delete command from the context menu or from the toolbar Declaration Editor in Online Mode After login to the target system each object which has been opened in a wndow already in offline mode will automatically be displayed in online view The online view of the Declaration Editor presents a table like used in watch views The header line shows the actual object path lt device name gt lt application name gt lt object name gt It 1s not possible to add more than 16000 expressions
334. re that the new application code nevertheless will affect the desired behavior of the system Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered NOTES When an online change is done the application specific initializations homing etc will not be executed because the machine keeps its state For this reason the new program code might not be able to work as desired Pointer variables keep their values form the last cycle If there is a pointer on a variable which has changed its size due to an online change the value will not be correct any longer Make sure that pointer variables get re assigned in each cycle There are two ways to perform an Online Change 1 As soon as you try to log in again with a modified application checked via the compileinfo which has been stored in the project folder during the last download you will get asked whether you want to do an online change a download or login without changing 26 3 Concepts and Basic Components MasterTool IEC XE _ Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series CPUs Manual After this choose an option to login Login with online change Login with download Login without any change Cancel Details Figure 3 3 Login Dialog e Login with online change This option is selected per default Therefore if you confirm the dialo
335. re working in the POUs or devices view If you want to add a folder on the uppermost level in the objects tree of a view window make sure that the window is active but that no existing object or folder is selected If you want to add a folder on a lower level select that entry in the tree below which the folder should be inserted Then perform the command to open the Add Folder dialog and there define the name of the new folder The name may contain spaces digits and special characters Add Folder O Folder name Controls Figure 7 33 Add Folder 125 7 Menu Commands After confirming with OK the folder will be inserted in the tree preceded by the folder icon B If the folder has been created below an existing tree entry click on the plus sign which will now appear before that entry to make visible the new folder POUS v 2 X POUs Snes 3 Projet el 58 Project Controls Controls I GVLs D Subcontrols E Project Information GVLs GP Project Settings El Project Information ES Project Settings Figure 7 34 Folders in POUs View Edit Object Symbol i Use this command if you want to edit or view an object which is available in the POUs or Devices view The object must be selected then the command is available in the context menu and by default in the project menu The command will open the object in the appropriate editor If used in online mode you will get a dialog asking you in which view the object s
336. refore it is recommended that whenever discarding this type of product it should be forwarded to recycling plants which guarantee proper waste management It is essential to read and understand the product documentation such as manuals and technical characteristics before its installation or use Altus warrants its equipment as described in General Conditions of Supply attached to the commercial proposals Altus guarantees that their equipment works in accordance with the clear instructions contained in their manuals and or technical characteristics not guaranteeing the success of any particular type of application of the equipment Altus does not acknowledge any other guarantee directly or implied mainly when end customers are dealing with third party suppliers COPYRIGHTS Nexto and MasterTool IEC XE are registered trademarks of Altus Sistemas de Automa o S A Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Summary Summary O A AO II 1 INTRODUCTION csi idad iio aE AA ARANA A ANA 9 Documents Related t this Mad as 9 General Regards on ALTUS DocuMentatiON oooccccccncnnnnnncncnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnos 9 Master Fool IEC XE Support DOCU 10 Visual Ins Pecos 10 Technical SU O Eran ilodci n 10 Warning Messages Used in this Manual ssccsceceeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccccccccceccccccccccccceceececceceeeeeeee 11 Ze TECHNICAL DES CREP TION A
337. rent trace configuration in online mode you have to download the configuration to the runtime system The graphs of the trace variables will be displayed in the Trace Editor window and you might store them to an external file which later can be reloaded to the editor Commands for accessing the configuration dialogs as well as commands for modifying the currently displayed section of the trace curves resp graphs are available in the Editor window The readout of a trace may also be integrated within a visualization by use of the special visual element trace Available commands Download Trace Start Stop Trace Reset Trigger Cursor Mouse Scrolling Mouse Zooming Reset Visualization Compress Stretch Multi Channel 261 8 Editors Download Trace This command will download the trace configuration in order to get the tracing activated on the device runtime system This is necessary for the first tracing on an application and later always after any changes in the trace configuration or the application program Notice that an active Trace is indicated by a green background color of the Trace object in the Devices tree Start Stop Trace Symbols M This command toggles start and stop tracing If tracing currently is stopped the symbol is shown and performing the command means to restart the tracing that is start to display the variables values as from the actual time If tracing currently is running the symbol
338. rently set for a text editor and in online mode also appearing like described for the declaration editor The declaration must start with VAR GLOBAL and end with END VAR These keywords are provided automatically In between enter valid declarations of global variables Start Page Configuration Bus a GVL VAR GLOBAL global intvar INT 12 global boolvar BOOL global stringvar STRING END VAR Gs Pi Oy M es Figure 8 20 GVL Editor Library Manager Editor For general information on the library management in MasterTool IEC XE please see the corresponding item The Library Manager is used for including and handling libraries in a project The installation of libraries as well as the definition of library folders repositories is done by the Library Repository dialog which is also a component of the Library Manager and can be opened by the respective command in the menu bar or in the editor window NOTE The Library Repository dialog is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Professional or the option Enable repository dialog is enabled For further information about features see Features The object is available in the devices tree to any project and is created from the MasterTool Standard Project It can be added to the project via command Add Object It will be inserted as an object in the 251 8 Editors POUs view window or in the Devices view window assigned to a de
339. replaced in the tasks configurations Project A project contains the POU objects which make up a PLC program as well as the definitions of resource objects necessary to run one or several instances of the program application on certain target systems PLCs devices POU objects are managed in the POUs view window device specific resource objects are managed in the Devices view window A project 1s saved in a file lt project name gt project NOTE The look and the properties of the user interface are defined and stored in MasterTool IEC XE not in the project Project Template The basic configuration of a new project menu structure predefined objects is determined by the currently used project template The template is chosen when creating a new project file by command New Project For further information see Start MasterTool IEC XE POUs Window In the POUs window the user can add POUs external files etc Besides that it shows configurations objects and project information POUs Q x El Project Idi POU_2 PRG E POU_1 PRG E Project Information Ch Project Settings Figure 3 1 POUs Window Project Settings and Project Information The Project Settings and Project Information per default are objects in the POUs view The Project Settings dialogs provide the possibility to define various settings for the current project e g security page configurations etc 21 3 C
340. resent on the same subnet of the computer where the MasterTool IEC XE is installed just add the Gateway and keep the localhost option in the ZP Address parameter This is the case depicted in Figure 8 16 where Gateway GWO of the computer PC10 is being used to access the device from same subnet PLC20 In Figure 8 16 are represented six different nodes in three different subnets The nodes are addressed through IP address class C and the communication between the different subnets is provided by the element called Router which is also present in the representation 246 8 Editors IP 192 168 0 10 IP 192 168 0 20 PC10 GWO PLC20 Subnet O Subnet 1 Subnet 2 IP 192 168 1 10 IP 192 168 2 10 PLC110 GW1 PC210 GW2 IP 192 168 1 20 IP 192 168 2 20 PLC120 PLC220 Figure 8 16 Remote Gateway However there are cases in which you need to access other subnets For that there must always be a gateway inside the other subnet where you want to access There are two alternatives for this situation The first of these would add a gateway GW2 in the computer PC210 to access the devices that are on the same subnet PLC220 On the other hand it is also possible to access a device PLC120 in the case of a CP Series Nexto through another device on the same subnet PLC110 In this case the used gateway GW1 is part of another device known on the same subnet This 1s not the ideal situation because when you access a
341. rface Interruption Input output I O I O Module Local bus Local host Login Master Multicast kbytes LED Menu Module hardware Node Operands Ping PDO PLC POU Programmable Controller 11 Glossary Glossary In a redundant system the active CPU performs the control of the system by reading the values of points of entry running the program application and triggering the values of outputs Finite sequence of well defined instructions to solve problems Is the program loaded into a PLC which determines the operation of a machine or process Data backup Basic information unit it may be at 1 or 0 logic level Breakpoint in application for debugging Information unit composed by eight bits Central Processing Unit It controls the data flow interprets and executes the program instructions as well as monitors the system devices Set of interconnected I O modules to a CPU or to a head of network field Set of equipment nodes interconnected by communication channels Dynamic Menu with content according to the current context PLC execution mode step by step where each step is a cycle Preset value for a variable used in case there is no definition Procedure used to detect and isolate faults It is also the set of data used for this determination which serves for the analysis and remediation Load configuration or program in the PLC A unit of information transmitted on the network Equipment for co
342. riable is used resp accessed at this location Declaration Read Write Call Scope Scope of the variable Global Local IEC address if defined Position of the variable reference within the editor for example line network Comment attached at the declaration of the variable Table 7 2 Information on the Variable The list can be sorted alphabetically along one of the columns By a mouse click on the column title field the sorting will be done in ascending or descending order toggles with each further mouse click A double click in a line of the cross reference list the opens the corresponding POU and the respective location of the variable will be highlighted there This corresponds to using button Show location when a list entry is selected Button Show previous location Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F4 gt will jump to the previous entry in the cross reference list Button Show next location Shortcut lt F4 gt will jump to the next entry in the cross reference list 115 7 Menu Commands Button Go to definition Shortcut lt F2 gt will jump to the location where the respective variable is declared The corresponding declaration editor will be opened and the variable will be highlighted there Button corresponds to command Browse cross references and will effect that the current references list is generated to the message window This might be useful if you want to keep the list available a
343. ription Default _ Possibilities 0 0 0 1 to IP Address Server IP address 0 0 0 0 955 955 255 954 TCP Port TCP Port 2 a 65534 Slave Address MODBUS Slave address 0a255 Table 8 26 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping General Configuration Configuration Possibilities Maximum Number of Amount of simultaneous Simultaneous requests that the client can ask 1 1 to 8 Requests to the server Communication Time out of the application level The connection is never closed in normal situations The connection is closed at the end of each communication The connection is closed after a time of inactivity s 10 to 3600 Time of Inactivity Time of inactivity 3600 Table 8 27 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Advanced Configurations The connection is closed after a time of inactivity s 10 to 3600 Define when the connection with the server is closed by the client Mapping Configuration The MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping configuration seen on Figure 8 65 follow the parameters described on Table 8 28 293 8 Editors Figure 8 65 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Screen Configuration Description Default Possibilities Variable Value Name of the symbolic variable Variable mars ee cana programor Coil Writing 1 bit Coil Reading 1 bit Holding Register Writing 16 bits Holding Register Reading 16 bits Data T MODBUS data t ata Type ala ype Holdin
344. rk This corresponds to the common paste command Paste Contacts Paste right after Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt G gt This command is only available in LD editor It pastes the elements or the section of the network which has been put to the clipboard before by a Copy or Cut command right to the currently selected contact element in the network Paste Contacts Paste above Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt H gt 161 7 Menu Commands This command is only available in LD editor It pastes the elements resp the section of the network which has been put to the clipboard before a Copy or Cut command above the currently selected contact element in the network Insert IL Line below Symbol This command is only available in the IL editor It is used to insert a further instruction line below the currently selected one Dele IL Line Negation Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt DEL gt This command is only available in the Instruction List editor It is used to delete the line where currently the cursor is positioned Symbol FBD ELD Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt N gt This command is used in FBD or LD to toggle the negation of an input an output a jump or a RETURN instruction It is not available in the IL editor where the corresponding modifiers have to be used appropriately ATTENTION If view is switched from FBD or LD to IL view and back the negations of some constructs mi
345. roject Build Online Debug Tools Window Help 2a MS lm inl A M AKIB TIS aX StartPage Configuration Bus jj Diagnostics 5 DiagnosticsProjet DIE Mar GLOBAL p Device NX3010 DG_NX3010 diagnostics variable 3 H PLCLogic DG_NX3010 AT QB21520 T_DIAG NX3010 1 6 Application DG_NX1001 diagnostics variable B Bill of Materials DG_NX1001 AT Sanepan T DIAG MEOH 13 Configuration and Con iini DG_NX1005 diagnostics variable DG NX1005 AT 30B22042 T DIAG NX1005 1 t cain cman anced DG NX2001 diagnostics variable 7 Diagnostic DG_NX2001 AT QB22046 T DIAG NX2001 1 MD Library Manager DG NX2020 diagnostics variable E MainPrg PRG DG_NX2020 AT QB22050 T_DIAG NX2020 1 S 8 Task Configuration DG_NX6000 diagnostics variable 2 MainTask DG_NX6000 AT QB22054 T_DIAG NX6000 1 fi Configuration Bus DG_NX5001 diagnostics variable 8 NX3010 6010 DG_NX5001 AT 9822072 T_DIAG NXS5001_1 3 NX5001 NX5001 DG_PO5063 diagnostics variable paa DG_POS063 AT QB22158 T_DIAG POS063_ 1 DG PO1000 16DI 24 Vdc Opto Coupled diagnostics variable l Po1000_16D1_24_vdc_Opto_c DG _PO1000_ 16DI_24 Vdc Opto Coupled AT 9522183 T_DIAG PO1000 1 S S com1 DG_MODBUS_RTU Master diagnostics variable J MODBUS_RTU_Master MODBUSR DG _MODBUS RTU Master AT QB22193 T_DIAG MODBUS RTU MASTER 1 4 com2 DG_MODBUS RTU Slave diagnostics variable MODBUS_RTU_Slave MODBUSR DG_MODBUS_RTU_Slave AT 3 0B22213 T_DIAG MODBUS_RT
346. roject Library Project Project User name Password Figure 7 59 Logon Dialog on a Non Permissible Action 148 Logoff 7 Menu Commands The upper part of the dialog shows just for information all groups which are provided with the necessary rights for the desired action If you have an user account for one of these groups you now might log on with the appropriate user name and password and finally perform the desired action The status bar always displays which user currently is logged on the project Current user useri Figure 7 60 Status Line Symbol This command logs off the currently logged on user from the current project No dialog or message appears If no user had been logged on to the currently opened project or to a referenced library an appropriate message will appear when trying to logoff If the user currently is logged on to more than one project or referenced library not necessarily with the same user account a Logoff dialog will appear From the Project Library selection list choose those project library for which you want to log off The name of the Current user is displayed just for information The status bar always displays which user currently is logged on the project Permissions This command opens the Permissions dialog where the rights to work on objects or to perform commands in the current project can be configured Notice that the rights concerning objects also same effect
347. roject name Last modification IDE version Author Description on the application in the IDE integrated development environment programming system confronted to that on the controller e A version of the application is already available on the controller in RUN mode You will be asked whether you really want to log in regardless and overwrite the currently running application For this purpose a dialog box with the following text will open Warning An unknown version of the application lt application name gt is currently in RUN mode on the PLC However do you want to download the latest code and replace the existing application Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series CPUs Manual The Details button in this dialog provides information on the application version in the programming system confronted to that on the controller e The application is already available on the controller but has been modified since the last download You will be asked whether an online change should be done or a login with loading the complete application code or a login without any change of the running application For this purpose a dialog box with the following text will open Please carefully check all of the download procedures described on Nexto Series CPUs Manual After this choose an option to login Login with online change Login with download Login without any change The Details button in the di
348. rom the description or library file will be listed now Remove those you do not need by button Remove Further categories might be added in the same way and finally you confirm with OK to get the dialog closed and to get the categories entered in the Library Categories field in the Project Information dialog 129 Properties 7 Menu Commands Project Information Value Propertes Automatically generate POUs for property access Figure 7 38 Project Information Dialog Properties Here you can define keys for some project properties These later can be used in customer specific external programs for the purpose of controlling the respective property At least the information defined in the Summary tab of the dialog will be visible as Keys in the properties table The properties names are used as key names the data type automatically will be Text and the Values will be the text strings as defined in the Summary tab Any further keys can be added as desired To add a key Enter a key name in the Key edit field choose the desired data type from the selection list at Type Text Date Number Boolean Version and in the Value edit field enter the desired value which must fit to the chosen data type Press button Add to add the new key to the Properties table To modify a key Select the entry in column Key of the Properties table then edit the entries in the edit fields above the table and press button Modify to update
349. rror message may be displayed by passing the mouse over the exclamation mark In this case when the Write button is pressed only the values of the fields that have no errors are actually modified in PLC The Figure 8 86 displays the preview of these fields after the Write button is pressed 311 8 Editors gt ctl o Cotino Figure 8 86 Viewing Parameters After Writing If the fields value have been changed and their value has not yet been sent to the PLC it 1s possible to restore its current value by clicking with the right mouse button on the field and then selecting Actual value This operation is displayed in the Figure 8 87 Hii Actual value Figure 8 87 Restoring the Value of a Field PY Tab Advanced Settings After insertion of the PID Control object in the application the first step to use the PID controller is to adjust the PID loop settings according to the application To achieve this the tab Advanced Settings must be accessed The Figure 8 88 displays this tab Advanced Settings Input Output Settings Variable Maximum SP Raw 30000 00 SP Engineering 0 00 100 00 PY Raw PW_VARIABLE NAME i 30000 00 FV Engineering E 100 00 MV Raw MV VARIABLE NAME 30000 00 Control Settings Project Settings Autosetup Restrictions Sample Time ms Control Enable proportional action Enable integral action Enable derivative action Enabled derivative action on PV Figure 8 88 Advanced Settings tab 312
350. rruptTask00 Valid 0 0 0 0 0 0 ExternInterruptTask01 Valid 0 0 0 0 0 0 E FreeTask Valid 6011 11677 207 153 3976 51 MainTask Valid 241 467 4109 3649 4981 1458 11 228 156 TimeInterruptTask00 Valid 1204 2337 62 84 589 38 784 1656 1648 TimeInterruptTask0 1 Valid 803 1558 70 92 240 51 2 335 339 Figure 8 29 Task Configuration Monitoring NOTE In the Simulation mode there may be limitations and different behaviors For further information see Simulation Mode For each task the following information is displayed in a line Task name as defined in the task configuration Possible entries Not created has not been started since last update especially used for event tasks Created task is known in the runtime system but is not yet set up for operation Valid task is in normal operation Exception task has got an exception IEC Cycle Count Number of run cycles since having started the application 0 if the function is not supported by the target system Cycle Count Number of already run cycles Depending on the target system this can be equal to the IEC Cycle Count if cycles are even counted when the application is not running Last Cycle Time us Last measured runtime in us Average Cycle Time Average runtime of all cycles in us us Max Cycle Time us Min Cycle Time us Jitter us Min Jitter us Max Jitter us Table 8 3 Task Information Jitter Time between when the task was sta
351. rs E E 25 Task CONTOUR AMON dnd danilo 25 Important Notes for Multitasking Systems ooccccccccncccccnnnonnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 25 Code Generation and Online Change wis iia 26 Code Generation and Compile Information oooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnononnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 26 Onne CVA td cde ne a at asia 26 Boot Application Boot Pro cc cici 28 Projects Download Login Method without Project Differences ccccccccccccnnnononnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnos 28 MN ce uoueecescsuescaesaeseseteucsenseccesecetauceceuceavecweceseecousocasecstacescuseusaccccceetecocseousecseasuzcses 29 MODUS OUND soe tai 29 BrO Nac decada 29 EPI enrrsnn eer tere pee ee mene restr Senta tr mRPT Re Te eer Mees UTE Sr a ce reer Mera ete anee DOPE eee 29 PLM A A AA waive dou cast aaa AAA AAA AAA TO AAN 30 A cay E NE A E EE E 30 A O A 30 A O O 30 A QUICK STAR D aassicsicaciesacaancceacteete vasascsssactenawssscsaavacasecs vasateipsacdeusvuacucnasveciveisnasaieipuacsbesvuauuacesvesiveieoasaseisaucsuesss 31 Project Protesis TAREA E E E E 31 Start Master Lool TEC XE NAAA AAA AAA AREA AA AAA AAA 31 EUR eases E E TON 34 Creatine POUS aieea E E ES 36 Creatina T aSk Sern E E e O 38 Fask Conn oori Oae E O E as 40 POU TI ECOMEC UO eaa is 41 Maximum N MmD r of 1 aSk srpek a a S stelle E a 42 CPU COn IAN caos 42 LiD Are Sa E E E 44 Inserting a Protocol astas 45 MODB US R TU nal 45 MODBUS
352. rs and Groups Access Rights infomation El PLcLogi Select the network path to the controller 0 Application pa A Bill of Materials B Configuration and Consumption Fie Gateway 1 PA Diagnostic Explorer NX3010_192 168 15 26 001A a Diagnosis GH _nxs010_192 168 15 45 i il Library Manager 68 3C E MainPrg PRG NX3010_192 168 15 79 004F E Pou PRG a Task Configuration 2 Configuration MainTask nfiguration Bus A1e1qr yonpolg i Co J Nx3010 NX3010 Y COM1 9 com2 Y NETI Don t save network path in project Secure online mode Current user nobody Figure 4 24 Activating the CPU 50 4 Quick Start Building a Project In order to execute the verification of the created application the user must compile the project This is the most efficient way for finding or receiving error warnings regarding any mistake made during the product configuration and application edition To execute such procedure access the Build menu and click on option Generate code me mdt vew Profes I Lorne ote Figure 4 25 Building the Project After the processing time which varies according the user application size the errors and alarm messages in case they are needed will be shown below as depicted on Figure 4 26 File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help sS S IA O Al sae E Conga oas 9 vom CIA Device NX3010 S E PLC
353. rted and when the operating system indicates that it is running 260 8 Editors When the cursor is placed on a task name field the values can be reset to O for the respective task by the Reset command available in the context menu Task Configuration Commands Add Task This command adds a new task If currently the root entry is selected the new task will be appended at the end bottom of the current task list If currently another task entry is selected the new task will be inserted above this entry By default the new task will be named Task Task_1 Task_2 Task lt n gt If already a Task exists you can rename the task in the Task Properties dialog When inserting a task the dialog for setting the Task properties will be opened The maximum number of tasks is defined according to the used CPU model Trace Editor Trace The Trace functionality allows recording and reading the progression of the values of variables on the PLC over a certain time For this purpose the values of defined trace variables are steadily written to a MasterTool IEC XE buffer of a specified size and then can be viewed in the form of a graph along a time axis The configuration as well as the display of the trace sampling is done in the Trace Editor dialogs and views Multiple variables can be traced and displayed at the same time if desired in different views In order to start trace sampling according to the cur
354. rts an extended watchdog configuration then upper and lower limits as well as a default for the watchdog time and a time definition in percent might be predefined by the device description o Enable When this option is activated the watchdog is enabled This means that the task will be terminated in error status exception if the currently set watchdog 258 8 Editors Time gets exceeded whereby there is taken account of the currently set Sensitivity If option Update IO while in stop is enabled in the PLC Settings dialog the outputs will be set to the predefined default values The following cases are possible Contiguous time overruns the following is true Sensitivity Exception in cycle Table 8 2 Sensitivity Relationship x Exception Cycle Single time overrun Exception if the cycle time for the current cycle is greater than Time Sensitivity Example Time t 10ms Sensitivity 5 gt Exception as soon as the task once runs longer than SOms This serves to detect endless loops in the first cycle o Time e g t 200ms Watchdog time For a description see Enable o Sensitivity Number For a description see Enable If the task is MainTask the sensitivity is set to 1 Note that a watchdog may be disabled for particular by use of the functions provided by the library CmplIecTask library this may be useful for cycles requiring more time as usual due to initialization processes After declaring a
355. rvice and this service is represented by a control icon in the system bar Icon indicates a running icon indicates a stopped Gateway You can stop and restart the Gateway via the commands of the menu which 1s accessible by a click with the right mouse button on this icon If necessary the service also can be started in the Programs menu by selecting the Gateway entry As long as the gateway 1s properly running a green bullet He 1s displayed before the entry otherwise a red one 4 The bullet stays grey if the gateway has not been contacted yet depending on some communication protocols 1t 1s not allowed to poll the gateway so the status cannot be displayed Indented below the gateway entry open close via the sign you will see entries for all devices which are reachable through this gateway In case there is no entry use the button Scan network or Add Device Regard that those entries are stored locally on your system and not with the project The device entries are preceded by a i symbol Entries with a target ID different to that of the device currently configured in the project are displayed in grey font In the right window part of the device you see the respective Node Name Node Address Target ID Target Name Target Type Target Vendor and Target Version 243 8 Editors The display of the gateway and devices nodes tree can be controlled by filter and sorting functions See the selection boxes in the right
356. s 145 Start Page Configuration Bus Current Project H Device i Configuration i Nx3010 K lt Empty gt comi 4 COM2 A NET1 ti Nxsooo Ey PLC Logic C3 Application ES Bill of Materials la Configuration and Consumption a Diagnostic Explorer all Diagnostics FB1 a GL i Library Manager E MainPrg E POU E POU_SFC 2 H Task Configuration 2 Configuration E MainTask EN Project Information Project Settings Compare options Compare statistics ey Project Compare Differences umi oma CN io fo Ignore whitespace OFF Ignore comments OFF Ignore properties OFF 10 addition s 7 deletion s 9 change s 7 Menu Commands Test project C Temp i Configuration H Nx3030 E lt Empty gt W oMi A cOM2 Y NET1 A NET2 Y Nxso00 El PLCLogic E Bill of Materials F Configuration and Consumption 4 Diagnostic Explorer al Diagnostics ral Library Manager E MainPrg HA Task Configuration e Configuration 2 MainTask E Project Information Project Settings Figure 7 56 Comparison Result On top of the new window a toolbar is placed at your disposal followed by a title bar and a sub window The title bar as well as the sub window itself is subdivided into a left part representing the current project and the right one representing the reference project The corresponding file paths are displayed in the title bar whereas the sub window
357. s Overwrite Mode Go to Line Make Lowercase Make Uppercase Go to Matching Bracket Select to Matching Bracket Overwrite Mode Default Shortcut lt INS gt 105 7 Menu Commands Use this command to toggle between Overwrite mode option activated and Insert mode option deactivated When editing in overwrite mode the existing characters will be overwritten otherwise the new characters will be inserted Go to Line Use this command to jump to a certain line within a text editor A dialog Go to Line will be opened where you can insert the desired line number After closing the dialog with OK the cursor will be set to the start of the corresponding line Make Lowercase Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt U gt This command will set the currently marked text to lowercase Make Uppercase Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt U gt This command will set the currently marked text to uppercase Go to Matching Bracket This command will set the cursor at the next matching bracket This is valid for brackets in program lines as well as for bracket scopes Select to Matching Bracket This command will select the code lines up to the next matching bracket This is valid for brackets in program lines as well as for bracket scopes Bookmarks Menu and sub menus Bookmarks are displayed on the Edit menu depending on the active editor usually textual editors Bookmarks can be assigned to one or multiple li
358. s Devices or Visual Element Properties a special toolbar is available providing buttons for sorting viewing searching within the window This bar cannot be configured Each editor window provides a zoom function except in the ST language editor The zoom button GR in the lower left corner of the window opens a list from where you can choose one of the zoom levels 25 50 75 100 150 200 and 400 percent Notice that a printout always refers to the 100 view The user can also define the zoom level according to his needs he just has to enter the desired value in the corresponding field User Interface in Online Mode As soon as you log in with the project all objects which have been opened already in offline mode automatically will be viewed in online mode To open an object in online mode which had not been opened already in offline mode perform a double click on the object entry in the POUs or Devices window or use command Edit Object 70 5 User Interface If your choice is unambiguous the object will be opened in online mode Otherwise for example if there are several instances of the selected object function blocks etc contained in the project a dialog named Select Online State lt object name gt will appear where you can choose whether an instance or the base implementation of the object should be viewed and whether the object should be displayed in online or offline mode Select Online State FB1 Device P
359. s already available in the specified path you will be asked whether it should be overwritten Then a dialog box will appear asking whether the extracted project should be opened in the programming system 96 7 Menu Commands Source Download This command is available for creating and transferring an archive file of the actual project to any device The command opens the Select Device dialog where you have to choose the network path to the PLC like in the Communication Settings dialog Select the appropriate entry in the tree of available devices and press OK This will set up a connection to the device as long as the source code gets downloaded in the form of an archive file The source code can be re load to the programming system in offline mode by using command Source upload The default settings concerning destination device content and timing for the source download are defined in the Project Settings category Source Download Print The currently active editor view can be printed by using the Print commands Regard also the possibility to create a documentation of several or all objects of the project with a defined layout and a table of contents For further information see Export to CSV Page Setup Configures the printout layout For further information see Page Setup Recent Projects Use this command to select from a list of the most recently opened projects that one you want to reopen The number of projects
360. s automatically X offset 0 grid units Y offset 0 grid units cance Figure 7 81 Edit Working Sheet e Use the following dimensions If this option is activated the size of the worksheet will be determined by the following width and height values o Width Shows the current width in grid units Can be edited whereby it will not be possible to enter a width smaller than that which is actually required by the existing elements Increasing the value X will enlarge the width horizontally to the right o Height Shows the current height in grid units Can be edited whereby it will not be possible to enter a height smaller than that which is actually required by the existing elements Enlarging the value Y will enlarge the working sheet vertically downwards e Adapt the dimensions automatically This option is activated by default The size of the working sheet is defined by the bottommost height and the rightmost width element borders within the editor window The origin X 0 Y 0 is in the upper left corner The shift might not lead to an upper left corner less than 0 0 If option Use the following dimensions is activated in the upper part of the dialog the shift may not exceed the width and height defined 168 Negate EN ENO 7 Menu Commands there If option Adapt the dimensions automatically is activated the shift might exceed the current dimensions and the width and height values will be updated accordingly
361. s necessary to transfer documents from CPU to the PC where the MasterTool IEC XE software is installed the user must follow a procedure very similar to the previously described as the file must be selected from the right column and the button lt lt pressed placed on the center of the screen Furthermore the user has some operation options in the storing files area which are e New folder allows the creation of a new folder in the user memory area e Exclude item allows the files excluding in the folders in the user memory area e Update allows the file updating on the MasterTool IEC XE screen of the files in the user memory area 79 5 User Interface File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help Es Mlino SPRBXKIM IBAISS gt wll 72S 5 Device Nx3010 Log Users and Groups Access Rights Information 5 H PLcLogic Cia x gt Runtime Location 4 InternalMemory 0 Application Size E B Bill of Materials EN i j 158 39 KB 162 1 1 9 2012 1 13 PM Fa image jpg 158 39 KB 162 1 12 7 2011 1 17 AM Diagnostic Explorer j Diagnostic il Library Manager MainPrg PRG Task Configuration RA Configuration 2 MainTask 5 Configuration Bus f NX3010 NX3010 S COM1 com2 Y NET1 dueagr yonpold D E Messages Current user nobody R Figure 5 7 Options for Operation of the File Storage Area For further information regarding this product featur
362. s possible for changing the settings or properties in one step See in the following the description of the possible Trace configuration and Variable configuration Record Settings See in the following a description of the Trace Configuration dialog for record settings Trace Configuration gt MinMaxColor ma MainPrg S1 OU0IT ma MainPrg S2 QUT ma MainPrg 53 COUNTER ma MainPrg 54 COUNTER ma MainPrg S3 00T ma MainPrg 54 QUT ma MainPrg S3 QUT ma MainPrg 54 OUT ma MainPrg S5 OUT ma MainPrg E QUT ma MainPrg S7 QUT ma MainPrg 55 OUT ma MainPrg S9 OU0T ma MainPrg 510 0UT ma MainPro D 1 ma MainPrg B EMN BLE ma MainPrg 55 AMPLITUD E ma MainPro iSpecialSinus ma MainPrg enum Add Variable Delete Variable Record Settings Trigger Variable MainPrg bTrigger Trigger edge positive Post Trigger samples Trigger Level Record condition EPR BREA SSS Comment Generate Trace POU for visualization Resolution E Create persistent record Figure 8 37 Trace Configuration Record Settings 270 8 Editors e Trigger Variable Optionally a trigger can be configured which should determine the time span of tracing according to certain conditions The following settings have to be made for this purpose Enter a boolean variable an expression or an analogue variable In addition enumeration variables or property variables can be entered When this variable has reached a defined
363. s task execution cycle Communication Timeout TCP IP 3000 10to 65535 Timeout ms The connection is never closed in normal situations The connection is closed at the end of each communication The connection is Time without activity 10 to 3600 closed after a time on a TCP IP of inactivity s connection after which the connection is terminated Table 8 24 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Direct Representation Advanced Configurations Adding a MODBUS Relation This configuration is the same as the MODBUS RTU Master for Direct Representation one MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping The general parameters found on the initial screen of the MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Figure 8 63 are defined as General Parameters settings Connection Mode TCP RTU over TCP TOP Figure 8 63 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping General Parameters Screen Configuration Possibilities RTU via TCP Connection Mode Protocol selection TCP TCP Table 8 25 MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping General Configuration General Parameters The configuration of the slave devices seen on Figure 8 64 follow the parameters above 292 8 Editors Mappings Requests General Parameters settings IP Address 0 0 0 d y TCP Port 502 Slave Address 1 S Advanced Figure 8 64 General Parameters on MODBUS Ethernet Client for Symbolic Mapping Configuration Desc
364. select the name of the trace on top level of the trace tree Then the Record Settings dialog is opened For adding a variable to the trace or deleting one see the commands below the record tree New Variable Delete Variable For changing the variable settings select the name of the desired variable then the Variable Settings dialog is opened In addition it is possible to select several items with lt SHIFT gt mouse click or lt CTRL gt mouse click of the variable list Then the changing in the Variable Settings dialog is effected on all of the selected items 269 a Trace Configuration MinMaxColor ma MainPrg 51 0UT ma MainPrg 52 0UT ma MainPrg S53 COUNTER ma MainPrg 54 COUNTER ma MainPrg 55 QUT ma MainPrg 54 QUT ma MainPrg S3 UT ma MainPrg 54 QUT ma MainPrg 55 QUT ma MainPrg B QUT ma MainPrg S57 OUT ma MainPrg 58 OUT ma MainPrg 59 QUT ma MainPrg 510 QUT ma MainPrg D IM ma MainPrg B EMN BLE ma MainPrg 53 AMPLITUDE ma MainPro ispecialSinus ma MainPrg enum Add Variable Delete Variable 8 Editors Variable Settings Variable MainPrg 51 OUT Graph color MM Black Graph type Line x Activate minimum warning Critical lower limit 100 Warning minimum color MM Black Activate maximum warning Critical upper limit 500 Warning maximum color bl Appearance Figure 8 36 Multi Selection of Variables With lt SHIFT gt or lt CTRL gt mouse click multiple selection of variables i
365. ser interface editors menus etc depends on the currently used components defined in a profile There are system components which are essential and optional components Project organization is also determined by the mind of object orientation A MasterTool IEC XE project contains a PLC program composed of various programming objects and it contains definitions of the resources which are needed to run instances of the program application on defined target systems devices PLCs So there are two main types of objects in a project o Programming objects Programming objects POUS which can be instantiated in the entire project 1 e for all applications defined in the project must be managed in the POUs window These are programs functions function blocks methods interfaces actions data type definitions etc The instantiating 1s done by calling a program POU by an application assigned task Programming objects which are managed in the devices window 1 e which are directly assigned to an application cannot only be instantiated by another application inserted below o Resource objects These are device objects applications task configurations and recipe managers etc which are managed in the device tree or in the graphic editor depending on the device type When inserting objects in the devices tree the hardware to be controlled must be mapped according to certain rules Code generation by integrated compilers and use of machin
366. sert Jump Symbol This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a jump element before the currently selected element The new jump automatically is provided with Step specifying the target of the jump Replace this string by the name of a step or by the label of a parallel branch which should be jumped to Insert Jump After Symbol This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a jump element after the currently selected element Jumps may only be used at the end of an alternative branch The new jump automatically is provided with Step specifying the target of the jump Replace this string by the name of a step or by the label of a parallel branch which should be jumped to step fp te ote PO e t41 5 td 141 i a A y tae Es t42 Peer eres Insert Jump After Step4 Step4 E TRUE Teese H Init TRUE Init Figure 7 97 Insert Jump After Insert Macro Symbol Elt This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a macro box before the currently selected position in the diagram By default the macro name Macro lt x gt will be entered in the box whereby x is a running number You can edit the macro name To edit or view a macro the macro editor can be opened via command Zoom into macro 180 7 Menu Commands gt Stepl Figure 7 98 Macro Selected in SFC Diagram Insert Macro After Symbol H This command is used in the SFC editor to insert a macro afte
367. shortcuts Trace diagram action Left right arrow key lt ALT gt Scroll the time axis of the trace horizontal Up and down arrow key without Scroll the time axis of the trace vertical pressing lt ALT gt 264 8 Editors Zooms the coordinate system along the x and y axes Keys and lt SHIFT gt Zooms along the x axis horizontal Keys and lt CTRL gt Zooms along the y axis vertical Left right arrow key Scroll the cursor left and right Table 8 4 Function Keys in Default Mode With activated multi channel option the using of the function keys has following effect Left right arrow key lt ALT gt Scroll the time horizontal axis of all diagrams simultaneously Up and down arrow key with or Scroll only the selected diagram vertical without pressing the lt ALT gt key Keys and numeric keypad or Zooms the coordinate system along the x and y axes of all keyboard diagrams simultaneously Keys and lt SHIFT gt numeric Zooms all diagrams along the x axis horizontal keypad or keyboard Keys and lt CTRL gt numeric Zooms all diagrams along the y axis vertical keypad or keyboard Left right arrow key Scroll the cursor left and right Table 8 5 Function Keys in Multi Channel Mode Trace Editor Overview Commands and zoom functionality Configuration of the trace Configuration of variables Trace editor in online mode Overview The Trace Editor is used to configure and to
368. shows the two device trees associated to the projects Therein you see the name of identical units displayed in black with no further remarks Otherwise the name of an unit is displayed e In bold blue if it exists in the reference project only instead of its name a gap will be inserted at the corresponding place in the device tree of the actual project e In bold green if it exists in the actual project only instead of its name a gap will be inserted at the corresponding place in the device tree of the reference project e In bold red in both parts of the window if there are differences in the two versions of the unit concerning the implementation In addition the unit name is followed by El e In red if the differences of the versions are related only to properties indicated by Esp subsequent to the unit name access rights indicated by subsequent to the unit name or added folders indicated by a subsequent to the unit name In the last case the corresponding path of the unit concerned is displayed straight below the sub window as soon as you place the mouse pointer on its name in the actual project or the reference project respectively In addition each line containing a colored entry 1s highlighted in grey Below the sub window the user find further lines displaying the options set for the comparing as well as a short statistic showing the number of additions deletions and changes 146 7 Menu Commands You may
369. sions MasterTool IEC XE MT8500 has four distribution versions each one with an optimized portfolio in accordance with the user s needs e Lite free programming software that allows the programming and project loading of up to 320 I O points on Nexto bus and only NX3010 on CPUs e Basic software that allows the programming and project loading of up to 2048 I O points on CPUs NX3010 and NX3020 e Professional programming software for all Nexto Series CPUs e Advanced programming software with tools for large scale applications using half cluster redundancy Each one of these versions has unique characteristics purposes and features for each specific objective lite Basic Professional Advanced _ 6 6 6 6 Available languages Structured Text ST Sequential Function Chart SFC Function Block Diagram FBD Ladder Diagram LD Instruction List IL Continuous Function Chart CFC Supported Nexto Series CPUs 2 NX3010 Yes NX3020 No Yes NX3030 No No Yes Ethernet expansion support No Ethernet expansion redundancy support Fieldbus support Fieldbus redundancy support Half Cluster redundancy support No Yes Limitation of number of I O points Yes No Maximum number of I O points Unlimited Unlimited NOTE Maximum number of I O To MasterTool IEC XE Professional and Advanced versions there is no limit for maximum number of I O points In this case MT8500 makes no checking However the amount of points is limited by the
370. sistor_Opto_1 P02020 1600 Transistor Opto comi EE MODBUS RTU_Master MODBUSRTU Master comM2 H MODBUS_RTU_Slave MODBUSRTU Slave NET1 H MODBUS_Ethernet_Client MODBUS Ethernet Client i MODBUS Ethernet_Server MODBUS Ethernet Server Figure 3 2 Device Tree e The root node of the tree always is a symbolic node entry E lt projectname gt e Each entry in the device tree shows the symbol the symbolic name editable and the device type 23 3 Concepts and Basic Components A device is programmable or just parameterizable The type of the device determines the possible position within the resources tree and also which further resources can be inserted below the device Programmable devices are indicated by an additional El Plc Logic node inserted automatically below the device entry Below this node the objects needed for programming the device applications text lists etc as well as functional objects like e g a Parameter Manager can be inserted Pure parameterizable devices cannot get assigned such programming objects however the values of the device parameters might be edited in the parameter dialog of the device editor Regard that the programmability of a device is a property which can change device description without the need of reinserting the device The configuration of a device concerning communication parameters I O Mapping is done in the Device dialog Device Editor which can be opened by a do
371. sively the MainPrg program The MainTask is already completely defined and the developer must create the MainPrg program using any of the IEC 61131 3 languages It is not always possible to convert a program to another language but it is always possible to create a new program with the same name constructed with a different language The MasterTool IEC XE standard option is to use the 17 Basic Normal 3 Concepts and Basic Components MasterTool Standard Project associated to the Single profile which also includes the MainPrg program created in the selected language when the project was created This type of application never needs to consider issues as data consistence resource sharing or mutual exclusion mechanisms Priority Type Cycle Table 3 1 Task on Single Profile In the Basic project profile the application has a user task from the Continuous type called MainTask which executes the program in a continuous loop with no definition of cycle time with priority fixed in 13 This task is responsible for the execution of a single programming unit POU called MainPrg It is important to stress that the cycle time can vary according to the communication task quantity used as in this mode the main task 1s interrupted by communication tasks This profile allows the inclusion of two interruption tasks with higher priority which can preempt the MainTask at any moment the task called ExternInterruptTask00 is an interruption task fr
372. stem So no real target device is needed to test the online behavior of an application 187 7 Menu Commands If the command 1s called from the Online menu the currently active application will be concerned If the command is called from the context menu when an application object is selected in the device tree then the selected application will be affected no matter whether it is set active When command Simulation is activated E Simulation the device entry in the device tree will be displayed in italic letters and at the first login with the current active application you will be asked whether application Sim lt device name gt lt application name gt should be created and loaded to the simulation target No communication settings have to be done See Figure 7 100 for an example Login has just been performed for the currently active application Test El project Information Y Project Settings S E PLC Logic Application Bill of Materials E Configuration and C 4 Diagnostic Explorer pe Diagnostc il Library Manager E MainPrg PRG Task Configuration l a Configuration Bus Nx3030 NX3030 Y comi a com2 Y NETI Y NET2 Application Sim Device Application does not exist on device Do you want to create it and proceed with download Se e NX9001 00 Figure 7 100 Login to the Simulator Target After successful login the user can use the r
373. t must be included through menu View clicking on the item Product Library as shown on Figure 4 6 34 4 Quick Start Breakpoints Call Stack Cross Reference List start Page Properties Figure 4 6 Library Visualization Then the module to be inserted in the project must be selected and dragged to the bus configuration area pressing the mouse left button File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help JR OF J Device NX3010 5 gt Pic Logic NX1001 Application 24 Vdc 16 DI Module Bill of Materials E Configuration and Consumption Diagnostic Explorer NX1005 Diagnostic 24Vdc 8 DO Transistor 8 DI Mixed il Library Manager Module 2 MainPrg PRG Task Configuration NX2001 2 Configuration 24 Vde 16 DO Transistor Module MainTask Configuration Bus NX3010 NX3010 n NX2020 16 DO Relay Module A12q1 PNpOJd D comi com2 NET1 Current user nobody Figure 4 7 Adding Modules 35 4 Quick Start Creating POUs A POU Program Organization Unit is a subdivision from the applicative program which can be written in any language available in the MasterTool IEC XE software With the project creation through a selected profile some POUs are already created but the user can create as many as he wants limited by the program memory size To insert a new POU one must click using the mouse right button on Application default
374. t program download Implicidy at creating bootproject Only on demand Cancel Figure 7 41 Project Settings Dialog Category Source Download The following settings are valid for a source download that is transferring the project file to the PLC e Destination device By default no device is predefined here However you can select one from the selection list which offers all programmable devices defined in the project e Content Predefines the selection of project belonging files to be stored in the archive file for source download e Timing Predefines when a source download will be done o Implicitly at program download The source download is executed at each program download without any user interaction o Prompt at program download At each program download the user will be asked whether also a source download should be done o Implicitly at creating bootproject The source download is executed at each boot project creation without any user interaction o Only on demand The source download has to be initiated by command Source Download 132 7 Menu Commands Compile Options Project Settings Compileoptions Page Setup Security Compiler Version a Source Download Fix Version ej Users and Groups Visualization Profile Settings save parse trees to file v replace constants Figure 7 42 Project Settings Dialog Category Compile Options Compiler Version Here the user can define which compiler vers
375. t side of the margin area in the currently active part of the editor Unfocused border Color of the vertical separator line on the right side of the margin area color in the currently not active part of the editor Mouse actions Activating Deactivating and configuration of the display of inline monitoring field Define which of the following actions should be performed when you perform the associated type of mouse click on the plus resp minus sign before the header line of a fold None No action Select fold The lines of the fold area will be selected Toggle fold The first level of the fold will be opened and closed Toggle fold fully All levels of a fold will be opened and closed Types of mouse clicks Click Shift Click Ctrl Click Alt Click Table 7 5 Left Margin Options 218 gi CFC Editor iP Declaration editor ES FED LD and IL editor Features ad International Settings Load and Save E SFC E SFC editor Ef SmartCoding Syntax Highlighting 3 Text editor Editing Text area Margin Monitoring 7 Menu Commands W Enable inline monitoring Monitoring foreground color MN Black Monitoring background color MS Black Flow control foreground color Flow control background color EJ PeachPuff EST PaleGreen el Y Float precision 3 gt digits String length 10 characters Monitoring sample Flow control sample F
376. t tab This button 1s enabled only with the PLC is in Offline mode The Chart Configuration window allows you to configure some visual characteristics of the trend chart The Figure 8 82 shows this window 307 8 Editors Chart Configuration Aris X Axis Y Chart Details Display Mode Display Mode Stored Points Normal display Normal display 1000 Points on Chart Y Min Sample Time ms 50 0 7 100 X Displacement Y Max 5 100 Defaut Cancel Figure 8 82 Chart Configuration Window It can be observed that this window is formed by the X Axis Y Axis and Chart Details groups In the group X Axis is possible to configure how the axis x will be displayed with following options e Normal display only the last k monitoring points are displayed in the chart where k is configured in the field Points on Chart e AutoFit all monitoring points are presented in the trend chart The X Displacement field specifies the step offset of the lt and gt buttons located just below the trend chart In the group Y Axis 1s possible to configure how the axis y will be displayed with following options e Normal display the y axis will be displayed in the range of 0 to 100 fields Y Min and Y Max remain disabled e AutoFit the y axis will automatically adjust to display the data collected by monitoring fields Y Min and Y Max remain disabled e Personalized the range of values displayed by the y a
377. t up a trace use the context menu in the right part of the trace window Add Variable dialog to add a variable and set some display parameters color graph type etc Delete Variable to delete the selected variables Visible to set a selected variable visible Appearance dialog to determine the appearance of the graph this command is grayed as long as no configuration is loaded Configuration dialog for the definition of the trace conditions curve type etc and once again appearance of the graphs with its particular trace variables A trace configuration can be stored to an external file trace and be reloaded to the trace window The Trace menu provides additional commands for working in the currently displayed trace graphs 267 8 Editors Add Variable Trace configuration and variable dialog opens when using command Add Variable in the context menu of the trace tree window in the Trace editor Trace Configuration Variable Settinas Variable 0 asa Graph color MI Green k Graph type Line Activate minimum warning Critical lower limit Warning minimum color Actvate maximum warning Critical upper limit Warning maximum color Appearance Add Variable Delete Variable Figure 8 34 Trace Configuration Dialog e Variable Enter here the name path of the variable to be traced The Input Assistant a can be used in order to get a valid entry Check and edit the current configurati
378. table cell on a double click opens the respective possibilities to enter a value For editing the Scope the double click will open a list from which you can choose the desired scope and scope attribute keyword flag The Data type can be typed in directly or via the gt button The Input Assistant or the Array Wizard can be used The initialization value can be typed in directly or via the L button The Initialization Value dialog can be used which is helpful for structured variables aaan ae Expression Init value Data type 3 al ARRAY 0 4 0 2 OF DINT ai 0 1 DINT al 0 2 DINT aifi 0 DINT aifi 1 DINT aifi 2 DINT al 2 0 DINT ai 1 DINT al 2 2 DINT ai 3 0 DINT ai 3 1 DINT al 3 2 DINT a1 4 0 DINT E Apply value to selected lines Reset selected lines to default values Cancel Figure 8 10 Initialization Value Dialog All expressions of the variable will be displayed with the current init values Select the desired ones and edit the initialization value in the field below the listing Then use button Apply value to selected lines To restore the default initializations use button Reset selected lines to default values Line breaks in the Comment entry can be inserted via lt CTRL gt lt ENTER gt The Attributes entries are done in the Attributes dialog where multiple attributes and pragmas can be entered in text format They have to be inserted without enclosing braces a sepa
379. te project and files by defining a password to access them This means that these files will be available both read and write operations only after unlocking them with the correct password Secure PLC Login provides a way to protect the user application from any unauthorized access By enabling this feature Nexto CPU will request a user and a password before performing any available command in MasterTool IEC XE and Nexto CPU as stopping programming and forcing of outputs in the target CPU MasterTool IEC XE allows the use of fieldbus interfaces in an easier way than ever seen before The user does not need any special software to configure fieldbuses anymore because MasterTool IEC XE covers this requirement providing a unique tool reducing engineering time and making applications more simple In order to increase user s productivity some important features are also available Module Printing which is a report generation of every module specific parameters and application general settings Logic Printing which is a report generation of all application code Enhanced Project Verification which helps user to check several different conditions during programming like programming syntax power supply module current consumption placement rules for Nexto modules modules parameters and settings Real Time Debugging which provides useful way to check the application step by step verify variables values or add and remove breakpoints during Nexto CPU pr
380. tering your new suggestion twice in the edit fields New Password and Confirm password 135 7 Menu Commands Users and Groups The Project Settings dialog in category Users and Groups provides three subdialogs for the user management for the current project e Users e Groups e Settings Users Project Settings Page Setup Security E Source Download ay Users and Groups dE Visualization Profile Full name Owner REN 1 ere 89 is member of group Owner d is member of group Everyone Figure 7 46 Project Settings Users dialog The currently registered users are listed in a tree structure If defined via the Add User or Edit User dialog besides the Name logon name also the full name and a description for the user are displayed The ownerships of each user can be viewed hidden via the plus minus sign Each user per default is member of group Everyone To define a new user account use button Add to open the Add User dialog 136 7 Menu Commands Add User Account properties Logon name user 1 Full name user 1 Description User Boss Password Confirm password Active Memberships Owe This user is also member of the Everyone group cancel Figure 7 47 Add User Dialog Fill in the following fields Logon name Logon name for the new user Full name Complete name of the new user Just to give additional information Description Description on the new user
381. th system events Difference between Status and Event The specified event being TRUE fulfills the start condition of a status driven task whereas an event driven task requires the change of the event from FALSE to TRUE If the sampling rate of the task scheduler is too low rising edges of the event may be left undetected 1 2 3 4 Figure 8 28 Resulting Behavior of the Task in Reaction to an Event Green Line At sampling points 1 4 magenta tasks of different types show different reaction Figure 8 28 Behavior atpoint 1 2 J 3 4 Table 8 1 Tasks Behavior Some entries are obligatory depending on the task choice The Interval is obligatory for types Cyclic and External if the event requires a time entry the period of time after which the task should be restarted If you enter a number then you can choose the desired unit in the selection box behind the edit field milliseconds ms or microseconds us Inputs in ms format will be shown in the TIME format for example t 200ms Inputs in ms will be displayed as a pure number for example 300 The Event is obligatory for Types Event or External and a global variable which will trigger the start of the task as soon as a rising edge 1s detected Use button or the Input Assistant lt F2 gt to get a list of all available global event variables e Watchdog For each task a time control watchdog can be configured If the target system suppo
382. the PLCs if the redundancy of PLCs 1s being used For further information consult the manual of the corresponding CPU Reset Warm This command is available in online mode It resets with exception of the remanent retain or persistent variables all variables of the currently active application to their initialization values If you have initialized variables with specific values they will be reset exactly to that value All other variables are set at a standard initialization value for example integers at 0 As a precautionary measure MasterTool IEC XE asks you to confirm your decision before all of the variables are overwritten The situation is that which occurs in the event of a power outage or by turning the controller off then on warm restart while the program is running A reset disables the breakpoints currently set in the application If the command Reset warm 1s called during the program run is hold on a breakpoint the user will be asked whether the cycle should be finished before performing the reset or if the reset shall terminate the task and perform the reset immediately Be aware that not all runtime systems are able to perform a reset without finishing the cycle before After a reset use the Start command to restart the application Reset Cold This command is available in online mode It corresponds to Reset warm but besides of normal and persistent variables also sets back retain variables of the currently
383. the POUs or Devices tree and are indicated in the Permissions dialog by the syntax lt father object gt lt child object gt Example Action ACT is assigned to the object MainPrg POU So in the POUs window ACT is shown in the objects tree indented below MainPrg In the Permissions dialog ACT is represented by MainPrg ACT indicating that MainPrg is the father of ACT If the modify right would be denied explicitly for 81 6 User and Access Right Managemente MainPrg and a certain user group the default value of the modify right for ACT automatically also would be denied Users and Groups Common For devices supporting an online user management this dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor It allows for setting up user accounts and user groups which in combination with the Access Rights management serves to control the access on objects on the PLC in online mode It might be desired that certain functions of a controller can only be executed by authorized users For this purpose the Online User Management feature provides the possibility to set up user accounts to assign access rights for user groups and to force an user authentication at login The device specific user management might be predefined by the device description and it also depends on this description to what extent the definitions can be edited in the configuration dialogs in the programming system Like in th
384. the entry in the Properties table and for the respective keys also in the Summary tab To remove a key Select the entry in column Key of the Properties table and press button Remove Automatically generate POUs for property access If this option is activated automatically function POUs will be created in the POUs window which can be used to access the project properties values in the application program Special functions will be created in this case for the properties Company Title and Version GetCompany GetTitle GetVersion For accessing additionally defined properties a respective function for each property type GetTextProperty GetBooleanProperty GetNumberProperty GetVersionProperty will be available In this case call the appropriate function pass the property key as defined in the properties tab as an input and you will get returned the property value 130 7 Menu Commands Example The following property is defined in the Properties tab Key nProp1 Type Number Value 333 To get the value in the application program call function GetNumberProperty for example showprop GetNumberProperty nProp1 showprop must be declared as type DINT in this case Statistics Project Information Number of objects 28 a Application 1 Bill of Materials 1 3 Configuration and Consumption 1 A Connector 3 H Device 4 Diagnostic Explorer 1 Folder 3 g Global Variable List 2 Library Manager 1 EV PLC Logi
385. the execution order in the CFC Editor is determined by the topological order of the elements and not by the data flow Topological order means that the execution order that 1s the processing of the elements runs from left to right and from top to bottom The element numbers indicating the position of an element within the processing list increase from left to right and from top to bottom The position of the connection lines is not relevant only the location of the elements is important When the command is executed implicitly all currently selected elements get removed from the processing list and then re inserted one by one in the remaining list from bottom right through to upper left In doing so each selected element will be entered before its topological successor and the numbers of the remaining elements will be adapted Example Topological arranging of selected elements 4 15 lt RETURN Se Figure 7 88 Sequence Before The elements with numbers 1 2 and 3 are selected If now the command Order By Topology is executed the elements first will be taken out of the sequential processing list The subsequent re inserting will be done conversely First ivar will be inserted ahead of label count thus getting number 4 which makes RETURN fall back to 3 Then jump count gets inserted ahead of Var6 and thus gets number 5 This effects that label count before then having 5 output 1ivar3 and RETURN each get numbered down by 1
386. the setting Online mode information status of the application on the device o RUN program running program stopped program halted on a breakpoint Program loaded program loaded on device Program unchanged program on device matches that in the programming system Program modified Online Change program on device differs from that in the programming system online change required Program modified Full download program on device differs from that in the programming system full download required O OOOO O Windows Views Editor Windows The windows you get displayed within or beside the user interface frame window at first sight all look the same However there are two types Some can be docked to any margin of the frame window or alternatively can be positioned on the screen as undocked windows independently from the frame window In addition they can be hidden that is just represented by a tab in the frame border Those windows display information which is not depending on a single object of the project for example Messages Devices POUs Toolbox They can be accessed via the View menu commands and also are named views Most views include a non configurable toolbar with buttons for sorting viewing searching within the window Others open when you are viewing or editing a specific project object in the respective editor Those are displayed in a tabbed editor area or depending on the given user interfa
387. there is no explicit access right definition for the action s currently selected in the Actions window If currently multiple actions are selected in the Actions window which do not have unique settings referring to the currently selected group no icon will be displayed 86 6 User and Access Right Managemente Button bar After having selected the desired object s below the desired action in the Actions window and having selected the desired group in the Permissions window one of the following buttons can be used SP Grant Explicit granting access permission m eny ee 1 1 Deny Explicit denying access permission Clear The currently granted access right for the action s currently selected in the Actions window will be deleted that is set back to the default Applying and Storing the Current Configuration See the respective buttons in the top bar of the dialog it Upload from device _ Download to device The currently configured Access Rights definitions must be downloaded to the device to get it effective The configuration currently applied on the device can be uploaded into the configuration dialog lel Save to disk lar Load from disk The current configuration can be stored in a xml file dar and re loaded from this file which is useful to set up the same user configuration on multiple systems The standard dialog for browsing in the file system will be provided for this purpose The file filter au
388. there via button Remove Save Scheme Please enter a name for the scheme int_in_pous cas Figure 7 13 Save Scheme Dialog e All open editors All editors currently opened in a window will be searched 102 7 Menu Commands Active editor Just the editor where currently the cursor is placed will be searched Selection only Only the currently selected text will be searched for the specified search string After having set all find and search options press button Find Next To step through the found locations of the searched string step by step The respective editor windows will be opened and the found string will be highlighted Find All To get a list of the found locations in the Message window The progress of the search process is displayed within the status line the search may be interrupted by making use of the button Cancel in the status line The search being completed the following information is displayed for each location Description Expression containing the search string Project Project name Object Object name Position Position for example Line number within the object in brackets Decl for Declaration part resp Impl for Implementation part of the editor window Below see the number of total found objects of matching objects and total objects searched Messages v l X Podala e o Description Project Object Position m VAR_GLOBAL Project GVL Device PLC Lo Line 1 VA
389. this tab The command corresponds to the use of the Docking button in the upper right corner of a window Next Pane Default Shortcut lt F6 gt This command can be used in a window with two or several panes to get to the next pane Example If in an object is opened in a ST editor window and the cursor is currently placed in the declaration part with Next Pane the focus will change to the implementation part Previous Pane Default Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F6 gt This command can be used in a window with two or several panes to get to the previous pane Example If in an object is opened in a ST editor window and the cursor is currently placed in the implementation part with Previous Pane the focus will change to the declaration part Window lt n gt For each currently opened editor window the Window menu contains a command named lt object name gt by which the window can be made active that is the focus can be placed there Behind the object name offline will be added for offline views Impl or lt instance path gt will be added in case of function block views Windows This command opens the Windows dialog where you get listed all currently defined editor windows that 1s windows used for editing any objects 227 7 Menu Commands To activate a window that is to set the focus to that window select the respective entry and use button Activate To close one or several windows sele
390. tion last access date attributes 201 7 Menu Commands General Title NextoStandard Version 1 0 0 13 Company WAA Project Nexto Standard Sizes 115 34 KB 118 110 bytes Released True Created Tuesday July 17 2012 1 42 21 PM l o Changed Monday July 09 2012 8 57 28 AM Title NextoStandard Last access Tuesday July 17 2012 1 42 21 PM Version 1 0 0 13 Attributes A Key Value Contents SD entrained Z rputsjousputs S E Application and Task Info E GetAppinfo GetNoOfApplication a Name Type Inherited from Address Initial GetTaskInfo Get pplnfo ERRORCODE E SetTaskStatus 4 psAppName POINTER TO STRING H E Cluster Configuration 4 pst ppinfo POINTER TO stCmpApp H E y0 Update e IP Address H E Multitasking El i Daal Tima Clack Fonectiane WW Figure 7 114 Details The Dependencies button displays the current library dependencies other libraries included in this with the following information title version and company PP y EN O Ma O Wa Jamas Pare AY 7 Dependencies NextoStandard 1 0 0 13 WAA This library depends on the following libraries Title Version Company cod FCMpApp A CmplecTask a FloDrvNextoBus a loStandard E F5ys Time gt a F5ys Types Figure 7 115 Dependencies Install Library Symbol i Install library is accessed through the Tools menu and opens a dialog for installing libraries Install library is accessed through the Jools menu and ope
391. tion correspondingly by default 1s named Trans lt n gt To modify the default names perform a mouse click on the name string to get it editable Insert Step Transition After Symbol This command is used in the SFC Editor to insert a step and a transition after the currently selected step or transition The positioning sequence of the new step and transition depends on whether a step or transition have been selected when performing the insert command Automatically the sequence step transition step transition will be kept 176 Parallel 7 Menu Commands Figure 7 93 Step and Transition Inserted In this example the new step and transition are placed after transition TRUE which had been selected when performing the Insert command The new step by default is named Step lt n gt whereby n is a running number starting with 0 for the first step which is inserted in addition to the init step The new transition correspondingly by default is named Trans lt n gt To modify the default names perform a mouse click on the name string in order to get into the edit mode Symbol This command available in the SFC Editor transforms the currently selected alternative branch to a parallel branch Notice that after a branch transformation you must check and adapt the chart appropriately that is you must arrange steps and transitions as required for the respective type of branching Alternative Symb
392. tion development a profile which implies in the application implementation form With the diversity of application types supported by the Nexto Series Runtime System following a profile is a way to simplify the programming complexity The applications can be created according to the following profiles Single Basic Normal Expert Custom The MasterTool IEC XE software offers a template called MasterTool Standard Project which must be selected by the user as a model in the project creation The new application will be developed according to a defined profile also chosen by the user adopting the predefined rules features and patterns Each project profile defines standard names for tasks and programs For compatibility guarantee of a project being developed using a specific profile two approaches are used e MasterTool IEC XE allows the project creation only based on a template selected at the same time as the profile to be used e At the code generation MasterTool IEC XE checks all the defined rules for the user valid profile For details on Profiles see Profiles Start MasterTool IEC XE From the Start menu on your PC choose MasterTool IEC XE option Alternatively the user can start via the MasterTool IEC XE icon which will be available on the desktop after installation Initially the user must create a new MasterTool IEC XE project from the File menu followed by New Project as shown on Figure 4 1 31 4 Quic
393. tivity If activated the user account will be logged out automatically after the specified number of minutes of inactivity no user actions via mouse or keyboard registered in the programming system Default option activated time 10 minutes permissible time values 1 180 minutes Project Update This command opens the window Project update it aims to allow modifying the device used and the current project profile 140 7 Menu Commands W Project Update Modify Device Device model NX3010 Altus 5 4 1 2 0 4 Select device NX3010 Altus S A 1 2 0 4 Project Profile Current profile Custom Select profile Single Figure 7 51 Project Update Modify Device Allows updating projects created with previous versions of MasterTool IEC XE and modify the CPU model In this group are the following fields e Device model displays the model the vendor and the version of the device present in the project e Select device displays all the available options for modification or updating of models and versions of CPUs e Modify performs the modification or update selected by the user thus changing the model or the versions of devices currently used in the project During the change or update process the user will be prompted to keep the parameters defined for each device Choosing Yes all parameters are kept as the original project However if there is a change in the format of these device parameters it will not be ap
394. tomatically is set to dar which means device access rights files The actual settings can also be documented as printed version by use of the command Print File menu or Document Project menu Status This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor It shows status information for example RUN STOP and specific diagnosis messages from the respective device also on the used card and the internal bus system Information This dialog is provided on a tab of the Device dialog Device Editor which can be opened for the device currently selected in the devices tree via command Edit Object or by a double click on the device entry in the Devices window If available for the current device the following general information will be displayed Name Vendor Type Version number Order Number Description and Image 87 7 Menu Commands 7 Menu Commands The available commands for MasterTool IEC XE user interface are standard See Standard Menus and Commands to check the standard menu structure File Menu The File menu provides commands which can be used for handling a project file Available commands New Project Open Project Close Project Save Project Save Project As Project Archive Source upload Source download Print Page Setup Export to CSV Import to CSV Document Recent Projects Exit New Project Symbol Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt N gt T
395. tor For information on parameters features and configuration possibilities see the current CPU manual NOTE Online changes cannot be applied when CPU parameters have changed Serial Interfaces The COM1 and COM2 serial interfaces are configured in the following screen They are located in the devices tree below the CPU 301 Morte ri Fal ol EL E j LOL File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools iE S Device Nx3010 S E PLCLogic 5 0 application ES Bill of Materials 2 Configuration and Consumption ST Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostis i Library Manager z MainPrg PRG a Task Configuration gE MainTask Configuration Bus fj Nx3010 NxX3010 4 Ir Window Help 251 8 Editors Serial Port Parameters Serial Port Parameters Serial Type RS 232C Baud Rate 115200 Parity 16197 I9NP0 1d E Messag es Figure 8 74 Serial Interfaces Current user nobody For information on parameters features and configuration possibilities see the current CPU manual Ethernet Interfaces The Ethernet interfaces are configured in the following screen They are located in the devices tree below the CPU 302 8 Editors W Ethernet project MasterTool IEC XE File Edit View Project Build Online Debug Tools Window Help 8s E alo IS Ey Pevices ll A Start Page Configuration Bus NET 1 themed T ff Device
396. tries close the dialog with OK to get applied the new settings To remove one or several user accounts select the respective users in the users list and use button Remove Note that you will get no further inquiry An appropriate error message will appear if you try to delete all users from the group At least one must remain Project Setti ngs Fage Setup Security i Source Download ej Users and Groups E Visualization Profile Marne Description 889 Owner 9 Everyone Figure 7 48 Project Settings Groups Dialog The currently available groups are displayed in a tree structure The members of each group can be viewed hidden via the plus minus sign A member again also might be a group To add a new group Use button Add to open the Add Group dialog 138 7 Menu Commands Add Group Group propertes Name Group A Description Users A Members group Ciwner user user 1 Fu FEOS Figure 7 49 Add Group Dialog Fill in the following fields e Name Name for the new group e Description Description on the new group Just to give additional information e Members List of all currently available users and groups Select those ones which should be members of the current group To set up the new group close the dialog with OK If there are incorrect entries no name defined group already existing in Members having selected a group which would cause a group cycle you wil
397. ts are managed but all objects which are needed to run an application on a device controller PLC thus also the Application objects as well as Task Configuration and Task objects But also pure programming objects like particular POUs Global Variable lists and Library Manager can instead of being managed as project globally instantiable units in the POUs window be managed ONLY in the device tree and in this case are only available for exactly their application or child applications of their application 22 3 Concepts and Basic Components See in the following some Generals on the device tree and information on the installation and the arranging of the objects Generals See in Figure 3 2 the rules for inserting objects in the device tree S45 Projet Device Nx3010 S E PLC Logic Application Ed Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption NE Diagnostics Explorer ad Diagnostic i Library Manager E CydlicPrg00 PRG CydlicPrg01 PRG ExternInterruptPrg00 PRG E MainPrg PRG TimelnterruptPrg00 PRG p Task Configuration 2 CydicTask00 2 CydicTask01 E ExternInterruptTask00 5 MainTask 2 TimelnterruptTask00 Configuration 8 mozo 3010 8 nx5001 NX5001 4 Poso64 PO5064 ff Pozo10 3201 24 Vdc_Opto PO101032D124VdcOpto Al PO2020 1600 Transistor_Opto PO2020 1600 Transistor Opto H lpos063 Po5063 i PO1010_32D1 24 Vdc Opto _1 P0101032D124 Vdc Opto Al PO2020 1600 Tran
398. types such as STRINGs when they are forced will be considered if the amount of data bytes forced is not overflowing the buffer limit Unforce Values Default Shortcut lt ALT gt lt F7 gt 197 7 Menu Commands ATTENTION Extraordinary changes of variable values in an application currently running on a controller can cause unwanted behavior of the controlled system Evaluate possible dangers before Writing or Forcing of variables and make appropriate security precautions Depending on the controlled system damages to machines and parts could result or even health and life of persons could be endangered This command is available in online mode It serves to release the forcing for all variables of the currently active application The variables will get the current value read from the PLC This corresponds to option Release the force without modifying the value which can be activated in the Prepare Value dialog for a forced variable Add All Forces to the Watchlist This command is available in online mode when one of the watch views of watch 1 2 3 or 4 is active It serves to add all currently prepared or already forced variables of the active application to this watchlist Notice however that this works only for docked watch views Notice also the possibility to use the watch view Watch all Forces which automatically contains all currently prepared or forced values and additionally provides commands for releasing the
399. uble click on the device entry see Device Editor for a description In online mode an icon at the beginning of a device entry indicates whether the device currently is connected or not connected OO O A Device not connected not configured with errors or in de simulation mode Device connected with diagnosis OO AS O O Device configured but not connected PLC is stopped and or de I O updating while PLC is stopped Table 3 7 Device Status in Online Mode Installing of Devices on the Local System Most of the required devices for already MasterTool IEC XE use are already installed automatically Installation and uninstalling of devices can be done in the Device Repository dialog see Install Library The installation bases on device description files in xml format The default extension for a valid device description file is devdesc xml However also bus specific description files like gsd files PROFIBUS can be installed via the Device Repository dialog The specific MasterTool IEC XE previous version PLC configuration files cfg can be used if an appropriate additional info file info cfg describing the respective set of configuration files is provided Arranging and Configuring Objects in the Devices Tree Rules To add an object use command Add Device The device types that can be inserted depend on the currently selected object within the device tree For example modules for a DP Profibus slave cannot be inserted without h
400. ue or in the inline monitoring field of the variable in the implementation part of the FBD LD IL editor 196 7 Menu Commands Device Application MainPrg Expression Type Value Prepared value Comment ivar INT 0 fbinst FB1 fbinst2 FB1 erg INT 100 25 result bvar BOOL TF TRUE FALSE di INT 0 Figure 7 110 Prepared Value Field The following information on the currently concerned variable is displayed e Expression path of the variable Device Application MainPrg ivar for example e Type data type DWORD for example e Value TRUE or 1 for example Choose one of the following options concerning What do you want to do e Prepare a new value for the next write or force operation Depending on the data type of the variable you can enter a new number or string which you want to get assigned to the variable e Remove preparation with a value The prepared value for a variable will be removed e Release the force without modifying the value The variable will be marked as lt Unforce gt and thus 1s prepared to get the current value read from the PLC e Release the force and restore the variable to the value it had before forcing it The variable will be marked as lt Unforce and restore gt and thus is prepared to get the value it had before forcing According to the chosen option after leaving the dialog with OK in the Prepared Value field of the monitoring view the variable wil
401. urce position of the breakpoint len Clean all breakpoints Removes all breakpoints The list will be empty Do not mix up with disabling Do Enable all breakpoints Enables 0 HS Disable all breakpoints Disables all currently enabled breakpoints The breakpoints remain in the list and can be re enabled all currently disabled breakpoints Table 7 1 Buttons for Breakpoints Call Stack Symbol fra This command opens the Call Stack window When you are stepping through a program in online mode always the currently reached step position will be indicated there with 1ts complete call path The Call Stack window below the title bar always displays the name of the currently concerned Application and the name of the Task controlling the currently reached POU The call stack is displayed as a list of positions each described by POU name Location and in case of instances with the Instance Path Depending on the editor the location 1s described by the line and column numbers text editor or by the network or element numbers graphic editors The first line in this list indicated with a yellow arrow describes the current step position If this position is within a POU which is called by another POU the position of the call will be described in the next line If this POU again is called by another POU the call position follows in the third line and so on The call stack view is also available in offline mode and during normal o
402. ure 8 71 are defined as E General Parameters 3 settings TCP Port 502 Filters Advanced Connection Mode TCP Figure 8 71 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping General Parameters Screen Configuration TCP Port TCP Port Possibilities 2 to 65534 RTU via TCP Connection Mode Protocol selection Table 8 34 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping General Configuration The configurations in the Filters button described on Table 8 33 are related to the TCP communication filters The MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping protocol communication times found in the Advanced button on the configuration screen are divided in Task Cycle and Connection Inactivity Timeout Configuration Description Defaut _ Possibilities Time for the instance execution Ea Cycle within the cycle without considering 50 5 to 100 its own execution time Connection Maximum idle time between client 10 10 a 3600 Inactivity and server before the connection Table 8 35 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping Advanced Configurations Timeout s being closed by the server Mapping Configuration The mapping configuration on the MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping seen on Figure 8 72 follow the parameters described on Table 8 36 299 8 Editors Figure 8 72 MODBUS Ethernet Server for Symbolic Mapping Screen Configuration Description Default Possibilities E Name of
403. variable exhibits a rising edge e If several tasks have a valid requirement then the task with the highest priority will be executed 259 8 Editors e If several tasks have valid conditions and equivalent priorities then the task that has had the longest waiting time will be executed first e The processing of the program calls will be done according to their order top down in the task editor If a program is called which with the same name is available assigned to the application in the device tree as well as in a library or project globally in the POUs window that one directly assigned to the application will be executed Monitor Online View of Task Editor When the top node in the Task Configuration tree 1s selected besides the Properties dialog on a further tab the Monitor dialog is available In online mode it shows the status and some current statistics on the cycles and cycle times are displayed in a table view The update interval for the values is the same as used for the monitoring of PLC values StartPage E Configuration Bus 4 Task Configuration x Properties Monitor Task Status IEC Cyde Count Cyde Count Last Cyde Time us Average Cycle Time us Max Cyde Time us Min Cyde Time us Jitter us Min Jitter us Max Jitter us Configuration Valid 6018 11625 1571 1109 226045 814 13 1395 224030 CydicTask00 Valid 120 233 143 162 1852 73 4 131 133 CydicTask01 Valid 48 93 171 140 223 73 2 58 58 ExternInte
404. ve a further dialog will appear where you will be asked whether a possibly already existing compile information file in the project folder should be overwritten Choose Yes if you intend to transfer the new boot application file to the PLC by an external tool but want to log in to this application later without being forced to perform a new download This namely would be the case if due to a previous application download already a compile info file would exist containing code and reference data of this previous application which of course would not match with that of the new boot application Logoff current online user Performs the user logoff in the current project For further information see Logoff Download This command is available in online mode It includes a build and code generation run of the currently active application program Therefore besides a syntactical check build process also application code will be generated and loaded to the PLC In the project folder the compile information file lt projectname gt lt devicename gt lt application gt compileinfo will be created 185 7 Menu Commands If you try to download an application while the same version of this application is already available on the controller you will get an dialog telling you Program has not changed No download will be performed The application will not be downloaded to the PLC During download the Message window in category Build
405. vice Application MainPrg ivar It is recommended to use the input assistant via button for this purpose Close the edit frame with lt ENTER gt The type will be added automatically Do the same for the further variables The watch list shown in the next picture just contains expressions of MainPrg but of course the user might create a set of any variables of your project Notice that for instance variables for example for the FB1 instances it is sufficient to enter the expression Device Application MainPrg fbinst The particular variables will be entered automatically and the corresponding lines can be opened via the symbol The current value of a variable is displayed in the Value column Watch 1 2 X Expression Type Value Prepared value Comment Device Application MainPrg iwar INT 6798 Device Application MainPrg fbinst FB1 Device Application MainPrg eng INT 50 result Figure 4 43 Watch List If not yet done now select the application object and perform command Start from the context menu The application will be started on the Nexto and the current value will be displayed in column Value Watch 1 IX Expression Type Value Prepared value Comment Device Application MainPrg iwar INT 7403 Device Application MainPrg fbinst FB1 4 in INT 10 F out INT 62 Device Application MainPrg eng INT 62 result Figure 4 44 Current Value Writing and forcing values is also possible To disconn
406. vice or an application At each of these possible positions only one Library Manager object can be inserted Device NX3010 Jl PLC Logic IC Application FE Bill of Materials ES Configuration and Consumption d Diagnostic Explorer ad Diagnostic Hi Library Manager Figure 8 21 Library Manager Object in the POUs View Window The Library Manager can be opened in an editor window via the Edit Object command or by a double click on the object For a description of the editor window see below Library Manager Editor Window Compile messages concerning the Library Manager are displayed in a separate list in the Messages window Library Manager Editor Window The Library Manager editor can be opened in an editor view window via the Edit Object command or by a double click on the object NOTE Some dialogs and Library Manager editor window functionalities is only available if predefined feature sets chosen by the user are Professional or if certain options are enabled For further information about features see Features 252 8 Editors Start Page Configuration Bus i Library Manager X Namespace Effective version Add library IoStandard 3 4 2 0 System loStandard 3 4 2 0 Properties 1 4 r J al 3 4 k r f f f i j NextoStandard 1 0 0 13 WAA NextoStandard Remove library loDrvNextoBus loDrvNextoBus 1 0 0 8 WA lo Drv exto Bus UU Le Placeholders NX3010 Diagnostic Structs WAA Nx3010_D
407. will only be allowed the creation of new tasks when the selected project profile is the Custom as in the other profiles the available tasks are automatically created and configured Therefore to include a new task in case the selected profile allows the Task Configuration must be clicked using the right mouse button and the Add Object and Task options must be selected as shown on Figure 4 11 38 4 Quick Start at oe T EF F Poe tLe i OS 10 p StartPage ge Pp g Device NX3010 H al 331 PLC Logic ye o Application a Bill of Materials Configuration and Consumption M Diagnostic Explorer GH Diagnostics gi Library Manager Ep dei PRG Add Device Add Folder Q Edit Object Edit Object With Simulation Figure 4 11 Creating a Task Following a screen will appear requesting the task name After click on Open to end the task creation 39 4 Quick Start Figure 4 12 Task Name Task Configuration After the task is open the configuration window will appear for the user to define and classify its functioning Priority 0 31 field define the priority a number between 0 and 31 O is the highest priority and 31 is the lowest For instance the MainTask created in the majority of the project profiles has priority 13 so this task is considered with high priority for the system Type field define the type of the task selection list offers
408. xis can be customized using the Y Min and Y Max fields In the group Chart Details is possible to configure the details of how to the chart will be displayed and stored with following options e Stored Points Sets the maximum buffer storage points on the graph for each process variable after that limit points are discarded e Sample Time ms Sets the time that each point on the graph is updated for each process variable The changes will only be confirmed by pressing the OK button If you need to return to the default setting the Default button must be pressed Group Online Settings This group is responsible for showing and enable the configuration of main parameters of PID controller The features of this group are only enabled with the PLC in Online mode The Figure 8 83 displays details of the Online Settings group 308 8 Editors Online Settings Automatic 0 00 0 900 0 275 Raw Figure 8 83 Online Settings group In the upper left corner of the Figure 8 83 are the bar graphs that display the current values of the variables SP PV and MV in percentage On the right side of the Online Settings group are the non editable fields e Status informs the PLC status can take Offline Stopped or Run e Mode informs whether the PID controller is configured in Automatic or Manual mode e Control informs right direction of the MV s action to provide a negative feedback When in Direct control 1t indicates that
409. xpressions Replace All Search Entire project n Keep modified objects open after Replace All Close Figure 7 15 Replace Symbol fa Default Shortcut lt F3 gt This command is available to get to the next found position after the Find or Replace command has been used to search for a certain string By default it is part of the Find amp Replace menu within the Edit menu Find Next Selected Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt F3 gt This command searches for the next string which matches that one which is currently selected in the editor Find Previous Symbol A Default Shortcut lt SHIFT gt lt F3 gt This command is available to get to the previous found position after the Find or Replace command has been used to search for a certain string By default it is part of the Find amp Replace menu within the Edit menu Find Previous Selected Browse Default Shortcut lt CTRL gt lt SHIFT gt lt F3 gt This command searches for the next string which matches that one which is currently selected in the editor Provides commands for the list of variable cross references and POU or variable definition The commands are available in the Browse menu Available commands e Goto Definition e Browse Cross References 104 7 Menu Commands Go to Definition F Symbol This command can be used when the cursor is currently positioned on an identifier in an editor window It will
410. y before the action which was selected when performing the insert command See also Insert Action Association After The left part of an action box contains the action qualifier by default N in the right part an action name must be entered For this purpose click on the field to open an edit frame The action must be available in the project The qualifier also can be edited inline For valid qualifiers see the corresponding item Action Association to step1 New Action Association After Figure 7 96 Actions Associated to a Step Insert Action Association After Symbol This command is used in the SFC Editor to associate a further action to a step after an existing one Select the desired step and perform the command The action box will be inserted right to the step box If already one or several action s are associated to a step the new action element will be placed as last action lowest position associated to the step if the step was selected when performing the Insert command directly after the action which was selected when performing the Insert command 179 7 Menu Commands The left part of an action box contains the action qualifier by default N in the right part an action name must be entered For this purpose click on the field to open an edit frame The action must be available in the project The qualifier also can be edited inline For valid qualifiers see the corresponding item In
411. y is marked by lv all files belonging to this category will be added to the archive file A category is marked by dl 1f the project does not include any corresponding file To select deselect a single file of a special category press the aligned button to get a list of all associated files By default all files of an activated category are selected To modify a selection activate or deactivate the desired files in the same way as the categories Now if not all but only certain files of an category are activated its mark will appear as m To add any other files to the archive then the ones listed above press the button Additional files and the corresponding dialog box opens 95 7 Menu Commands Project Archive Indude the following information into the archive Figure 7 9 Additional Files Press the button Add to open the standard dialog where you can browse for files sorted by file type and open the ones you selected by confirmation with Open The selected files will be added to the list of the Additional files dialog To remove a file from this list select 1t by a click and press the button Remove After the list of selected files fits to your demands close the dialog with OK To add a note on the project press the button Comment You may enter your comment in the rising text editor before closing it with OK When your archived project will be imported your comment can be accessed in the corresponding di
412. y the system this device will be automatically started at system start Otherwise you have to start it manually by command Start PLC from the menu you open by a mouse click on the icon This icon is part of the MasterTool IEC XE It provides a menu with a Start and a Stop commands thus allowing the user to stop or restart the service manually The menu also includes the command Exit PLC Control which just terminates the GatewaySysTray program not however the PLCservice Configure a Communication Channel to Nexto The resulting connection will finally be entered in the line below Select network path to the Nexto controller Perform a double click on entry Device in the Devices window The dialog Device will open with subdialog Communication Settings Here you have to set up the connection between Nexto and the programming system according to the item Finding the Network Run and Watch the Application on Nexto Compile and Load Application on Nexto If you just want to check your active application program for syntactic errors perform command Generate Code Build menu Even if this syntactical check has not been done before you can log into Nexto Therefore make sure that Nexto is running that is the symbol in the system bar is colored 63 4 Quick Start Use command Login Online menu If the communication settings have been properly configured the following message box will appear otherwise the user will be asked to correct

Manual de Utilização

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de Utiliza&ccedil;&atilde;o

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de Utilização